Marantz Sr7002 Users Manual 8002_U_00_cover

SR8002 to the manual bb7146e0-f248-ca14-b12c-9e0bce22e45b

2015-02-03

: Marantz Marantz-Sr7002-Users-Manual-466582 marantz-sr7002-users-manual-466582 marantz pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 94

Model SR7002/SR8002 User Guide

AV Surround Receiver

SR7002-8002_U_00_cover.indd ISR7002-8002_U_00_cover.indd I 07.8.24 1:14:10 PM07.8.24 1:14:10 PM

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK)

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is

intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage”

within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufﬁ cient magnitude to constitute

a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the

user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing)

instructions in the literature accompanying the product.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG

TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.

ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA

LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE

DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU FOND.

NOTE TO CATV SYSTEM INSTALLER:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV (Cable-TV) system installer’s attention to Section 820-40 of the

NEC which provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, speciﬁ es that the cable ground shall

be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.

NOTE:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply

with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant

to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are

designed to provide reasonable protection against

harmful interference in a residential installation. This

equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio

frequency energy and, if not installed and used in

accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful

interference to radio communications. However,

there is no guarantee that interference will not occur

in a particular installation. If this equipment does

cause harmful interference to radio or television

reception, which can be determined by tuning the

equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to

try to correct the interference by one or more of the

following measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the separation between the equipment

and receiver.

- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a

circuit different from that to which the receiver is

connected.

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV

technician for help.

NOTE:

Changes or modiﬁ cations not expressly approved by

the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

IMPORTANT SAFETY

INSTRUCTIONS

READ BEFORE OPERATING EQUIPMENT

This product was designed and manufactured to

meet strict quality and safety standards. There are,

however, some installation and operation precautions

which you should be particularly aware of.

1. Read Instructions – All the safety and

operating instructions should be read before

the product is operated.

2. Retain Instructions – The safety and

operating instructions should be retained for

future reference.

3. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product

and in the operating instructions should be

adhered to.

4. Follow Instructions – All operating and use

instructions should be followed.

5. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the

wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid

cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp

cloth for cleaning.

6. Attachments – Do not use attachments not

recommended by the product manufacturer

as they may cause hazards.

7. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product

near water-for example, near a bath tub,

wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a

wet basement, or near a swimming pool, and

the like.

8. Accessories – Do not place this product on

an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or

table. The product may fall, causing serious

injury to a child or adult, and serious damage

to the product. Use only with a cart, stand,

tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the

manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any

mounting of the product should follow the

manufacturer’s instructions, and should use

a mounting accessory recommended by the

manufacturer.

9. A product and cart combination should be

moved with care. Quick stops, excessive

force, and uneven surfaces may cause the

product and cart combination to overturn.

10. Ventilation – Slots and openings in the

cabinet are provided for ventilation and to

ensure reliable operation of the product and

to protect it from overheating, and these

openings must not be blocked or covered.

The openings should never be blocked by

placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or

other similar surface. This product should not

be placed in a built-in installation such as a

bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is

provided or the manufacturer’s instructions

have been adhered to.

11. Power Sources – This product should be

operated only from the type of power source

indicated on the marking label. If you are

not sure of the type of power supply to your

home, consult your product dealer or local

power company. For products intended to

operate from battery power, or other sources,

refer to the operating instructions.

12.

Grounding or Polarization – This product may

be equipped with a polarized alternatingcurrent

line plug (a plug having one blade wider than

the other). This plug will fit into the power

outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If

you are unable to insert the plug fully into the

outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should

still fail to ﬁ t, contact your electrician to replace

your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety

purpose of the polarized plug.

AC POLARIZED PLUG

SR7002-8002_U_00_cover.indd IISR7002-8002_U_00_cover.indd II 07.8.24 1:14:10 PM07.8.24 1:14:10 PM

13. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords

should be routed so that they are not likely

to be walked on or pinched by items placed

upon or against them, paying particular

attention to cords at plugs, convenience

receptacles, and the point where they exit

from the product.

14. Protective Attachment Plug – The product

is equipped with an attachment plug having

overload protection. This is a safety feature.

See Instruction Manual for replacement or

resetting of protective device. If replacement

of the plug is required, be sure the service

technician has used a replacement plug

specified by the manufacturer that has the

same overload protection as the original plug.

15. Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside

antenna or cable system is connected to the

product, be sure the antenna or cable system

is grounded so as to provide some protection

against voltage surges and built-up static

charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical

Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information

with regard to proper grounding of the mast

and supporting structure, grounding of

the lead-in wire to an antenna-discharge

unit, size of grounding conductors, location

of antennadischarge unit, connection to

grounding electrodes, and requirements for

the grounding electrode. See Figure 1.

16. Lightning – For added protection for this

product during a lightning storm, or when it is

left unattended and unused for long periods

of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and

disconnect the antenna or cable system. This

will prevent damage to the product due to

lightning and power-line surges.

17.

Power Lines – An outside antenna system

should not be located in the vicinity of overhead

power lines or other electric light or power

circuits, or where it can fall into such power

lines or circuits. When installing an outside

antenna system, extreme care should be taken

to keep from touching such power lines or

circuits as contact with them might be fatal.

18. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets,

extension cords, or integral convenience

receptacles as this can result in a risk of ﬁ re

or electric shock.

19. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects

of any kind into this product through openings

as they may touch dangerous voltage points

or short-out parts that could result in a ﬁ re or

electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind

on the product.

20. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this

product yourself as opening or removing

covers may expose you to dangerous voltage

or other hazards. Refer all servicing to

qualiﬁ ed service personnel.

21. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug

this product from the wall outlet and refer

servicing to qualiﬁ ed service personnel under

the following conditions:

a. When the power-supply cord or plug is

damaged.

b. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have

fallen into the product.

c. If the product has been exposed to rain or

water.

d. If the product does not operate normally by

following the operating instructions. Adjust

only those controls that are covered by

the operating instructions as an improper

adjustment of other controls may result in

damage and will often require extensive

work by a qualiﬁ ed technician to restore the

product to its normal operation.

e. If the product has been dropped or damaged

in any way, and

f. When the product exhibits a distinct change

in performance this indicates a need for

service.

22. Replacement Parts – When replacement

parts are required, be sure the service

technician has used replacement parts

specified by the manufacturer or have the

same characteristics as the original part.

Unauthorized substitutions may result in ﬁ re,

electric shock, or other hazards.

23. Safety Check – Upon completion of any

service or repairs to this product, ask the

service technician to perform safety checks

to determine that the product is in proper

operating condition.

24. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The product

should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as

recommended by the manufacturer.

25. Heat – The product should be situated away

from heat sources such as radiators, heat

registers, stoves, or other products (including

ampliﬁ ers) that produce heat.

FIGURE 1

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE, ANSI/NFPA 70

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES-003.

Cet appareil numérique de la Classe B est conforme

à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

NEC - NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

ANTENNA

LEAD IN WIRE

GROUND

CLAMP

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810-20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810-21)

ELECTRIC

SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

GROUND CLAMPS POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250, PART H)

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

U.S. Responsible Party: Marantz America, Inc.

100 Corporate Drive,

Mahwah, NJ, 07430, U.S.A.

TEL: 630-741-0300

Type of Product:

Model:

AV Surround Receiver

SR7002/8002

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the

following conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause

undesired operation.

AV_060908U1

SR7002-8002_U_00_cover.indd IIISR7002-8002_U_00_cover.indd III 07.8.24 1:14:11 PM07.8.24 1:14:11 PM

ENGLISH

INTRODUCTION

Thank you for purchasing the Marantz SR7002/SR8002 Surround receiver.

This remarkable component has been engineered to provide you with many years of home theater enjoyment.

Please take a few minutes to read this manual thoroughly before you connect and operate the SR7002/

SR8002.

As there are a number of connection and conﬁ guration options, you are encouraged to discuss your own

particular home theater setup with your Marantz A/V specialist dealer.

ACCESSORIES CHECK

Before use, check the below accessories were

included in the package.

Remote Controller RC8001SR

231

564

MEMO

CLEAR

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

Remote Controller For Multiroom RC101

AAA-size batteries × 5

Microphone

AM Loop Antenna

FM Antenna (For SR7002)

FM Feeder Antenna (For SR8002)

FM Antenna converter (Only SR8002)

AC power cable

Front AUX Jack Cover

PUSH

User Guide

Warranty Card

USA × 1

Canada × 1

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 1SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 1 07.8.24 1:14:40 PM07.8.24 1:14:40 PM

ENGLISH

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CONNECTING THE ANTENNA TERMINALS .................36

XM RADIO OVERVIEW ...................................................37

CONNECTING THE XM CONNECT-AND-PLAY

ANTENNA .........................................................................37

CONNECTING FOR THE MULTI ROOM ........................38

CONNECTING OTHER EQUIPMENT .............................39

SETUP ..................................................40

ONSCREEN DISPLAY MENU SYSTEM .........................40

1 INPUT SETUP .............................................................42

2 SPKR (SPEAKER) SETUP ..........................................45

ERROR MESSAGES .......................................................48

3 SURROUND SETUP ...................................................51

4 VIDEO SETUP .............................................................53

5 PREFERENCE ............................................................54

6 ACOUSTIC EQ ............................................................56

BASIC OPERATION (PLAY BACK) .. 58

SELECTING AN INPUT SOURCE ...................................58

SELECTING THE SURROUND MODE ...........................58

DIALOGUE NORMALIZATION MESSAGE .....................58

NIGHT MODE ...................................................................58

ADJUSTING THE MAIN VOLUME ..................................58

ADJUSTING THE TONE (BASS & TREBLE) CONTROL 59

TEMPORARILY TURNING OFF THE SOUND .................59

USING THE SLEEP TIMER .............................................59

M-DAX (MARANTZ DYNAMIC AUDIO EXPANDER) ......59

VIDEO CONVERT ............................................................59

I/P CONVERT ...................................................................60

SURROUND MODE .............................60

OTHER FUNCTION ..............................64

DISPLAY MODE ...............................................................64

RECORDING AN ANALOG SOURCE .............................64

SELECTING ANALOG AUDIO INPUT OR DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUT ..............................................................................64

LISTENING THROUGH HEADPHONES

.........................64

DOLBY HEADPHONE MODE ..........................................65

ATTENUATION TO ANALOG INPUT SIGNAL ................65

SPEAKER A/B ..................................................................65

7.1 CH INPUT ...................................................................65

INTRODUCTION ....................................1

ACCESSORIES CHECK ....................................................1

TABLE OF CONTENTS .........................2

FEATURES .............................................2

DESCRIPTION ...................................................................3

BEFORE USE .........................................6

OPERATION OF REMOTE CONTROLLER ......................7

NAMES AND FUNCTION ......................8

FRONT PANEL ...................................................................8

FL DISPLAY AND INDICATER ...........................................9

REAR PANEL .......................................10

REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION

(RC8001SR) ....................................11

NAME AND FUNCTION ...................................................11

LCD INDICATORS (RC8001SR) ......................................12

SETTING THE TIME ........................................................13

GENERAL INFORMATION OF RC8001SR TO THE UNIT

..13

CONTROLLING MARANTZ COMPONENTS .................14

BASIC OPERATION .........................................................17

PROGRAMMING MACROS ............................................20

CLONE MODE ..................................................................22

SETUP ..............................................................................23

RENOTE CONTROL OPERATION (RC101)

..24

NAME AND FUNCTION ...................................................24

GENERAL INFORMATION OF RC101 TO THE UNIT ....25

CONTROLLING MARANTZ COMPONENTS .................25

BASIC OPERATION .........................................................28

OTHER OPERATIONS ....................................................30

CONNECTIONS ...................................31

SPEAKER PLACEMENT .................................................31

CONNECTING SPEAKERS .............................................31

CONNECTING AUDIO COMPONENTS ..........................32

CONNECTING VIDEO COMPONENTS ..........................33

CONNECTING HDMI COMPONENTS ............................34

ADVANCED CONNECTING ............................................35

CONNECTING THE REMOTE CONTROL JACKS .........35

AUX2 INPUT .....................................................................66

VIDEO ON/OFF ................................................................66

TV AUTO ON/OFF FUNCTION ........................................66

LIP.SYNC ..........................................................................66

DUAL BACKUP MEMORY ...............................................66

BASIC OPERATION (TUNER) ......... 67

LISTENING TO THE TUNER ...........................................67

PRESET MEMORY ..........................................................68

LISTENING TO THE HD RADIO STATIONS

(SR8002 ONLY) ................................................................70

RBDS OPERATION (SR8002 ONLY) ..............................73

LISTENING TO XM SATELLITE RADIO ..........................74

SEARCH MODE ...............................................................75

PRESET MEMORY ..........................................................76

MULTI ROOM SYSTEM .......................78

MULTI ROOM PLAYBACK USING THE MULTI ROOM

OUT TERMINALS .............................................................78

MULTI ROOM PLAYBACK USING THE MULTI SPEAKER

TERMINALS .....................................................................78

OPERATION OF THE MULTI ROOM OUTPUTS WITH

THE REMOTE CONTROL FROM MULTI A .....................79

TROUBLESHOOTING .........................80

HDMI .................................................................................81

XM SATELLITE RADIO ....................................................81

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ..........82

FEATURES

This unit incorporates the latest generation of digital

surround sound decoding technology such as Dolby

Digital EX, Dolby Digital, DTS ES (Discrete 6.1 and

Matrix 6.1), DTS Neo:6 (Cinema, Music), Dolby Pro-

Logic II (Movie, Music and Game), Dolby Pro-Logic

IIx (Movie, Music and Game), Circle Surround II

(Cinema, Music and Mono).

Additionally, the unit is compatible with Dolby TrueHD

and DTS-HD (as used for Blu-ray and HD DVD discs)

as well as Dolby Digital Plus, an expanded and

improved version of Dolby Digital positioned as the

next-generation delivery format. These audio formats

can be sent with video signals via an HDMI cable to

HDMI 1.3a-compatible equipment.

In addition, Marantz has focused on the future. By

utilizing pre-out jacks, 7.1 direct inputs and a RS-232C

communication port, the unit is tomorrow’s technology,

today!

• THX Select 2 certiﬁ ed

7ch ampliﬁ ers have enough power for even the most

difﬁ cult conditions found in large rooms.

Enormous power reserves endow the system with

substantial dynamic ability at high sound levels.

110 watts (SR7002) / 125 watts (SR8002) to each of

the 7 main channels the power amp section features

an advanced, premium high-storage power supply

capacitors, and fully discrete output stages housed

in cast aluminum heat sinks .

This unit incorporates the most advanced Digital

Signal Processing circuitry, along with a 192 kHz/24 bit

D/A converter in each of the 7 channels. Independent

power supply circuits are incorporated for the FL

display, audio and video sections for maximum

separation, clarity and dynamic range. Together with

hand-selected customized components, all elements

work in harmony to recreate the emotion, exactly as

the artist had intended.

This unit is designed and engineered with extensive

feedback from custom installation experts, dealers

and consumers. It features multi-room/multisource,

assignable DC trigger, a RS-232C communication

port, Flasher input, heavy duty speaker binding posts

and an extensive array of both analog and digital

inputs / outputs. With 6 assignable digital inputs (7

total), 4 component inputs, Super Audio CD Multi

Channel (7.1 channel) direct inputs, video convert

system and a speaker-B and OSD output versatility

is taken to a stunning new level. Furthermore, the

unit can output the OSD information through the Y/C

(S-video) and composite video outputs.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 2SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 2 07.8.24 1:14:41 PM07.8.24 1:14:41 PM

ENGLISH

An easy-to-use programmable, learning remote

controller allows full access to all of the operating

functions and can be used for system operation as

well.

The new generation of Marantz Receivers is stylish and

completely symmetrical. On the front panel of the unit,

buttons are kept to a minimum. Source selectors and

volume controls are intuitively placed.

This unit is here to perform in your unrivaled home

entertainment setup.

• HDMI

HDMI (High-Deﬁ nition Multimedia Interface) is an

enhancement to the DVI (Digital Visual Interface)

standard. It adds capabilities for digitally transmitting

audio signals in addition to video signals. Where

multiple cables were previously needed for audio/

video, HDMI enables audio/video connection via a

single cable.

The HDMI input jacks of this unit support HDMI Ver.

1.3a. and the HDMI output jacks of this transmitter

support HDMI Ver. 1.3a.

This unit supports HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital

Content Protection). HDCP is copyright protection

technology that consists of data encoding and other

device authentication. Its purpose is to protect digital

video content. Both this unit and the connected

component (such as a video player or monitor) must

support HDCP. Before connecting a component to

this unit, refer to its instruction manual.

• xvYCC

• Deep Color 36bit

• THX / THX Surround EX

• Dolby True HD, Dolby Digital Plus dts HD

• Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital, DTS ES

(Discrete 6.1, Matrix 6.1, Neo:6)

• Dolby Headphone

• Dolby Pro Logic II (Movie, Music, Game)

• Dolby Pro Logic II x (Movie, Music, Game)

• Circle Surround II (Cinema, Music, Mono)

• HDCD

• Bi-amp drive

• Source/Pure Direct mode

• 9 bands x 7 ch GEQ

• DSD to PCM converter

• Audyssey Mult EQ

• XM Satellite Radio Ready

• XM® HD Surround Powered by Neural Audio

• HD Radio (SR8002 Only)

• Improved Station Name Input Method, 60 Presets

• Auto Adjust Function for Speaker Distance Settings

(Delay Time)

• M-DAX (Marantz Dynamic Audio eXpander)

• Assignable DC Trigger Output

• Assignable Video Input

• Auto Lipsync (Audio Delay)

• 7 × 110 Watts (8 Ohms), Discrete Ampliﬁ ers

(SR8002: 7 × 125 Watts)

• High Power Current Feedback Circuitry

• Massive Energy Power Supply, Huge EI

Transformer, Large ELCO’s. (SR7002 only)

• Troidal Core Transformer (SR8002 only)

• Function Rename

• 192 kHz/24 bit DAC for all 8 Channels

• 32 bit Digital Surround Processing Chipsets

• Large Heavy Duty Speaker Terminals for all

Channels

• Auto Input Signal Detection

• Front Optical AUX Input

(Digital Camera, Portable DVD)

• Multi Room B output (SR8002 only)

• Video Off Mode

•

Set Up Menu via all Video Output

(Composite, S-Video, Component video and

HDMI)

• Video convert system

HDMI ← Component Video ↔

S-Video ↔ Composit Video

• Two component monitor outputs

• Video I/P Converter

• Selectable Multi Room Component Video output

(SR8002 only)

• RS-232C Terminal for Future Upgrade or System

Control

• Emitter Output (SR8002 only)

• Programmable, learning remote controller

• Flasher Input

• IR Recever Input (SR8002 only)

DESCRIPTION

THX® is an exclusive set of standards and technologies

established by the world-renowned ﬁ lm production

company, Lucasﬁ lm Ltd. THX resulted from George

Lucas’ desire to reproduce the movie soundtrack as

faithfully as possible both in the movie theater and in

the home theater.

THX engineers developed patented technologies to

accurately translate the sound from a movie theater

environment into the home, correcting the tonal and

spatial errors that occur.

When the THX mode of the unit is on, three distinct

THX technologies are automatically added:

Re-Equalization-restores the correct tonal balance

for watching a movie in a home environment.

These sounds are otherwise mixed to be brighter

for a large movie theater. Re-EQ compensates for

this and prevents the soundtracks from being overly

bright and harsh when played in a home theater.

Timbre Matching-ﬁ lters the information going to the

surround speakers so they more closely match the

tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the

front speakers.

This ensures seamless panning between the front

and surround speakers.

Adaptive Decorrelation-slightly changes one surround

channel’s time and phase relationship with respect to

the other surround channel.

This expands the listening position and creates with

only two surround speakers the same spacious

surround experience as in a movie theater with

multiple surround speakers.

The unit was required to pass a rigorous series

of quality and performance tests, in addition to

incorporating the technologies explained above, in

order to be THX certiﬁ ed.

THX requirements cover every aspect of performance

including pre-amplifier and power amplifier

performance and operation, and hundreds of other

parameters in both the digital and analog domain.

Movies which have been encoded in Dolby Digital,

DTS, Dolby Pro Logic, stereo and Mono will all

beneﬁ t from the THX mode when being viewed.

The THX mode should only be activated when

watching movies which were originally produced for

a movie theater environment.

THX need not be activated for music, movies

made especially for TV, or shows such as sports

programming, talk shows, etc.

This is because they were originally mixed for a small

room environment.

THX and Select 2 are trademarks of THX Ltd. THX

may be registered in some jurisdictions. Surround

EX is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Used with

permission.

THX Surround EX—Dolby DIgital Surround EX is a

joint development of Dolby Laboratories and THX Ltd.

In a movie theater, ﬁ lm soundtracks that have been

encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology

are able to reproduce an extra channel which has

been added during the mixing of the program. This

channel, called Surround Back, places sounds

behind the listener in addition to the currently

available front left, front center, front right, surround

right, surround left and subwoofer channels. This

additional channel provides the opportunity for more

detailed imaging behind the listener and brings more

depth, spacious ambience and sound localization

than ever before.

Movies that were created using the Dolby Digital

Surround EX technology, when released into the

home consumer market may exhibit wording to that

effect on the packaging. A list of movies created

using this technology can be found on the Dolby

web site at www.dolby.com. A list of available DVD

software titles encoded with this technology an be

found at www.thx.com.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 3SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 3 07.8.24 1:14:42 PM07.8.24 1:14:42 PM

ENGLISH

This product is manufactured under license from

Neural Audio Corporation and THX Ltd. Marantz

hereby grants the user a non-exclusive, non-

transferable, limited right of use to this product under

USA and foreign patent, patent pending and other

technology or trademarks owned by Neural Audio

Corporation and THX Ltd. “Neural Surround”, “Neural

Audio”, “Neural” and “NRL” are trademarks and

logos owned by Neural Audio Corporation, THX is a

trademark of THX Ltd., which may be registered in

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent

#’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;

6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,003,467 & other U.S. and

worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS, DTS

Digital Surround, ES, and Neo:6 are registered

trademarks and the DTS logos, Symbol and DTS

• dts Digital Surround

DTS was introduced in 1994 to provide 5.1 channels

of discrete digital audio into home theater systems.

DTS brings you premium quality discrete multichannel

digital sound to both movies and music.

DTS is a multichannel sound system designed to

create full range digital sound reproduction.

The no compromise DTS digital process sets the

standard of quality for cinema sound by delivering

an exact copy of the studio master recordings to

neighborhood and home theaters.

Now, every moviegoer can hear the sound exactly as

the moviemaker intended.

DTS can be enjoyed in the home for either movies or

music on of DVD’s, LD’s, and CD’s.

• dts Neo:6®

The advantages of discrete multichannel systems

over matrix are well known.

But even in homes equipped for discrete multichannel,

there remains a need for high-quality matrix decoding.

This is because of the large library of matrix surround

motion pictures available on disc and on VHS tape;

and analog television broadcasts.

The typical matrix decoder of today derives a center

channel and a mono surround channel from two-

channel matrix stereo material. It is better than a

simple matrix in that it includes steering logic to

improve separation, but because of its mono, band-

limited surround it can be disappointing to users

accustomed to discrete multichannel.

Neo:6 offers several important improvements as

follow,

• Neo:6 provides up to six full-band channels of

matrix decoding from stereo matrix material. Users

with 6.1 and 5.1 systems will derive six and ﬁ ve

separate channels, respectively, corresponding to

the standard home-theater speaker layouts.

• Neo:6 technology allows various sound elements

within a channel or channels to be steered

separately, and in a way which follows naturally

from the original presentation.

• Neo:6 offers a music mode to expand stereo

nonmatrix recordings into the ﬁ ve- or six-channel

layout, in a way which does not diminish the subtlety

and integrity of the original stereo recording.

• dts Digital Surround ES®

DTS-ES Extended Surround is a new multichannel

digital signal format developed by Digital Theater

Systems Inc. While offering high compatibility with

the conventional DTS Digital Surround format, DTS-

ES Extended Surround greatly improves the 360-

degree surround impression and space expression

thanks to further expanded surround signals. This

format has been used professionally in movie

theaters since 1999.

In addition to the 5.1 surround channels (FL, FR, C,

SL, SR and LFE), DTS-ES Extended Surround also

offers the SB (Surround Back) channel for surround

playback with a total of 6.1 channels. DTS-ES

Extended Surround includes two signal formats with

different surround signal recording methods, as DTS-

ES Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1.

• dts Digital Surround 96/24

The stereo CD is a 16-bit medium with sampling at

44.1 kHz. Professional audio has been 20- or 24-

bit for some time, and there is increasing interest

in higher sampling rates both for recording and for

delivery into the home. Greater bit depths provide

extended dynamic range. Higher sampling rates

allow wider frequency response and the use of anti-

alias and reconstruction ﬁ lters with more favorable

aural characteristics.

DTS 96/24 allows for 5.1channel sound tracks to be

encoded at a rate of 96kHz/24bits on DVD-Video

titles.

When DVD-video appeared, it became possible to

deliver 24-bit, 96 kHz audio into the home, but only in

two channels, and with serious limitations on picture.

This capability has had little use.

DVD-audio allows 96/24 in six channels, but a

new player is needed, and only analog outputs are

provided, necessitating the use of the D/A converters

and analog electronics provided in the player.

DTS 96/24 offers the following:

1. Sound quality transparent to the original 96/24

master.

2. Full backward compatibility with all existing

decoders. (Existing decoders will output a 48 kHz

signal)

3. No new player required: DTS 96/24 can be carried

on DVD-video, or in the video zone of DVD-audio,

accessible to all DVD players.

4. 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-

motion video, for music programs and motion

picture soundtracks on DVD-video.

DTS-HD Master Audio is capable of delivering audio

that is a bit-for-bit identical to the studio master.

DTS-HD Master Audio delivers audio at super high

variable bit rates -24.5 mega-bits per second (Mbps)

on Blu-ray discs and 18.0 Mbps on HD-DVD - that

are signiﬁ cantly higher than standard DVDs . This bit

stream is so “fast” and the transfer rate is so “high”

that it can deliver the Holy Grail of audio: 7.1 audio

channels at 96k sampling frequency/24 bit depths

that are identical to the original. With DTS-HD Master

Audio, you will be able to experience movies and

music, exactly as the artist intended: clear, pure, and

uncompromised.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent

#’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;

6,226,616; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide

patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered

trademark & the DTS logos and Symbol are

Rights Reserved.

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can deliver up to 7.1

channels of sound that is virtually indistinguishable

from the original. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

delivers audio at high constant bit rates superior to

standard DVDs---6.0 Mbps on Blu-ray discs and 3.0

Mbps on HD-DVD to produce outstanding sound

quality. It is capable of delivering up to 7.1 channels

at 96k sampling frequency/24 bit depth resolution. It

allows content creators to deliver rich, high deﬁ nition

audio on movies where disc space may not allow for

DTS-HD Master Audio.

Only receiver and controller products bearing the

THX Surround EX logo, when in the THX Surround

EX mode, faithfully reproduce this new technology

in the home. This product may also engage the

THX Surround EX mode during the playback of 5.1

channel material that is not Dolby Digital Surround

EX eocnded. In such case, the information delivered

to the Surround Back channel will be program

dependent and may or may not be very pleasing

depending on the particular soundtrack and the

tastes of the individual listener.

“SURROUND EX™” is a trademark of Dolby

Laboratories. Used under authorization.

THX Select2

Before any home theater component can be THX

Select2 certified, it must pass a rigorous series

of quality and performance tests. Only then can a

product feature the THX Select2 logo, which is your

guarantee that the Home Theater products you

purchase will give you superb performance for many

years to come. THX Select2 requirements deﬁ ne

hundreds of parameters, including power ampliﬁ er

performance, and pre-amplifier performance and

operation for both digital and analog domains. THX

Select2 receivers also feature proprietary THX

technologies (e.g., THX Mode) which accurately

translate movie soundtracks for home theater

playback.

Neural SurroundTM, THX® Technologies has been

chosen as the ofﬁ cial surround sound broadcast

format for XM Satellite Radio’s “XM HD Surround”

and other leading FM/HD radio stations in the USA

and worldwide. Neural Surround, THX Technologies

delivers the rich envelopment and discrete image

detail of surround sound in a format 100% compatible

with stereo.

Neural Surround, THX Technologies draws the brain’s

attention to sonic details in musical instruments,

vocals and ambience that are typically masked by

other playback systems. This allows the listener

to fully experience the richness and subtleties in

recorded performance as never before for both

surround encoded material and regular stereo

material such as CDs or digital media players. Neural

Surround, THX Technologies is enabling the second

surround sound revolution, bringing surround directly

to your ears!

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 4SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 4 07.8.24 1:14:42 PM07.8.24 1:14:42 PM

ENGLISH

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent

#’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;

6,226,616; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide

patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered

trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD,

DTS-HD High Resolution

Audio and DTS-HD High Res Audio are trademarks

Reserved.

Dolby Digital identiﬁ es the use of Dolby Digital audio

coding for such consumer formats as DVD and

DTV. As with ﬁ lm sound, Dolby Digital can provide

up to ﬁ ve full-range channels for left, center, and

right screen channels, independent left and right

surround channels, and a sixth (“.1”) channel for low-

frequency effects.

Dolby Surround Pro Logic

is an improved matrix

decoding technology that provides better spatiality

and directionality on Dolby Surround program

material; provides a convincing three-dimensional

soundﬁ eld on conventional stereo music recordings;

and is ideally suited to bring the surround experience

to automotive sound. While conventional surround

programming is fully compatible with Dolby Surround

Pro Logic

decoders, soundtracks will be able to be

encoded speciﬁ cally to take full advantage of Pro

Logic

playback, including separate left and right

surround channels. (Such material is also compatible

with conventional Pro Logic decoders.)

Dolby Digital EX creates six full-bandwidth output

channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done

using a matrix decoder that derives three surround

channels from the two in the original recording. For

best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with

movies soundtracks recorded with Dolby Digital

Surround EX.

About Dolby Pro Logic II x

Dolby Pro Logic IIx technology delivers a natural

and immersing 7.1-channel listening experience

to the home theater environment. A product of

Dolby's expertise in surround sound and matrix

decoding technologies, Dolby Pro Logic II x is a

complete surround sound solution that maximizes

the entertainment experience from stereo as well as

5.1-channel encoded sources.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is fully compatible with Dolby

Surround Pro Logic technology and can optimally

decode the thousands of commercially available

Dolby Surround encoded video cassettes and

television programs with enhanced depth and

spatiality. It can also process any high-quality

stereo or Advanced Resolution 5.1-channel music

content into a seamless 6.1- or 7.1-channel listening

experience.

The Dolby Headphone technology provides a

surround sound listening experience over headphones.

When listening to multichannel content such as DVD

movies over headphones, the listening experience

is fundamentally different than listening to speakers.

Since the headphone speaker drivers are covering

the pinna of the ear, the listening experience differs

greatly from traditional speaker playback. Dolby

utilizes patented headphone perspective curves to

solve this problem and provides a non-fatiguing,

immersive, home theater listening experience. Dolby

Headphone also delivers exceptional 3D audio from

stereo material.

Dolby Virtual Speaker is a technologycertified

by Dolby Laboratories that creates a virtualized

surround sound experience from two speakers using

a multichannel Dolby Digital source. Additionally,

Dolby Virtual Speaker can simulate the surround

sound effect produced by Dolby Pro Logic or Dolby

Pro Logic II.

Dolby Virtual Speaker retains all the original

Multichannel audio information and provides the

listener with the sensation of being surrounded by

additional speakers.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D

symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Dolby® TrueHD is Dolby’s next-generation lossless

technology developed for high-deﬁ nition disc-based

media. Dolby TrueHD delivers tantalizing sound

that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master,

unlocking the true high-definition entertainment

experience on next-generation discs. When coupled

with high-deﬁ nition video, Dolby TrueHD offers an

unprecedented home theater experience that lets

you enjoy sound as stunning as the high-deﬁ nition

picture.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D

symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Dolby Digital Plus is a highly sophisticated and

versatile audio codec based on Dolby Digital and

designed specifically to adapt to the changing

demands of future audio, video delivery, and audio

storage systems while simultaneously retaining

backwards compatibility with the existing Dolby

Digital 5.1-channel home theater systems in use

today.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D

symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Circle Surround II (CS-II) is a powerful and versatile

multichannel technology. CS-II is designed to enable

up to 6.1 multichannel surround sound playback

from mono, stereo, CS encoded sources and other

matrix encoded sources. In all cases the decoder

extends it into 6 channels of surround audio and a

LFE/subwoofer signal. The CS-II decoder creates a

listening environment that places the listener “inside”

music performances and dramatically improves

both hi-fi audio conventional surround-encoded

video material. CS-II provides composite stereo rear

channels to greatly improve separation and image

positioning– adding a heightened sense of realism to

both audio and A/V productions.

CS-II is packed with other useful feature like dialog

clarity (SRS Dialog) for movies and cinema-like bass

enrichment (TruBass). CS-II can enable the dialog

to become clearer and more discernable in movies

and it enables the bass frequencies contained in the

original programming to more closely achieve low

frequencies–overcoming the low frequency limitations

of the speakers by full octave.

Circle Surround II, Dialog Clarity, TruBass, SRS and

symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.

Circle Surround II , Dialog Clarity and TruBass

technology are incorporated under license from SRS

Labs, Inc.

HDCD® (High Definition Compatible Digital ®) is a

patented process for delivering on Compact Disc the full

richness and details of the original microphone feed.

HDCD encoded CDs sound better because they are

encoded with 20-bits of real musical information as

compared to 16-bits for all other CDs.

HDCD overcomes the limitation of the 16-bit CD

format by using a sophisticated system to encode

the additional four bits onto the CD while remaining

completely compatible with the CD format.

When listening to HDCD recordings, you hear more

dynamic range, a focused 3-D sound stage, and

extremely natural vocal and musical timbre. With

HDCD, you get the body, depth and emotion of the

original performance not a ﬂ at, digital imitation.

HDCD system manufactured under license from

Microsoft. This product is covered by one or more

of the following: In the United States 5,479,168

5,638,074 5,640,161 5,808,574 5,838,274 5,854,600

5,864,311 5,872,531 and in Australia 669,114 with

other patents pending.

HDMI, the and High-Deﬁ nition Multimedia

Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of

HDMI Licensing LLC.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 5SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 5 07.8.24 1:14:43 PM07.8.24 1:14:43 PM

ENGLISH

BEFORE USE

This section must be read before any connection is

made to the mains supply.

EQUIPMENT MAINS WORKING SETTING

Your Marantz product has been prepared to comply

with the household power and safety requirements

that exist in your area.

SR7002/SR8002 can be powered by 120V AC only.

Recording and playback of any material may

require consent. For further information refer to the

following:

— Copyright Act 1956

— Dramatic and Musical Performers Act 1958

— Performers Protection Acts 1963 and 1972

—

Any subsequent statutory enactments and orders

DO NOT LOCATE IN THE FOLLOWING PLACES

To ensure long-lasting use, do not locate the unit where:

• Exposed to direct sunlight.

• Near to sources of heat such as heaters.

• Highly humid or poorly ventilated.

• Dusty.

• Subjected to mechanical vibrations.

•

On wobbly, inclined or otherwise unstable surfaces

• Radiated heat is blocked such as in cramped

audio racks.

To ensure proper heat radiation, ensure the below

clearance from walls and other equipment.

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

VOLUME

DOWN

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

MultEQ

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO MULTI

A/B

T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

POWER ON/OFF

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP SURR DIRECT

AUTO DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

Left

8 inchs (0.2 m)

or more

Above

8 inchs (0.2 m)

or more

Right

8 inchs (0.2 m)

or more

Rear

8 inchs (0.2 m)

or more

KEEP OBJECTS OFF

Keep objects off the unit. Blocking the vent can result

in accident and damage.

DO NOT TOUCH HOT SPOTS DURING AND

IMMEDIATELY AFTER USE

During and immediately after use, the unit is hot

in areas other than the controls and rear panel

connection jacks. Do not touch hot spots and

especially the top panel. Contact with hot areas can

cause burns.

Opening and closing the front panel door

When you want to use the controls behind

the front panel door, open the door by gently

pressing on the lower part of the panel. Keep the

door closed when not using these controls.

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

PHONES

STANDBY

SLSSR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

DISPMULTIAUTOTUNEDSTSPKR A BV-OFF

NIGHT

PEAKANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEPSURRDIRECT

AUTODISC 6.1MTX 6.1

PCM

AAC

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

S-VIDEO

DIGITALVIDEOLR

ENTER

DOWN

VOLUME

POWER ON/OFF

INPUT SELECTOR

Caution:

• Be careful not to pinch your ﬁ ngers between the

door and the panel.

HD RadioTM technology is a new technology that

enables AM and FM radio stations to broadcast

programs digitally. Digital broadcasting provides

listeners with radically improved audio quality and

reception as well as new data services. Furthermore,

supplemental program services allow listeners to

select from up to 8 HD Radio programs multicast on

a single FM HD Radio channel. For more information

on HD RadioTM technology, visit “www.ibiquity.com”.

HD RadioTM Technology Manufactured Under License

From iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents.

HD RadioTM and the HD Radio logo are proprietary

trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

XM Satellite Radio Ready

The XM name and related logos are registered

trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc.

XM HD Surround uses Neural SurroundTM technology

to achieve optimal surround sound from XM radio.

There are several factors that can degrade the sound

from even the best loudspeakers in a listening room.

One of the most important is the interaction of sound

from the loudspeakers with large surfaces such as

walls, the ﬂ oor, and the ceiling in the room. Even

with careful loudspeaker placement and acoustical

treatments, there are signiﬁ cant problems that are

caused by room acoustics. These include reﬂ ections

from nearby surfaces and standing waves that are

created between large parallel surfaces in the room.

In a home theater the situation is further complicated

because there are several listening locations. The

effects of room acoustics on the sound arriving at

each person’s ears are very different and the result is

a listening experience that is degraded in a different

way for every person in the room. It is not uncommon

to have variations in two adjacent seats that are as

large as 10 dB, particularly in the frequency range

below 250 Hz.

The solution to this problem is to apply room correction

after precisely measuring how each loudspeaker

interacts with the room. Because the room causes

variations in the frequency response of the

loudspeakers that are so large from seat to seat, it

is important to measure each loudspeaker at several

locations in the listening room. This should be done

even if there is only one listener. Measurement at a

single location is not representative of the acoustical

problems in the room and will in most cases, degrade

overall performance. Audyssey MultEQ is the only

technology that can achieve room correction for

multiple listeners in a large listening area. It does so

by combining the data collected at several points in

the room from each loudspeaker and then applying

correction that minimizes the acoustical effects of

the room and is matched to the frequency resolution

of human perception (known as psychoacoustics).

Furthermore, MultEQ correction is applied both

in frequency and time domains and so there are

no artifacts (such as smearing of sound or modal

ringing)that are sometimes associated with traditional

methods of room equalization.

In addition to correcting frequency response problems

over a wide listening area, Audyssey MultEQ provides

a completely automated sound system set-up

process. It identiﬁ es how many loudspeakers are

connected to the ampliﬁ ers and whether they are full-

range, satellites, or subwoofers. If there is a least one

subwoofer connected, Audyssey MultEQ determines

the optimum crossover frequency between each

satellite and the subwoofer(s). It automatically

checks the polarity of each loudspeaker and alerts

the user if there are any that may be wired out-

of-phase relative to the others. It measures the

distance to each loudspeaker from the main listening

position and adjusts the delays so that sound from

each loudspeaker arrives at the same time. Finally,

Audyssey MuitEQ determines the playback level of

each loudspeaker and adjusts the volume trims so

that all levels are equal.

MultEQ and the Audyssey MultEQ logo are

trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories, Inc. All rights

reserved.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 6SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 6 07.8.24 1:14:43 PM07.8.24 1:14:43 PM

ENGLISH

OPERATION OF REMOTE CONTROLLER

REMOTE CONTROL

Operate the remote controller within a distance of

approx. 5m from the infrared receptor window on the

front of the unit.

Remote controller

SR7002/8002

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001

PHONES

STANDBY

SLSSR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

DISPMULTIAUTOTUNEDSTSPKR A BV-OFF

NIGHT

PEAKANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEPSURRDIRECT

AUTODISC 6.1MTX 6.1

PCM

AAC

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

S-VIDEODIGITALVIDEOLR

ENTER

DOWN

VOLUME

POWER ON/OFF

INPUT SELECTOR

MEMO

CLEAR

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCR

DVD

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC1400

60°

Approx. 5 m

Caution:

• Do not allow direct sunlight, an inverter ﬂ uorescent

light or other strong source of light to shine onto

the player’s infrared receptor window. Otherwise,

the operation of the remote controller may be

disabled.

• Bear in mind that operating the remote controller

may cause other devices operated by infrared rays

to be operated by mistake.

• The remote controller cannot be operated if the

space between the controller and the player’s

infrared receptor window is obstructed.

• Do not place any objects on top of the remote

controller.

Doing so may cause one or more buttons to be

held down which will cause the batteries to run

down.

LOADING BATTERIES

Before using the remote controller for the ﬁ rst time,

load the batteries in the remote controller. The

batteries provided are used to verify the operations

of the remote controller only.

1. Remove the back cover.

2. Insert the new batteries (AAA type) with correct

ª and · polarity.

3. Close the battery cover until it clicks shut.

<RC101>

1. Remove the battery cover.

2. Insert the new batteries (AAA type) with correct

ª and · polarity.

3. Close the battery cover until it clicks shut.

CAUTIONS ON BATTERIES

• Use “AAA” type batteries in this remote controller.

• We recommend that you use alkali batteries.

• The life of the batteries used with the remote

controller is about 4 months with normal use.

• If the remote controller does not operate from

close to the unit, replace the batteries with new

ones, even if less then a year has passed.

• The included battery is only for verifying operation.

Replace it with a new battery as soon as possible.

• When inserting the batteries, be careful to do so in

the proper direction, following the + and - marks in

the remote controller’s battery compartment.

• To prevent damage or battery ﬂ uid leakage:

- Do not use a new battery with an old one.

- Do not use two different types of batteries.

- Do not short-circuit, disassemble, heat or

dispose of batteries in ﬂ ames.

• Remove the batteries when not planning to use the

remote controller for a long period of time.

• If the batteries should leak, carefully wipe off the

ﬂ uid from the inside of the battery compartment,

then insert new batteries.

• When disposing of used batteries, please comply

with governmental regulations or environmental

public instruction’s rules that apply in your country

or area.

BATTERY REPLACEMENT INTERVAL (RC8001SR)

When the batteries wear out, a battery mark is

displayed on the LCD. Although the remote control

can still be used when the battery mark is displayed,

the batteries should be replaced as soon as possible.

The LCD eventually starts to ﬂ ash when buttons are

pressed, the remote control will be unable to transmit

signals or learn codes.

• This remote control uses non-volatile memory so

that the learned codes and macro programs are

retained even if the batteries are removed.

• Reset the clock after replacing the batteries.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 7SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 7 07.8.24 1:14:44 PM07.8.24 1:14:44 PM

ENGLISH

y MULTI (Multi Room) button

Press this button to activate the Multiroom system.

“MULTI” indicator will be illuminated in the display.

(See page 78)

u MULTI SPEAKER button

Press this button to activate the Multiroom Speaker

system. “MULTI” indicator will be illuminated in the

display.

(See page 78)

i BAND button

Press this button to switch between FM, AM and XM

(XM Ready) in the TUNER mode.

o T-MODE button

Press this button to select the auto stereo mode or

mono mode when the FM band is selected.

The “AUTO” indicator lights in the auto stereo mode.

(See page 68)

!0 MEMORY button

Press this button to enter the tuner preset memory

numbers or station names. (See page 68)

!1 CLEAR button

Press this button to cancel the station-memory

setting mode or preset scan tuning. (See page 69)

POWER switch and STANDBY indicator

When this switch is pressed once, the unit turns ON

and the display illuminates. When pressed again, the

unit turns OFF and the STANDBY indicator will be

illuminated.

w INPUT SELECTOR knob

(AUDIO/ VIDEO)

This knob is used to select the input sources. (See

page 58)

HEADPHONE jack for stereo headphones

This jack may be used to listen to the unit’s output

through a pair of headphones. Be certain that the

headphones have a standard 1/4” stereo phono

plug.

r SURROUND MODE button

Press this button to select the surround mode.

t AUTO (Auto surround) button

Press this button to select the AUTO mode from the

surround modes. When this mode is selected, the

unit determines the surround mode corresponding to

a digital input signal automatically.

INFRARED receiving sensor window

This window receives infrared signals for the remote

controller.

!3 VOLUME control knob

This knob is used to adjust the overall sound level.

Turning the control clockwise increases the sound

level.

!4 AUX1 INPUT jacks

These auxiliary video/audio input jacks accept the

connections of a camcorder, portable DVD, game

etc. When not using these jacks, protect with the

included jack covers.

How to Attach the Front AUX Jack Cover

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

S-VIDEO

DIGITALVIDEO LR

PUSH

Front AUX Jack Cover

!5 M-DAX button

Press this button to select M-DAX processing for

input source. (See page 59)

!6 SPEAKER A/B button

Press this button to select speaker systems A and/or

!7 MIC jack

Automatically measure speaker characteristics using

the included microphone. (See page 46)

!8 DISPLAY button

Press this button to change the FL display mode.

!9 EXIT button

Press this button to exit from the SETUP MAIN

MENU.

Cursor (

5, ∞, 2, 3

) / ENTER button

Press these buttons to operate the SETUP MAIN

MENU and TUNER function.

@1 MENU button

Press this button to enter the SETUP MAIN MENU.

@2 7.1CH INPUT button

Press this button to select the output of an external

multichannel player.

@3 THX button

Press this button to select THX processing for input

source.

PURE DIRECT button and indicator

When this button is pressed once, “SOURCE

DIRECT” appears on the FL display. If pressed again,

“PURE DIRECT” appears. After 2 seconds, the FL

display indication goes out.

In the source/pure direct mode, the tone control

circuitry and bass management are bypassed.

Notes:

• The surround mode is automatically switched to

AUTO when the pure direct function is turned on.

• Additionally, speaker configurations are fixed

automatically as follows.

Front SPKR = LARGE

Center SPKR = LARGE

Surround SPKR = LARGE

Surround Back SPKR = LARGE

Sub woofer = YES

NAMES AND FUNCTION

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

VOLUME

DOWN

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8002

M-DAX

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO MULTI

A/B

T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

M-DAX

POWER ON/STANDBY

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-O FFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP SURR DIRECT

AUTO DISC 6.1 MT X 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

@1 !9@0

q tyur !2 !3 !4ew

@4 @3 @2 !8 !6

io!0!1

!7 !5

FRONT PANEL

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 8SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 8 07.8.24 1:14:44 PM07.8.24 1:14:44 PM

ENGLISH

FL DISPLAY AND INDICATER

DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST V

–

OFF NIGHT PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP SURR

AUTO DISC 6.1DIRECT MTX 6.1 SPKR AB

DIGITAL

SURROUND

PCM

SL S SR

LFE

M-DAX

™

hk¡0 ¡2 ¡4f

jl¡1¡3 ¡5d

™

a DISP (Display Off) indicator

This indicator is illuminated when this unit is in the

display off mode.

s SLEEP timer indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the sleep timer

function in the main-room is in use.

d Multi-room system indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the multi-room

system is active.

f AUTO SURR

(Auto Surround mode) indicator

This indicator is illuminated to show that the AUTO

SURROUND mode is in use.

g TUNER’s indicators

AUTO : This indicator illuminates when the

tuner’s Auto mode is in use.

TUNED : This indicator illuminates when the

tuner receives a sufﬁ ciently strong

radio signal.

ST(Stereo) : This indicator illuminates when an

FM station is being tuned into stereo

condition.

DTS-ES mode indicators (DISC6.1, MTX6.1)

These indicators will illuminate to show the DTS-ES

decoding mode (Discrete 6.1 or Matrix 6.1).

j V (video)-OFF mode indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the Video-OFF

function is active.

k NIGHT mode indicator

This indicator is illuminated when this unit is in the

Night mode, which reduces the dynamic range of

digital program material at low volume levels.

l SPKR (speaker) AB indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the speaker

system is active.

¡0 PEAK indicator

This indicator is a monitor for an analog audio input

signal. If the selected analog audio input signal is

greater than the capable level of internal processing,

this will illuminate. If this happens, you should press

the ATT button. (See page 11)

¡1 EQ indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the EQ MODE is

selected to “AUDDYSSEY”, “FRONT” or “FLAT”.

¡2 ATT (Attenuation) indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the attenuation

function is active.

¡3 DIGITAL Input Indicator

This indicator is illuminated when a digital input has

been selected.

¡4 ANALOG input indicator

This indicator is illuminated when an analog input

source has been selected.

¡5 SIGNAL FORMAT indicators

2 DIGITAL

This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby Digital

signal is input.

This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby Digital EX

signal is input.

dts

This indicator is illuminated when a DTS signal is

input.

This indicator is illuminated when a DTS ES signal

is input.

96/24

This indicator is illuminated when a DTS 96/24 signal

is input.

PCM

This indicator is illuminated when the input signal is

PCM (pulse code modulation).

2 SURROUND

This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby Surround

signal is input.

¡6 HDMI indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the HDMI device is

connected to the unit.

¡7

ENCODED CHANNEL STATUS indicators

These indicators display the channels that are

encoded with a digital

input signal.

If the digital input signal is Dolby Digital 5.1ch or

DTS 5.1ch, “L”, “C”, “R”, “SL”, “SR” and “LFE” will be

illuminated.

If the digital input signal is 2 channel PCM-audio, “L”

and “R” will be illuminated.

If the digital input signal is 7.1channel PCM-Audio.

“L”, “C”, “R”, “SL”, “S” , “SR” and “LFE” will be

illuminated.

If the digital input signal is Dolby Digital 5.1ch signal

with Surround EX ﬂ ag or DTS-ES, “L”, “C”, “R”, “SL”,

“S” , “SR” and “LFE” will be illuminated.

Note:

When this unit is decoding a Dolby True HD signal,

the status of the input signal is displayed, depending

on the number of speaker channels being used.

The “S” indicator is not illuminated when a 7.1-

channel signal is input to a 5.1-channel speaker system

with L, C, R, SL, SR, and SW.

¡8 HDCD indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the HDCD signal is

decoded from digital input signal.

¡9 Main Information Display

This display shows messages relating to the status,

input source, surround mode, tuner, volume level or

other aspects of unit’s operation.

™0 SOURCE DIRECT indicator

This indicator is illuminated when this unit is in the

SOURCE DIRECT mode.

™1 M-DAX indicator

This indicator illuminates when this unit is in the M-

DAX mode.

™2 PURE DIRECT indicator

This indicator is illuminated when this unit is in the

PURE DIRECT mode.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 9SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 9 07.8.24 1:14:45 PM07.8.24 1:14:45 PM

ENGLISH

y XM terminal

See page 37 for connecting information.

u Sub Speaker outputs terminals

(MULTI SPEAKER / SPEAKER C)

Two terminals are provided for the front left, and right

speakers for multi room.

The terminals can be used to connect a third set of

speakers by setting the SPEAKER C selector switch

to ON. For connection and use, see page 38.

i Speaker outputs terminals

Nine terminals are provided for the front (A) left, front

(A) right, front (B) left, front (B) right, front center,

surround left, surround right, surround back left and

surround back right speakers.

o SPEAKER C switch

Set to ON to connect a bi-amp to this receiver or set

to OFF for normal speaker connection (surround

back and multiroom speakers). (See page 38)

!0 AC OUTLETS

Connect the AC power cables of components such as

a DVD and CD player to these outlets. SWITCHED and

UNSWITCHED outlets are provided.

The one marked SWITCHED provides power

only when the unit is turned on and is useful for

components which you use every time you play your

system.

The one marked UNSWITCHED is always live as

long as the unit is plugged into a live outlet.

A component connected here may be left on

permanently, or may be switched off with via its own

power switch.

Caution:

• In order to avoid potential turn-off thumps, anything

plugged into these outlets should be powered up

before the unit is turned on.

• The capacity of this AC outlet is 150W. Do not

connect devices that consume electricity more than

the capacity of these AC outlets. If the total power

consumption of the connected devices exceeds the

capacity, the protection circuit shuts down the power

supply.

!1 AC INLET

Plug the supplied power cord into this AC INLET and

then into the power outlet on the wall.

This unit can be powered by 120V AC only.

!2 Preamp Outputs

(L, R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, C)

Jacks for L (front left), R (front right), C (Center), SL

(surround left), SR (surround right), SBL (surround

back left) and SBR (surround back right).

Use these jacks for connection to external power

ampliﬁ ers.

!3 Subwoofer Output

Connect this jack to the line level input of a powered

subwoofer. If an external subwoofer ampliﬁ er is used,

connect this jack to the subwoofer ampliﬁ er input.

If you are using two subwoofers, either powered or

with a 2 channel subwoofer ampliﬁ er, connect a “Y”

connector to the subwoofer output jack and run one

cable from it to each subwoofer ampliﬁ er.

!4 7.1 CHANNEL or AUX2 INPUT

By connecting a DVD Audio player, Super Audio CD

multichannel player, or other components that has a

multichannel port, you can playback the audio with

5.1 channel or 7.1 channel outputs.

!5 EMITTER OUT (SR8002 only)

The signals input to the IR RECEIVER IN terminals

are output to this terminal. External devices can be

controlled by connecting them to this terminal.

!6 IR RECEIVER IN (SR8002 only)

Connect to an external IR receiver.

FLASHER IN (Flasher input terminal)

These terminals are to control the unit from each zone.

Connect the control signal from a Keypad, etc.

!8 DC TRIGGER output terminal

Connect a device that needs to be triggered by DC

under certain conditions (screen, power strip, etc…)

Use the system OSD setup menu to determine the

conditions by which these jack will be active.

Note:

• This output voltage is for (status) control only, It is

not sufﬁ cient for drive capability.

MULTI ROOM REMOTE IN/OUT terminals

IN: Connect to a multi-room remote control

device, available from your Marantz dealer.

OUT: Connect to the Marantz component equipped

with remote control (RC-5) terminals in Multi

zone (Multi room).

REAR PANEL

e Multiroom Outputs

(Audio output A/B, Video)

These are the audio and video output jacks for the

Multi zone (Multi room).

Connect these jacks to optional audio power

ampliﬁ ers or video display devices to listen and view

the source selected by the multiroom system in a

remote room.

Note:

• The SR7002 does not use Multiroom audio output

r MONITOR OUT

These are monitor outputs and each one includes

both composite video and S-video conﬁ gurations.

When connecting two video monitors or televisions,

be aware that the OSD interface can be used with

both MONITOR OUT connections.

t RS-232C

The RS-232C port is to be used in conjunction with

an external controller to control the operation of the

unit by using an external device.

The RS-232C port may also be used in the future to

update the operating software of the unit so that it will

be able to support new digital audio formats and the

like as they are introduced.

q FM antenna terminal (75 ohms)

Connect an external FM antenna with a coaxial

cable, or a cable network FM source.

AM antenna and ground terminals

Connect the supplied AM loop antenna. Use the

terminals marked “AM” and “GND”. The supplied AM

loop antenna will provide good AM reception in most

areas. Position the loop antenna until you hear the

best reception.

Note:

• The SR8002 can receive HD Radio broadcasts. (See

p.70)

w COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT/

OUTPUT

If your DVD player or other device has component

video connectors, be sure to connect them to these

component video connectors on the unit. This unit

has 4 component video input connectors to obtain

the color information (Y, CB, CR) directly from the

recorded DVD signal or other video component and

two component video outputs connector to output it

directly into the matrix decoder of the display device.

By sending the pure DVD component video signal

directly, the DVD signal forgoes the extra processing

that normally would degrade the image. The result is

vastly increased image quality, with incredibly life like

colors and crisp detail.

HDMI

Ver1.3

REMOTE

MULTI RC

rqw u it y

!0!1!2!4

!9@0 !8!7 !6

!5 !3

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 10SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 10 07.8.24 1:14:45 PM07.8.24 1:14:45 PM

ENGLISH

REMOTE CONTROL

OPERATION (RC8001SR)

NAME AND FUNCTION

The provided remote controller is a universal

remote controller. The POWER button, numeric

buttons and control buttons are used in common

across different input source components.

The input source controlled with the remote controller

changes when one of the input selector buttons is

pressed.

z Infrared Transmitter and Learning

Sensor

This transmitter emits infrared light. Press the buttons

while pointing the transmitter towards the infrared

receiver window of the unit or other AV equipment.

Be sure to also point towards other remote controls

when using the learning function.

x POWER ON and OFF buttons

(When AMP mode is selected)

These buttons are used to turn the unit on or off.

c SOURCE ON/OFF button

This button is used to turn a speciﬁ c source (such as

a DVD player) on or off independently from the rest

of the system.

v M (Mode) button

This button is used to program Macros. Pressing this

button switches between Normal mode and Macro

mode.

The > button is used to move to the next page. Up to

20 programs (4 pages) can be made. Holding down

the M button for three seconds or more switches to

the Setup mode, where the Setup menu is shown on

the LCD. The Setup menu has four pages, and the >

button is used to move to the next page. Pressing the

> button from page 4 returns you to page 1.

b D1 to D5 (Direct) buttons

Five types of direct operations can be performed

for each of the 12 source buttons such as the DVD,

television, ampliﬁ er, and other AV equipment. The

pages can be switched, so 4 pages × 5 types = 20

operations can be performed for a single source. The

text display can also be changed.

n > (Page) button

This button is used to switch pages for the Direct

button. The current page is shown on the LCD.

m VOL (Volume) button

This button is used to adjust the volume for the

ampliﬁ er and television.

Note:

• Set the AMP mode to use this button with the unit.

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP·SYNC

THX

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

⁄1

⁄2⁄6

⁄7

⁄8

⁄9

¤0

¤1

⁄3

⁄4

⁄5

⁄0

@0 REMOTE CONT. IN/OUT terminals

Connect to a Marantz component equipped with

remote control (RC-5) terminals.

@1 AUDIO IN/OUT (TV, DVD, VCR1,

DSS/VCR2, TAPE, CD/CDR)

These are the analog audio inputs and outputs.

There are 6 audio inputs and 4 audio outputs. The

audio jacks are nominally labeled for cassette tape

decks, compact disc players, DVD players and etc....

The audio inputs and outputs require RCA-type

connectors.

@2 DIGITAL INPUT (Dig.1 - 6) /

OUTPUT (coaxial, optical)

These are the digital audio inputs and outputs. There

are 3 digital inputs with coaxial jacks, 3 with optical

jacks.

The inputs accept digital audio signals from a

compact disc, LD, DVD, or other digital source

component.

For digital output, there is 1 coaxial output and 1

optical output.

The digital outputs can be connected to MD

recorders, CD recorders, DAT decks, or other similar

components.

VIDEO IN/OUT

(TV, DVD, VCR1, DSS/VCR2)

These are the video inputs and outputs. There

are 4 video inputs and 2 video outputs and each

one includes both composite video and S-video

conﬁ gurations. Connect VCRs, DVD players, and

other video components to the video inputs.

The 2 video output channels can be used to be

connected to video tape recorders for making

recordings.

@4 HDMI INPUT / OUTPUT

This unit has 4 HDMI inputs and 2 HDMI output. The

input function can be selected from the OSD menu

system. (See page 43)

, MUTE button

This button is used to mute the audio for the ampliﬁ er

and television.

Note:

• Set the AMP mode to use this button with the unit.

. GUIDE button

This button is used to display the menus for the DVD

player, DSS (satellite broadcasting tuner), or other

AV equipment.

(when AMP mode is selected)

This button is used to select the LIP.SYNC mode.

⁄0 EXIT button

(when AMP mode is selected)

This button is used to cancel settings in the setup

menu.

⁄1 Numeric buttons

These buttons are used to switch between 0 to 9

of the source components. If the source is set to

the amplifier, these buttons are used to perform

operations.

(when AMP mode is selected)

(1) TEST button

This button is used to enter the test tone menu.

(2) CH SEL. (channel select) button

This button is used to call up SETUP MAIN MENU

and adjust speaker levels or 7.1 ch input level.

(3) SURR (surround) button

This button is used to select the surround mode.

(4) 7.1CH button

This button is used to select the output of an external

multi channel decoder.

(5) ATT button

When the input signal is too high and the voice

distorts even by throttling the unit VOLUME control,

turn on this function. “ATT” is indicated when this

function is activated.

The input level is reduced. Attenuator is invalid for

use with the output signal of “REC OUT”.

Note:

• This function is unavailable during the digital input

is selected.

(6) SPK-AB button

Speaker mode is switched in the following

sequence.

A → B → A+B → off

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 11SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 11 07.8.24 1:14:46 PM07.8.24 1:14:46 PM

ENGLISH

LCD INDICATORS (RC8001SR)

Information about currently selected source and

direct code names are displayed on the LCD.

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

A Source Name indicator

This displays the name of the selected source, such

as DVD, television, or other AV equipment (up to ﬁ ve

characters).

B Direct Button Name indicator

This displays up to 20 types of button names for each

source. (up to six characters)

C Page indicator

This displays the current page position.

D Transmission indicator

This indicator is displayed when the remote controller

is sending a signal.

E USE indicator

This indicator is displayed under normal operation.

F Battery Level indicator

This indicator is displayed when the battery level is

low.

G TIMER indicator

This indicator is displayed when the macro timer is

set.

(7) DISP. button

Selects the display mode for the front display of the

unit.

(8) OSD button

When this button is pressed, the current setting are

displayed on the TV monitor.

(9) SLEEP (sleep timer) button

This button is used for setting the sleep timer.

Each time this button is pressed, the sleep timer

is increased by 10 minutes, in a range of 10–120

minutes.

(0) THX button

Use this button to select the THX mode.

⁄2 MEMO button

This button is used to store settings to memory or

program a source.

⁄3 CONTROL button

Thses buttons are used when operating the PLAY,

STOP, PAUSE, and other commands of a source.

Note:

• This button is unavailable for the unit.

⁄4 SOURCE button

Thses buttons are used to switch the source of your

A/V Receiver / amplifer. Each time a source button is

pressed, the remote controller changes to the source

which was pressed.

This remote controller can control 12 types of

equipment. To change the A/V Receiver / ampliﬁ er

source, press this button twice within two seconds.

The signal is sent when it is pressed the second

time.

Note:

• Select the AMP as the source to use this remote

controller with the unit.

• The MD button does not work with the unit.

⁄5 LIGHT 1 and 2 buttons

Pressing these buttons will light up the LCD and its

buttons. This lighting time can be set. If the lighting

time is set to 0 seconds, the backlight turns on only

while this button is pressed. The operations for

LIGHT 1 and 2 are identical.

⁄6 CLEAR button

This button is used to erase the memory or program

of a source.

⁄7 MENU button

(when AMP mode is selected)

This button is used to call up the SETUP MAIN

MENU of the unit.

⁄8 PREV (Previous) button

This button is used to return to the previous channel

on the television or other device.

Note:

• This button is unavailable for the unit.

⁄9 CH (Channel) button

This is used to change channels.

¤0 CURSOR buttons

These buttons are used when controlling the cursor

of the unit, DVD, or other AV equipment.

¤1 LCD

Information about the sources and modes are shown

on the LCD.

H MACRO indicator

This indicator is displayed when the remote controller

is in macro programming mode.

I NAME indicator

This indicator is displayed when the remote controller

is in renaming mode.

J LEARN indicator

This indicator is displayed when the remote controller

is in learning mode.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 12SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 12 07.8.24 1:14:46 PM07.8.24 1:14:46 PM

ENGLISH

SETTING THE TIME

Example: Setting to 6:20PM (18:20)

When you bought this remote controller and insert

the batteries to the remote controller at ﬁ rst, the steps

1 to 3 are skipped.

Starts from step 4 to set the time.

1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

2. Press the > button once.

This displays second page (SETUP).

3. Press the D4 (CLOCK) direct button.

The “ ” indicator blinks and the clock indicator

displays “0:00”.

4. Press the 1 and 8 numeric button to set the

hour indicator.

The hour indicator displays “18”.

The minute indicator blinks “_”.

5. Press the 2 and 0 numeric button to set the

minute indicator.

The minute indicator displays “20”.

The hour indicator blinks.

6. Press the OK cursor button to start the clock.

The clock starts from 0 second at the time that was

set and return to normal (USE) mode.

Whenever the batteries are replaced, the clock

shows 00:00. Please reset the clock. (The time

setting is not backed up.)

CHECKING THE TIME

To check the time, hold down the > button for three

seconds or more. The current time is displayed for

ﬁ ve seconds.

Note:

• Although the remote controller uses a quartz clock,

the time may become out of sync over the course of

operation. Be sure to correct the clock from time to

time.

GENERAL INFORMATION OF RC8001SR TO THE UNIT

To control the unit by your RC8001SR, you have to select the device AMP or TUNER by pressing the function

selector button. Please refer below for the details in AMP and TUNER mode.

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

5 6

3 4

1 2

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

AMP MODE

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

2 31

5 64

8 97

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

THX

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

TAPE

DSS

AUX2

AUX1

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

AMP

VOL

EXIT

MUTE

LEARN

NAME

USE

PAGE

1234

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the SR7002/SR8002 on and off

POWER ON Turns the SR7002/SR8002 on

POWER OFF Turns the SR7002/SR8002 off

D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi)

VOL +/- Adjust the over all sound level

MUTE Decreases the sound temporarily

Cursor Move the cursor for setting in SETUP MENU mode

OK Enter the SETUP MENU

Conﬁ rms the setting in SETUP MENU mode

MENU Enter the SETUP MENU

EXIT Exits from SETUP MENU

TEST (1) Enter the test tone menu

CH.SEL (2) Call up SETUP MENU and adjusts speaker levels or 7.1ch

input setup

SURR (3) Selects the surround mode

7.1CH (4) Selects the 7.1CH IN

ATT (5) Reduces the input level

SPK-AB (6) Selects the speaker system

DISP (7) Changes the front display mode

OSD (8) Displays the current setting on the monitor

SLEEP (9) Sets the sleep timer function

THX (0) Selects the THX mode

Function selector Selects a particular source component

GUIDE / LIP.SYNC Selects the LIP.SYNC mode

TUNER MODE

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAP E

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

2 31

5 64

8 97

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

LIP.SYNC

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

TUNER

GUIDE

MEMO

CLEAR

USE

PAGE

D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi)

CH +/- Selects a preset station up and down

GUIDE Selects the “Frequency direct input”

0–9 Input the numeric

MEMO Enter the tuner preset memory numbers

CLEAR Clears the inputting

TUNER Selects a frequency band

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 13SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 13 07.8.24 1:14:46 PM07.8.24 1:14:46 PM

ENGLISH

CONTROLLING MARANTZ COMPONENTS

1. Press the desired function button.

• The selected function name and USE are displayed in the LCD.

2. Press the desired operation buttons to play the selected component.

• For details, refer to the component’s user guide.

• It may not be possible to operate some models.

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ DVD PLAYER (DVD MODE)

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

LIGHT

LIP.SYNC

THX

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

DVD

USE

PAGE

SOURCE ON/OFF

Turns the DVD player on and off

POWER ON Turns the DVD player on

POWER OFF Turns the DVD player off

D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi)

Cursor/OK Move the cursor, enters the setting

MENU Calls up the menu of DVD disc

0-9 Input the numeric

MEMO Call up the programming menu

CLEAR Clears the inputting

2Play

4 / ¢Skip forward or previous chapter/

track

9Stop

;Pause

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ CD PLAYER (CD MODE)

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

LIGHT

LIP.SYNC

THX

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

USE

PAGE

SOURCE ON/OFF

Turns the CD player on and off

POWER ON Turns the CD player on

POWER OFF Turns the CD player off

D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi)

MENU Switches the display information

0-9 Input the numeric

MEMO Programs

CLEAR Clears the inputting

2Play

4 / ¢Skip forward or previous track

9Stop

;Pause

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 14SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 14 07.8.24 1:14:47 PM07.8.24 1:14:47 PM

ENGLISH

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ VCR (VCR MODE)

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

LIGHT

LIP.SYNC

THX

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

SOURCE

ON/OFF

POWER

2 31

5 64

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

VCR

EXIT

USE

PAGE

SOURCE ON/OFF

Turns the VCR on and off

D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi)

MENU Call up the menu

EXIT Exits the programming menu

0-9 Input the numeric

2Play

4 / ¢Skip forward or previous track

9Stop

;Pause

0Record

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ CD RECORDER (CDR MODE)

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

LIGHT

LIP.SYNC

THX

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

CD-R

USE

PAGE

SOURCE ON/OFF

Turns the CD recorder on and off

POWER ON Turns the CD recorder on

POWER OFF Turns the CD recorder off

D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi)

MENU Switches the display information

0-9 Input the numeric

MEMO Programs

CLEAR Clears the inputting

2Play

4 / ¢Skip forward or previous track

9Stop

;Pause

0Record

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ MD DECK (MD MODE)

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

LIGHT

LIP.SYNC

THX

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

USE

PAGE

SOURCE ON/OFF

Turns the MD deck on and off

POWER ON Turns the MD deck on

POWER OFF Turns the MD deck off

D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi)

MENU Switches the display information

0-9 Input the numeric

MEMO Programs

CLEAR Clears the inputting

2Play

4 / ¢Skip forward or previous track

9Stop

;Pause

0Record

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 15SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 15 07.8.24 1:14:48 PM07.8.24 1:14:48 PM

ENGLISH

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ TAPE DECK (TAPE MODE)

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

LIGHT

LIP.SYNC

THX

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

2 31

5 64

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

MEMO

CLEAR

TAPE

USE

PAGE

SOURCE ON/OFF

Turns the TAPE deck on and off

POWER ON Turns the TAPE deck on

POWER OFF Turns the TAPE deck off

D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi)

0-9 Input the numeric

MEMO Programs

CLEAR Clears the inputting

2Play

4 / ¢Skip forward or previous track

9Stop

;Pause

0Record

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ UNIVERSAL DOCK (AUX1 MODE)

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

LIGHT

LIP.SYNC

THX

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

2 31

5 64

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

MEMO

CLEAR

TAPE

USE

PAGE

SOURCE ON/OFF

Turns the UNIVERSAL DOCK

(Dock connector) ON and OFF

POWER ON Turns the UNIVERSAL DOCK

(Dock connector) ON

POWER OFF Turns the UNIVERSAL DOCK

(Dock connector) OFF

D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi)

MENU Call up the menu

Cursor Up Select contents Up

Cursor Down Select contents Down

OK Enter the setting

2Play / Pause

4 / ¢Next track / previous track

9Stop

;Pause

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 16SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 16 07.8.24 1:14:48 PM07.8.24 1:14:48 PM

ENGLISH

BASIC OPERATION

USE MODE

(Normal operation status)

This remote controller is preset with a total of

12 types of remote codes, including Marantz TV

(television), DVD, VCR (VCR deck), DSS (satellite

broadcasting tuner), TUNER, CD/CD-R, MD, TAPE

(tape deck), AUX1, AUX2, and AMP (ampliﬁ er).

Learning is not necessary for Marantz products. You

can use these products without setting any codes.

1. Press the SOURCE button.

For this example, press DVD.

DVD is shown on the LCD, and the remote controller

is set for DVD.

Pressing the

SOURCE button once changes the

remote control to the settings for the source that

was pressed.

To change the ampliﬁ er or other source, press the

SOURCE button twice (double-click). The code is

sent, and then the ampliﬁ er source changes to DVD.

2. Press the buttons to operate the DVD.

The indicator is shown on the LCD while the

remote control codes are being transmitted. It is not

displayed when buttons without stored code are

pressed.

3. The direct buttons can be used to perform up

to 20 operations for each of the 12 sources,

including DVD, TV, AMP, and other AV

equipment.

The buttons consist of the D1 to D5 buttons, and

the equipment is operated by pressing the buttons

corresponding to the indicators on the LCD.

Four pages are available, and press the > button

to select a page. The current page position is

displayed on the LCD.

PRESET MODE

(When operating non-Marantz AV equipment

products)

This remote controller is preset with remote control

codes from AV equipment by other manufacturers.

The preset codes are TV, VCR, LD, CABLE, DSS,

DVD, TAPE, TUNER, CD/CD-R, MD and AMP.

Settings can be made in one of two ways.

When the preset codes are set, the following codes

are contained in the SOURCE button of the remote

controller.

See the attached manufacturer number list for the

preset manufacturers, devices, preset numbers, and

other settings.

Remote control

source name

Corresponding

preset code

Device name

TV TV Television

DVD DVD DVD player

VCR VCR Video deck

DSS SATELLITE Satellite broadcasting

tuner equipment

TUNER

RECEIVER/TUNER

AM FM TUNER

CD CD/CD-R PLAYER CD player

CD-R CD/CD-R PLAYER CD recorder

MD CD/CD-R PLAYER MD deck

TAPE TAPE Cassette deck

AUX1 CABLE Cable television

AUX2 LASER DISC Laser disc player

AMP AMPLIFIER Ampliﬁ er or receiver

RECEIVER/TUNER

• When using Marantz products, TV and DVD can

be set to TV1 (TV/VDP: Projector) and TV2 (PDP:

Plasma display), and DVD1 (ﬁ rst DVD player) and

DVD2 (second DVD player), respectively, to match

the customer’s operating environment. These

settings are made in PRESET mode.

In the factory default state, the remote controller is

set to TV1 and DVD1. To make the presets, enter

the numbers below while referring to the section

“Entering and Setting the Manufacturer Number

Directly”.

TV1: 0001, TV2: 0002

DVD1: 0001, DVD2: 0002

Entering and Setting the Manufacturer Number Di-

rectly

Refer to the manufacturer number list.

This example shows how to set a SAMSUNG DVD

player.

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

5 6

2 3 4

1. View the supplied manufacturer number list,

and ﬁ nd the number of the manufacturer for the

device that you are using.

2. Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

3. Press the D1 (PRESET) direct button.

The Preset setting (P-SET) is displayed.

4. Press the DVD source button.

5. Press the numeric buttons to enter the four-

digit manufacturer number.

Example: To enter “0600” from the manufacturer

number list.

To correct the entered number, use the 1 or 2

cursor button to enter the correct number.

• If no button is pressed for over one minute

during the setting process, any settings that

were made are cancelled.

6. Press the OK cursor button.

7. Confirm the OK is displayed and then the

display returns to the Preset Setting (P-SET).

When the manufacturer number is entered correctly,

OK is displayed momentarily on the screen.

• If you enter a number not in the manufacturer

number list, WRONG CODE is displayed,

and then you return to the preset setting

again

Check the manufacturer number list, and

either set a different number or use the

sequence function to set.

8. To set the manufacturer number for another

source device, repeat the procedure in steps 4

to 6.

9. After the settings are completed, press the M

button.

10. Press the buttons on the remote controller to

check that the DVD can be operated correctly.

Setting Equipment Not Appearing in Manufacturer

Number List

Use the sequence function to set equipment not

appearing in the manufacturer number list. You may

still be unable to set some equipment even when

using the sequence function. In this case, the remote

controller can be programmed with codes individually.

In the sequence function, the power ON/OFF codes

are transmitted by pressing the remote controller

buttons in order.

If the power for the equipment is left on, hold down

the button until the equipment is turned off, and then

release. This completes the setting.

This example shows how to set a DVD player.

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

4 5 7

1. Turn on the power of the DVD player.

2. Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

3. Press the D1 (PRESET) direct button.

The Preset setting (P-SET) is displayed.

4. Press the DVD source button.

5. Hold down the CH+ or CH– button for one

second or more.

6. Press the CH+ button repeatedly in the interval

for one second.

The signal is transmitted, and the display cycles

through the code number.

Press the

CH– button to go back to a number

screen.

7. Release the button once the DVD player turns

off.

8. Press the OK cursor button.

9. Confirm the OK is displayed and then the

display returns to the Preset Setting (P-SET).

10. To set the manufacturer number for another

source device, repeat the procedure in steps 4

to 8.

11. After the settings are completed, press the M

button.

12. Press the buttons on the remote controller to

check that the DVD can be operated correctly.

Check the following points if the equipment which

was set does not operate properly.

• If there is more than one number in the manufacturer

number list, try setting a different number.

• There may be some buttons which cannot be

used. Program the codes to the required buttons.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 17SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 17 07.8.24 1:14:48 PM07.8.24 1:14:48 PM

ENGLISH

LEARN MODE

Programming the 2 (PLAY) and Other Control But-

tons and Numeric Buttons

This remote controller is capable of learning and

storing codes used by other remote controllers that

you already own.

For codes which are not learned, the remote

controller will transmit either the Marantz preset

codes from the initial settings, or remote codes from

another manufacturer’s AV equipment which is set

by the customer.

The receiver sensor for the remote control signals is

located at the top of the remote controller.

This example shows how to learn the codes from the

remote control of a DVD player.

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

1 2 4

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

6 (When OK) (failed) (codes are full)

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

2. Press the D2 (LEARN) direct button.

The LEARN setting (LEARN) is displayed. The

LEARN

indicator then blinks.

3. Press the DVD source button.

4. Press the 2 (PLAY) button.

The

LEARN

indicator blinks, and then displays to

indicate that learning is ready.

5. Place the receiver sensor of the remote control

(top) so that it is facing the transmitter of the

DVD remote control (top) at a distance of about

5 cm (2 inches).

6. Press and hold down the 2 (PLAY) button of the

transmitting DVD remote control, and check that

OK is displayed on the LCD.

The remote controller has finished learning when

OK is displayed on the LCD.

If ERROR is displayed on the LCD, some error has

prevented the command from being learned. If this

happens, repeat the procedure for steps 4 and 5.

In some rare cases, ERROR may be displayed

repeatedly during the learning operation. In this

case, the transmitting remote control may have

special signal codes. These codes cannot be

learned by this remote controller.

7. Follow the same procedure to make the remote

control learn the other buttons.

8. Repeat the procedure in steps 3 to 6 to have

the remote control learn the signal codes from

a TV, CD player, or other AV equipment.

• When no buttons are pressed for

approximately one minute during the

learning operation, the remote controller

automatically returns to USE mode.

• When programming the source buttons,

switch to the source in step 3, and then

press the source button again.

9. When you have finished programming the

codes for each button, press the M button.

The

USE

indicator is displayed on the LCD, and the

newly stored codes can be used.

• If FULL is displayed on the LCD, the memory

cannot hold any more learned codes in

LEARN mode.

If FULL is displayed no matter how many

times you try the learning operation, the

remote controller cannot accept any more

new codes until some of the previously

learned codes are deleted from the memory.

Delete some of the learned buttons from the

sources.

The M button and > button cannot be taught. Only

each one code can be learned for the LIGHT buttons

1 and 2, regardless of the source.

Programming the Direct Buttons and Rewriting

Names

This example shows how to program codes from

other manufacturer products to the DVD MENU

button (D1) and change the display to OSD.

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

6 7 8

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

2. Press the D2 (LEARN) direct button.

The LEARN setting (LEARN) indicator is displayed.

The

LEARN

indicator then blinks.

3. Press the DVD source button.

The first page of the direct button screen is

displayed. There are four available pages. Pressing

the > buttons cycles through the pages in this order

1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 1.

4. Press the D1 (MENU) direct button.

The

LEARN

indicator blinks, and then displays to

indicate that learning is ready.

5. Place the receiver sensor of the remote control

(top) so that it is facing the transmitter of the

DVD remote control (top) at a distance of about

5 cm (2 inches).

6. Press and hold down the OSD button of the

transmitting DVD remote control, and check that

OK is displayed on the LCD.

The remote controller has finished learning when

OK is displayed on the LCD.

If ERROR is displayed on the LCD, some error has

prevented the command from being learned. If this

happens, repeat the procedure for steps 4 and 5.

• After learning is completed, the remote

controller automatically switches to name

rewriting mode. The left end “ ” indicator on

the MENU blinks to indicate that the blinking

part can be rewritten.

• If no names will be rewritten, press the

OK cursor button. The display returns to

learning standby mode by pressing the OK

cursor button.

7. To change the name, press the numeric

buttons to enter the text.

• Use the cursor buttons 1 2 to move to the

sections to be rewritten on the LCD.

• To change MENU to OSD, press the 5

numeric button.

Each time the button is pressed, the display

cycles through M → N → O → 5 → M.

8. After rewriting of the text is completed, press

the OK cursor button.

To delete text that is already entered, press the 0

button to insert a space.

• In this example, MENU is changed to “OSD

(space) (space)” in this step, and then OSD

is displayed in the right side by pressing the

OK button.

For details, refer to the section “Rewriting Names”.

9. In the same way, use the > button to select

the page, and then press the direct button to

program the codes.

10. After programming the codes for each of the

buttons, press the M button.

The

USE

indicator displays on the LCD, and the

newly stored codes can be transmitted.

REWRITING NAMES

This remote controller allows the rewriting of names

for the sources and direct buttons. This operation is

performed for each individual source.

This example shows how to change the source name

from DVD to AVD and AUDIO to SOUND.

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

3 4 5

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

7 8 9

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

2. Press the D3 (NAME) direct button .

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 18SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 18 07.8.24 1:14:49 PM07.8.24 1:14:49 PM

ENGLISH

3. Press the DVD source button .

The

NAME

indicator blinks.

The “ ” blinks to indicate that the letter can be

changed.

4. Press the 2 cursor button twice.

The D in DVD blinks to indicate that the letter can

be changed.

5. Press the 1 numeric button to select A.

Each time the numeric buttons are pressed, the

button cycles through the alphanumeric characters

shown below.

1: A

→ B → C → 1 → A

2: D

→ E → F → 2 → D

3: G

→ H → I → 3 → G

4: J

→ K → L → 4 → J

5: M

→ N → O → 5 → M

6: P

→ Q → R → 6 → P

7: S

→ T → U → 7 → S

8: V

→ W → X → 8 → V

9: Y

→ Z → / → 9 → Y

0: SPACE ( ) → + → — → , → ’ → < → > → ? → 0

→ SPACE ( )

6. Press the 1 or 2 cursor button .

The letter is changed to “A”.

• The 3 and 4 cursor buttons can be used to

move the blinking indicator of the section to

be rewritten.

7. Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons to select

AUDIO on the direct button indicator. The

A ﬂ ashes to indicate that the name can be

changed.

8. Press the 7 numeric button to select S.

Each time the button is pressed, the button cycles

through S → T → U → 7 → S.

9. Press the 2 cursor button to move the ﬂ ashing

section.

10. Press the 5 numeric button to select 0.

11. Follow the same procedure to enter U, N, and

12. When ﬁ nished entering the text, press the OK

cursor button .

13. Press the M button .

The

USE

indicator displays on the LCD, and the

newly stored codes can be used.

The input is overwritten, and so the currently

displayed text is erased.

Up to six characters can be entered for the direct

button indicator.

ERASING PROGRAMMED CODES

(RETURNING TO INITIAL SETTINGS)

Codes can be erased in ﬁ ve ways: by buttons, direct

buttons, direct button pages, sources, and by all

memory contents.

Erasing Buttons and Erasing Direct Buttons

This example shows how to erase the code learned

from the PLAY button of the DVD player and the

AUTO code of the AMP direct button.

Erasing buttons

1 3 4

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

2. Press the D5 (ERASE) direct button .

3. Press the DVD source button .

The

USE

and

LEARN

indicators blink.

4. Press the button 2 (PLAY) that you want to

erase while holding down the CLEAR button .

A message is displayed on the LCD.

5. Press the D4 (YES) direct button to erase.

The code programmed to the 2 (PLAY) button is

erased.

When the code is cleared, the code for this button

resets to the factory default code or becomes blank.

• To cancel the erasing operation, press the

D5 (NO) button to return to the previous

display.

To erase codes programmed for the CLEAR

button, simply press the CLEAR button

twice.

To erase codes programmed for the

SOURCE button, simply press the SOURCE

button twice.

Erasing direct buttons

6 8 9

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

6. Press the AMP source button .

7. Press the > button to display the ﬁ rst page for

AMP.

8. Press the D1 (AUTO) direct button to be erased

while holding down the CLEAR button .

9. Press the D4 (YES) direct button to erase.

The code programmed to the AUTO button is

erased.

When the code is cleared, the code for this button

resets to the factory default code or becomes blank.

The rewritten name returns to the original name.

• To cancel the erasing operation, press the

D5 (NO) button to return to the previous

screen.

10. When the erasing operation is ﬁ nished, press

the M button .

The

USE

indicator displays to indicate that the

remote controller can now be operated.

Erasing Direct Button Pages

This example shows how to erase the entire direct

button second page learned from the DVD player.

1 3 4

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

2. Press the D5 (ERASE) direct button .

3. Press the DVD source button .

The

USE

and

LEARN

indicators blink.

4. Press the > button to display the second page.

5. Press the > button while holding down the

CLEAR button .

6. Press the D4 (YES) direct button to erase.

All codes and names programmed to page 2 are

erased. When the codes are cleared, the codes

for this button reset to the factory default code or

become blank. Any rewritten names return to the

original name.

• To cancel the erasing operation, press the

D5 (NO) button to return to the previous

screen.

7. When the erasing operation is ﬁ nished, press

the M button .

The

USE

indicator lights up to indicate that the

remote controller can now be operated.

Erasing Sources

This procedure clears all codes and names

programmed to the DVD, TV, or other sources. All

codes and names in the four direct button pages are

also erased.

This example shows how to erase the names and

codes learned from the DVD player.

1 3 4

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

2. Press the D5 (ERASE) direct button .

3. Press the DVD source button .

The

USE

and

LEARN

indicators blink.

4. Press the DVD source button while holding

down the CLEAR button .

5. Press the D4 (YES) direct button to erase.

All codes and names programmed to the DVD

source are erased. When the codes are cleared,

the codes for this button reset to the factory default

code or become blank. Any rewritten names return

to the original name.

• To cancel the erasing operation, press the

D5 (NO) button to return to the previous

display.

6. When the erasing operation is ﬁ nished, press

the M button .

The

USE

indicator displays to indicate that the

remote controller can now be operated.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 19SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 19 07.8.24 1:14:50 PM07.8.24 1:14:50 PM

ENGLISH

Erasing All

This procedure clears (resets) all programmed

codes and names. Once all the data is cleared, the

memory is returned to the factory default status. The

programmed macros are also erased.

1 3 4

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

2. Press the D5 (ERASE) direct button .

The

USE

and

LEARN

indicators blink.

3. Press the CLEAR button while holding down

the POWER ON and OFF buttons at the same

time.

4. Press the D4 (YES) direct button to erase.

All programmed codes and names are erased and

reset to the factory default settings.

• To cancel the erasing operation, press the

D5 (NO) button to return to the previous

screen.

• To erase all operation takes a few seconds

after the D4 (YES) button is pressed.

PROGRAMMING MACROS

This remote controller can program a series of button

operations in sequence.

Macros are a function that makes it possible to

use a single button operation to perform a complex

series of button operations any number of times. A

single button can be programmed to perform up to

20 steps in sequence. A total of 20 buttons can be

programmed with macros.

• For example, the following sequence of operations

can be programmed to a macro.

Switch ampliﬁ er to DVD source → Set ampliﬁ er

mode to AUTO → Play DVD player → Switch TV

to video input

The factory default for the transmission interval

(time) between macro operations is one second,

but these signal transmission intervals can be set

between approximately 0.5 seconds and 5 seconds

in the Setup mode. Each transmission interval can

be adjusted independently when programming or

revising a macro.

Note:

• If the signal transmission interval (interval time)

is changed using the Setup mode (described later),

this transmission interval is applied to all macro

programs. To change individual signal transmission

intervals, use the procedures in this section for

programming macros and revising macros.

• No signals are transmitted while programming a

macro.

• The M button, > button, cursor buttons, MEMO

button, CLEAR button, and VOL buttons cannot

be programmed.

• If no button is pressed for approximately one

minute during programming, the remote controller

returns to the state before macro mode.

In this case, the macro program is not stored.

• When executing macro mode, performing the

source switching operation two or more times

only changes the remote control mode and does

not transmit any signals. (Switching of the source

selector of the ampliﬁ er is valid only once.)

PROGRAMMING MACROS

This example shows how to program a macro to the

M-01 button.

(The screens shown in the example are the default

factory states. If the names of direct buttons

were rewritten, these modified names would be

displayed.)

Switch ampliﬁ er to DVD source → Play DVD player

→ Set the interval to 2 seconds until the next signal is

sent → Switch TV to video input → Set the ampliﬁ er

mode to AUTO

1 2 3

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

2. Press the D4 (MACRO) direct button .

The macro menu is displayed.

The

MACRO

indicator displays and

LEARN

blinks.

3. Press the D1 (M-01) direct button .

The menu has four pages, and so use the > button

to select the page when programming other buttons.

4. Press the buttons in the sequence that you

want the operations performed.

The actual program starts here.

Each time a button is pressed, the name of the

button is displayed on the LCD.

4-1 4-2 4-3

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

4-1. Press the DVD source button .

4-2. Press the 2 (PLAY) button .

4-3. Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons .

The interval time is displayed on the LCD.

4-4. Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and set to 2.0

(seconds).

• Use the 3 cursor button to increase the time

and the 4 button to decrease the time. The

interval time can be set from 0.5 seconds to

5 seconds.

• To stop the time adjustment, press the D5

(CANCEL) direct button.

4-5. Press the OK cursor button .

4-6. Press the TV source button .

4-7. Press the > button to display the ﬁ rst page.

4-8. Press the D1 (INPUT) direct button .

4-9. Press the AMP source button .

. Press the > button to display the ﬁ rst page.

. Press the D1 (AUTO) direct button .

. Press the OK cursor button .

The LCD displays END to indicate that programming

is completed.

5. To program another macro, repeat the

procedure in steps 3 to 4-12.

6. To exit macro programming, press the M button

The

USE

indicator displays to indicate that the

remote controller can now be operated.

When the macro are programmed 20 operations or

more, the display returns macro menu.

Edit the macro so that it has 20 operations or less.

EXECUTING MACRO PROGRAMS

1 2 3

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

1. Press the M button shortly.

The macro menu is displayed.

2. Press the D1 (M-01) direct button .

3. Check that the operations of the program are

executed step by step.

The name of the operation button is displayed on

the LCD.

• The programmed section is indicated by

&. The bar indicator moves to indicate the

progress of the program.

Select DVD source

→ PLAY transmit → Interval

time: 2 seconds → Select TV → TV INPUT transmit

→ Select AMP → AUTO transmit → End

• To cancel transmission of the program while

it is in progress, press any button.

CHANGING NAMES OF MACRO PROGRAMS

Under the factory default settings, the names of the

macro programs are set from M-01 to M-20, but you

can change them to any desired name.

The text can have up to six characters, and it is

entered using the numeric buttons.

This example shows how to change the M-01 name

to MOVIE.

1 2 3

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

4 5 6

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 20SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 20 07.8.24 1:14:51 PM07.8.24 1:14:51 PM

ENGLISH

2. Press the D4 (MACRO) direct button.

The macro menu is displayed.

The

MACRO

indicator displays and

LEARN

blinks.

3. Press the D1 (M-01) direct button .

The NAME is displayed.

4. Press the D3 (NAME) direct button .

The “ ” blinks to indicate that rewriting is possible.

5. Press the 5 numeric button to select M.

6. Press the 2 cursor button to next.

The “ ” blinks to indicate that rewriting is possible.

7. Press the 5 numeric button to select O.

8. Repeat steps 6 and 7, and then enter V, I, E and

“ (space)”.

• To make changes in the text while entering

it, use the 1 or 2 cursor buttons to move to

the blinking section.

9. After making the changes, press the OK cursor

button.

• To change the names of other macro

programs, repeat the procedure in steps 3

to 9.

10. To exit, press the M button.

ERASING STEPS OF MACRO PROGRAMS

This example shows how to delete the TV and

INPUT steps from the following macro programmed

to M-01.

The program is changed from

DVD → PLAY → TIME → TV → INPUT → AMP →

AUTO

DVD → PLAY → TIME → AMP → AUTO.

1 2 3

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

4 5 6

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

2. Press the D4 (MACRO) direct button.

The macro menu is displayed.

The

MACRO

indicator displays and

LEARN

blinks.

3. Press the D1 (M-01) direct button.

4. Press the D5 (EDIT) direct button.

The LCD displays DVD, and the step position is

indicated by 9.

The programmed section is indicated by &.

5. Press the 2 cursor button to display TV.

6. Press the CLEAR button .

The LCD displays CLEAR, and TV and INPUT are

deleted.

When deleting steps from a macro program, the

operations performed for a source after switching to

the source are also deleted.

If the

CLEAR button is pressed at the INPUT

position, only the INPUT step is deleted.

The

& indicator for the step is also changed.

• To check the modiﬁ ed steps, press the 1 or

2 cursor button.

7. To exit, press the M button.

When ﬁ nished, to change another macro program,

press the OK cursor button to return to the menu,

and then repeat the procedure for steps 3 to 6.

OVERWRITING STEPS IN MACRO PROGRAMS

This example shows how to change the macro

programmed to M-01 from

DVD → PLAY → AMP → AUTO

DVD → PLAY → TV → INPUT.

4 6 7

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

2. Press the D4 (MACRO) direct button.

The macro menu is displayed.

The

MACRO

indicator displays and

LEARN

blinks.

3. Press the D1 (M-01) direct button.

4. Press the D5 (EDIT) direct button.

The LCD displays DVD, and the step position is

indicated by 9.

The programmed section is indicated by &.

5. Press the 2 cursor button so that AMP is

displayed.

6. Press the TV source button.

TV blinks for 0.5 seconds.

7. Press the D1 (INPUT) direct button.

INPUT blinks for 0.5 seconds.

TV and INPUT are overwritten.

• To check the modiﬁ ed steps, press the 1 or

2 cursor button.

8. To exit, press the M button.

When ﬁ nished, to change another macro program,

press the OK cursor button to return to the menu,

and then repeat the procedure for steps 3 to 8.

INSERTING STEPS IN MACRO PROGRAMS

This example shows how to change the macro

programmed to M-01 from

DVD → PLAY → AMP → AUTO

DVD → PLAY → TV → INPUT → AMP → AUTO

4 6 8

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

2. Press the D4 (MACRO) direct button.

The macro menu is displayed.

The

MACRO

indicator displays and

LEARN

blinks.

3. Press the D1 (M-01) direct button .

4. Press the D5 (EDIT) direct button .

The LCD displays DVD, and the step position is

indicated by 7.

The programmed section is indicated by &.

5. Press the 2 cursor button so that AMP is

displayed.

6. Press the MEMO button.

7. Press the TV source button.

TV blinks for 0.5 seconds

8. Press the D1 (INPUT) direct button.

INPUT blinks for 0.5 seconds.

TV and INPUT are inserted.

9. Press the OK cursor button.

• To check the modiﬁ ed steps, press the 1 or

2 cursor button.

10. To exit, press the M button.

When ﬁ nished, to change another macro program,

press the OK cursor button to return to the menu,

and then repeat the procedure for steps 3 to 9.

CLEARING MACRO PROGRAMS

When clearing macros, the macros programmed to

the button are erased. Modiﬁ ed macro names are

also returned to the factory default settings. This

example shows how to clear a macro with the name

MOVIE programmed to M-02.

1 4 5

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

1. Press the M button for three second or more.

The macro menu is displayed.

2. Press the D4 (MACRO) direct button .

The macro menu is displayed.

3. Press the D2 (MOVIE) direct button while

holding down the CLEAR button.

4. Press the D4 (YES) direct button to clear the

macro.

To cancel the clearing operation, press the NO (D5

button).

5. To exit, press the M button.

When ﬁ nished, to change another macro program,

press the OK cursor button to return to the menu,

and then repeat the procedure for steps 2 to 4.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 21SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 21 07.8.24 1:14:52 PM07.8.24 1:14:52 PM

ENGLISH

SETTING THE MACRO TIMER

Setting the macro timer enables the macro program

to automatically turn the power for a device on or off

or perform other operations.

In the settings, you can select to execute the macro

timer everyday or only once.

Be sure to set the clock to the correct time before

using the timer. The macro timer can only be set for

one program a day.

This example shows how to use the timer only once

at 20:35 to execute a macro programmed to M-01.

2 3 4

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

5 6

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

2. Press the > button to display the third page

TIMER menu.

3. Press the D2 (ONCE?) direct button.

The M-TMR menu is displayed on the LCD.

• To cancel timer operation, press CANCEL.

4. Press the D1 (M-01) direct button .

The time which is set previously is displayed.

5. Press the 2 and 0 numeric button to set the

hour indicator to 20.

6. Press the 3 and 5 numeric button to set the

minute indicator to 35.

7. Press the OK cursor button.

This ﬁ nalizes the time.

8. To exit, press the M button.

To cancel the macro timer, return to the TIMER

menu and press the D5 (CANCEL) and then press

D1 (M-01).

EXECUTING THE MACRO TIMER

The macro program starts when the time that was

set is reached. The TIMER indicator lights up

whenever the macro timer is activated.

Note:

• To execute the macro timer, place the remote

controller facing the infrared sensor of the device

to be operated. If the remote controller is not in

a suitable position, it may not operate the device

properly.

CLONE MODE

CREATING COPIES USING CLONE MODE

All of the codes programmed to the RC8001SR remote

controller can be copied to another RC8001SR using

a few simple operations.

• The remote controller can copy the entire contents

or the contents for speciﬁ c source buttons.

• When copying the entire contents, all programmed

codes, modiﬁ ed names, programmed macros, and

signal transmission intervals are copied.

When copying the contents for source buttons, the

programmed codes and modiﬁ ed names are copied.

Note:

• The clone function can only be used for copying

when using the same model (RC8001SR) for both

the transmitting and receiving remote controller.

COPYING ENTIRE CONTENTS

3 4 9

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

5 6 9

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

1. Place the receiver sensor of the receiving

remote control (top) so that it is facing the

transmitter of the transmitting remote control

(top) at a distance of about 5 cm (2 inches).

2. Hold down the M button of the transmitting

remote controller for three seconds or more.

The menu is displayed.

3. Press the > button to display the fourth page

CLONE menu.

4. Press the D3 (TX) direct button.

The transmitting side is now ready.

5. Hold down the M button of the receiving remote

controller for three seconds or more.

The menu is displayed.

6. Press the > button to display the fourth page

CLONE menu.

7. Press the D1 (RX) direct button.

The receiving side is now ready.

8. Press the OK cursor button on the receiving

remote controller.

9. Press the OK cursor button on the transmitting

remote controller.

When copying is started, the bar indicators on both

LCDs start to move from the left to the right.

• When the copying operation is completed,

TX OK is displayed on the LCD of the

transmitting remote controller, and RX OK

is displayed on the LCD of the receiving

remote controller.

• Do not touch either of the remote controllers

during the copying operation. Doing so

could cause copying to fail.

• If the copying fails in the middle of the

copying process, RX ERROR is displayed

on the receiving remote controller. Check

and perform steps 1 to 7 again.

• Copying takes about three minutes to

complete when the transmitting remote

controller has been programmed to 100%

capacity.

10. Once copying is completed, press the M button

on both remote controllers.

COPYING BY SOURCE

The 12 sources can be copied on a source by source

basis. You can select from up to 12 source types.

6 7 8

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

1. Place the receiver sensor of the receiving

remote control (top) so that it is facing the

transmitter of the transmitting remote control

(top) at a distance of about 5 cm (2 inches).

2. Hold down the M button of the transmitting

remote controller for three seconds or more.

The menu is displayed.

3. Press the > button to display the fourth page

CLONE menu.

4. Press the D3 (TX) direct button.

The transmitting side is now ready.

5. Hold down the M button of the receiving remote

controller for three seconds or more.

6. Press the > button to display the fourth page

CLONE menu.

7. Press the D2 (RX-S) direct button.

8. Press the source button to be copied.

The receiving side is now ready.

The name of the source which was pressed is

displayed on the LCD.

• Each time the source button is pressed, the

name is displayed on the LCD.

9. Press the OK cursor button on the receiving

remote controller.

10. Press the OK cursor button on the transmitting

remote controller.

When copying is started, the bar indicators on both

LCDs start to move from the left to the right.

• When the copying operation is completed,

TX OK is displayed on the LCD of the

transmitting remote controller, and RX OK

is displayed on the LCD of the receiving

remote controller.

• Do not touch either of the remote controllers

during the copying operation. Doing so

could cause copying to fail.

• If the copying fails in the middle of the

copying process, ERROR is displayed on

the remote controller.

Check and perform steps 1 to 7 again.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 22SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 22 07.8.24 1:14:54 PM07.8.24 1:14:54 PM

ENGLISH

11. Once copying is completed, press the M button

on both remote controllers.

SETUP

SETTING THE LIGHTING TIME

• The LCD lights up when the LIGHT buttons are

pressed. The LCD remains lit while the pressed

button is held down, and it goes off when the

button is released.

• The LCD continues to light up if another button

is pressed while it is lit or if pressed within two

seconds after the light goes off.

• The lighting time can be set in one-second units

from 0 to 60 seconds.

The LIGHT buttons have light-absorbing properties

that enable them to store light. If the buttons are no

longer illuminated in a dimly lit environment, bring the

buttons near a ﬂ uorescent lamp or other light source

for a sufﬁ cient amount of time. This should illuminate

the buttons again.

• The LIGHT buttons consist of a LIGHT1 and

LIGHT2 button, and they both perform the same

operation.

The factory default lighting time is set to 15 seconds.

This example shows how to set the lighting time to

20 seconds.

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

2 3 4

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

2. Press the > button to display the second page

SETUP menu.

3. Press the D1 (LIGHT) direct button .

The LIGHT is displayed on the LCD

4. Press the 3 or 4 cursor button to set the

lighting time.

5. Press the OK cursor button to enter the lighting

time.

6. Once the setting is finished, press the M

button.

SETTING THE MACRO INTERVAL TIME

When a macro program is executed, control signals

are transmitted in sequence. This transmission

interval (interval time) can be set in 0.5-seconds units

from 0.5 to 5 seconds.

If the interval time is set in this Setup mode, the

interval times for all programmed macros are

changed. If necessary, use EDIT (see page 60) in the

macro program to change the individual transmission

times.

The factory default setting for the transmission

interval is 1 second.

This example shows how to set the interval time to

5 seconds.

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

2 3 4

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

2. Press the > button to display the second page

SETUP menu.

3. Press the D2 (I-TIME) direct button.

4. Press the 3 or 4 cursor button to set the

interval time.

Holding down the cursor button fast-forwards the

time indicator.

5. Press the OK cursor button to enter the interval

time.

6. Once the setting is finished, press the M

button.

ADJUSTING THE DISPLAY CONTRAST

The contrast of the LCD can be adjusted. Adjust

for maximum visibility according to your viewing

environment.

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

2 3 4

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAG E

1234

1. Hold down the M button for three seconds or

more.

The menu is displayed.

2. Press the > button to display the second page

SETUP menu.

3. Press the D3 (CONT) direct button .

4. Press the 3 or 4 cursor button and set the

display contrast for maximum visibility.

The adjustment has 10 levels.

The factory default setting for the contrast is the ﬁ fth

level.

5. Press the OK cursor button to enter the display

contrast.

6. Once the setting is finished, press the M

button.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 23SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 23 07.8.24 1:14:54 PM07.8.24 1:14:54 PM

ENGLISH

REMOTE CONTROL

OPERATION (RC101)

NAME AND FUNCTION

The included remote controller can be used in multi-

room systems. Using this remote controller, you can

operate the unit through infrared receivers or the

infrared receptor of Marantz products in multiple

rooms. The SOURCE ON/OFF button and control

buttons are used in common across different input

source components.

The input source controlled with the remote controller

changes when one of the input selector buttons is

pressed.

z POWER ON and OFF buttons

(When Zone (MULTI ROOM) A/B mode is

selected)

These buttons are used to turn on or off, for the multi

room control or multi speaker control of the unit.

(When Zone D (MAIN ROOM) mode is selected)

These buttons are used to turn on or off, for the unit

in main room.

x SOURCE ON and OFF buttons

These buttons are used to turn on or off a speciﬁ c

source (such as a DVD player) independently from

the rest of the system.

c AMP - SOURCE /Numeric buttons

SOURCE buttons

These buttons are used to switch the source of

the unit. Each time a source button is pressed, the

remote control changes to the source which was

pressed.

This remote controller can control 12 types of

equipment. To change the unit source, press this

button twice within two seconds. The signal is sent

when it is pressed the second time.

Note:

The T2 button is not used for this unit.

(When Zone (MULTI ROOM) A/B mode is

selected)

These buttons are used to select the source for the

multi room/multi speaker control of the unit.

(When Zone D (MAIN ROOM) mode is selected)

These buttons are used to select the source for the

unit in main room.

Numeric buttons

Use these buttons only for preset setting.

v AMP - VOL +/- buttons

(When Zone (MULTI ROOM) A/B mode is

selected)

These buttons are used to adjust the volume for the

multi room control or multi speaker.

(When Zone D (MAIN ROOM) mode is selected)

These buttons are used to adjust the volume for the

unit in main room.

⁄7

⁄6

⁄4

⁄5

⁄3

⁄2

⁄0

⁄1

b AMP - MUTE button

(When Zone (MULTI ROOM) A/B mode is

selected)

This button is used to mute the audio for the multi

room control or multi speaker control of the unit.

(When Zone D (MAIN ROOM) mode is selected)

These buttons are used to mute the audio for the unit

in main room.

n 3, 4, 1, 2 (CURSOR) / ENTER

buttons

These buttons are used when operating cursor of a

source.

(When Tuner mode (T1) is selected)

PRESET +/ PRESET - buttons

Used to select a preset station up and down.

TUNE 3 /TUNE 4 buttons

Used to tune a frequency station up and down.

m SLEEP button

(When Zone (MULTI ROOM) A/B mode is

selected)

This button is used for setting the sleep timer of multi

room control mode.

(When Zone D (MAIN ROOM) mode is selected)

This button is used for setting the sleep timer of the

unit receiver in main room.

, CONTROL buttons

These buttons are used when operating PLAY, STOP,

PAUSE and other commands of a source.

(When TUNER mode (T1) is selected)

P.SCAN button

Used to start preset scan.

CLEAR button

Used to stop preset scan.

. A/B/C/D buttons

(When TUNER mode (T1) is selected)

Used to select the band of tuner (AM/FM/XM/DAB).

(When the other source is selected)

Reserve key for the learning commands.

⁄0 SET button

This button is used to enter learn mode, preset mode

and clone mode.

⁄1 ZONE (MULTI ROOM) button

This button is used to set the zone area.

• Zone A: MULTI ROOM A

• Zone B: MULTI ROOM B

(The SR7002 does not use this zone.)

• Zone C: The unit does not use this zone.

• Zone D: MAIN ROOM

⁄2 DISC+/T.MODE

(When TUNER mode (T1) is selected)

Used to select auto stereo mode or mono mode

when the FM band is selected.

The “AUTO” indicator lights in the auto stereo mode.

(When CD/DVD/CDR mode is selected)

Used to change the disc for the CD/DVD/CDR

changer.

⁄3 INFO button

(When Zone (MULTI ROOM) A mode is selected)

When this button is pressed, the current setting for

selected multi room control of the unit is displayed on

the TV monitor.

(When Zone D (MAIN ROOM) mode is selected)

When this button is pressed, the current setting for

the unit are displayed on the TV monitor.

⁄4 MENU/INPUT button

(When DVD mode is selected)

Used to menu command.

(When TV mode is selected)

Used to select the TV video input.

⁄5 CH 3/4 buttons

These buttons are used to change channels in TV

mode and DSS mode.

⁄6 SEND indicator

Indicates when the remote controller is transmitting

a signal.

⁄7 LEARN indicator

Indicates when the remote controller is in the LEARN

mode.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 24SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 24 07.8.24 1:14:55 PM07.8.24 1:14:55 PM

ENGLISH

GENERAL INFORMATION OF RC101 TO THE UNIT

The included remote controller can be used in multi-room systems. Using this remote controller, you can

operate the unit through infrared receivers or the infrared receptor of Marantz products in multiple rooms.

Zone A: Multi room A control

Zone B: Multi room B control

(The SR7002 does not use this zone)

Zone C: The unit does not use this zone.

Zone D: Main room control

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ TV (TV)

CONTROLLING MARANTZ COMPONENTS

1. Press the desired SOURCE button.

2. Press the desired operation buttons to play the selected component.

• For details, refer to the component’s user guide.

• It may not be possible to operate some models.

POWER ON/OFF Turns on or off for each multi zone of

the unit.

SOURCE Selects a particular source component for

each multi zone.

VOL +/– Adjusts the over all sound level for each

multi zone.

MUTE Decreases the sound temporarily.

SLEEP Sets the sleep timer function.

INFO Turns on or off the “On Screen Display” for

the multi zone.

POWER ON/OFF Turns on or off for main room of the unit.

SOURCE Selects a particular source component

for main zone.

VOL +/– Adjusts the over all sound level for Main

room.

MUTE Decreases the sound temporarily.

SLEEP Sets the sleep timer function.

INFO Turns on or off the “On Screen Display” for

the main room.

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the TV on and off

MENU/INPUT Select the TV video input

CH3/4Selects TV channel up or down

ENTER

Moves the cursor for setting in TV menu

3(CURSOR)

4(CURSOR)

2(CURSOR)

1(CURSOR)

2–

9–

;–

§–

∞–

6–

5–

DISC+/T.MODE –

A Reserve for learinig

B Reserve for learinig

C Reserve for learinig

D Reserve for learinig

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 25SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 25 07.8.24 1:14:55 PM07.8.24 1:14:55 PM

ENGLISH

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ DVD PLAYER (DVD)

• (*) RC101 dose not have the PRESET code library

for this key.

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ VCR DECK (VCR1/

VCR2)

• RC101 dose not have the PRESET code library for

this device.

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ SATELLITE

BROADCASTING TUNER (DSS)

• (*) RC101 dose not have the PRESET code library

for this key.

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ TUNER (T1)

• RC101 dose not have the PRESET code library for

this device.

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the DVD Player on and off

MENU/INPUT Select the DVD menu

CH3/4–

ENTER

Moves the cursor for setting in DVD

3(CURSOR)

4(CURSOR)

2(CURSOR)

1(CURSOR)

2Play

9Stop

;Pause

§Skips to forward chapter/track

∞Skips to previous chapter/track

6Searchs forward

5Searchs backward

DISC+/T.MODE DVD changer next disc (*)

A Reserve for learinig

B Reserve for learinig

C Reserve for learinig

D Reserve for learinig

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the VCR deck on and off

MENU/INPUT –

CH3/4–

ENTER

Moves the cursor for setting in VCR

3(CURSOR)

4(CURSOR)

2(CURSOR)

1(CURSOR)

2Play

9Stop

;Pause

§Skips to forward track

∞Skips to previous track

6Searchs forward

5Searchs backward

DISC+/T.MODE –

A Reserve for learinig

B Reserve for learinig

C Reserve for learinig

D Reserve for learinig

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the satellite broadcasting tuner

on and off

MENU/INPUT Select the satellite tuner menu

CH3/4Selects satellite tuner channel up or

down

ENTER

Moves the cursor for setting in SATELLITE

Broadcasting TUNER menu

3(CURSOR)

4(CURSOR)

2(CURSOR)

1(CURSOR)

2Play (*)

9Stop (*)

;PAUSE (*)

§–

∞–

6Searchs forward (*)

5Searchs backward (*)

DISC+/T.MODE –

A Reserve for learinig

B Reserve for learinig

C Reserve for learinig

D Reserve for learinig

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the Tuner on and off

MENU/INPUT –

CH3/4–

ENTER –

3(CURSOR) Tunes a frequency station up and down

4(CURSOR) Tunes a frequency station up and down

2(CURSOR) Selects a preset station up and down

1(CURSOR) Selects a preset station up and down

2Starts preset scan

9Stop preset scan

;–

§–

∞–

6–

5–

DISC+/T.MODE Selects the auto stereo mode or mono

mode

A Selects AM mode

B Selects FM mode

C Selects XM mode

D Selects DAB mode

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 26SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 26 07.8.24 1:14:56 PM07.8.24 1:14:56 PM

ENGLISH

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ CD PLAYER (CD)

• (*) RC101 dose not have the PRESET code library

for this key.

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ CD RECORDER (CDR)

• RC101 dose not have the PRESET code library for

this device.

CONTROLLONG A MARANTZ TAPE DECK (TAPE)

• RC101 dose not have the PRESET code library for

this device.

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ UNIVERSAL DOCK

(AUX1)

• RC101 dose not have the PRESET code library for

this device.

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the CD Player on and off

MENU/INPUT –

CH3/4–

ENTER –

3(CURSOR) –

4(CURSOR) –

2(CURSOR) –

1(CURSOR) –

2Play

9Stop

;Pause

§Skips to forward track

∞Skips to previous track

6Searchs forward

5Searchs backward

DISC+/T.MODE CD changer next disc (*)

A Reserve for learinig

B Reserve for learinig

C Reserve for learinig

D Reserve for learinig

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the CD Recorder on and off

MENU/INPUT –

CH3/4–

ENTER –

3(CURSOR) –

4(CURSOR) –

2(CURSOR) –

1(CURSOR) –

2Play

9Stop

;Pause

§Skips to forward track

∞Skips to previous track

6Searchs forward

5Searchs backward

DISC+/T.MODE CDR changer next disc

A Reserve for learinig

B Reserve for learinig

C Reserve for learinig

D Reserve for learinig

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the tape deck on and off

MENU/INPUT –

CH3/4–

ENTER –

3(CURSOR) –

4(CURSOR) –

2(CURSOR) –

1(CURSOR) –

2Play

9Stop

;Pause

§Skips to forward track

∞Skips to previous track

6Searchs forward

5Searchs backward

DISC+/T.MODE –

A Reserve for learinig

B Reserve for learinig

C Reserve for learinig

D Reserve for learinig

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the Universal Dock on and off

MENU/INPUT Call up the menu

CH3/4–

ENTER

Moves the cursor for setting in Universal

dock menu

3(CURSOR)

4(CURSOR)

2(CURSOR)

1(CURSOR)

2Play

9Stop

;Pause

§Skips to forward track

∞Skips to previous track

6Searchs forward

5Searchs backward

DISC+/T.MODE Change the userinterface mode

A Reserve for learinig

B Reserve for learinig

C Reserve for learinig

D Reserve for learinig

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 27SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 27 07.8.24 1:14:56 PM07.8.24 1:14:56 PM

ENGLISH

BASIC OPERATION

NORMAL MODE

(

When operating Marantz AV equipment products

)

This remote controller is preset with a total of

12 types of remote codes, including Marantz TV

(television), DVD, VCR (VCR deck), DSS (satellite

broadcasting tuner), TUNER 1, TUNER 2, CD, CD-R,

TAPE (tape deck), AUX1 and AUX2.

Learning is not necessary for Marantz products. You

can use these products without setting any codes.

1. Press the SOURCE button.

For this example, press DVD.

Pressing the SOURCE button once changes

the remote control to the settings for the source

that was pressed.

To change the ampliﬁ er on other source, press

the SOURCE button twice (double-click). The

code is sent, and then the ampliﬁ er source

changes to DVD.

SETTING THE BACK LIGHT

Each time press the buttons, illuminate button 2

seconds.

To turn off back light, press and hold down the SET

and 4 button until SEND indicator blinks twice.

To turn on it again, press and hold down the SET and

¢ button until SEND indicator blinks twice.

Initial is back light ON.

PRESET MODE

(When operating non-Marantz AV equipment

products)

This remote controller is preset with remote control

codes from AV equipment by other manufacturers.

The preset codes are TV, DVD, CD and DSS.

Settings can be made in one of two ways.

When the preset codes are set, the following codes

are contained in the source button of the remote

controller.

See the attached manufacturer number list for the

preset manufacturers, devices, preset numbers, and

other settings.

Remote control

source name

Corresponding preset

code

Device name

TV TV Television

DVD DVD DVD player

CD CD CD player

DSS SATELLITE Satellite broadcasting

tuner equipment

Importants:

• Some codes may be not match your equipment.

In this case, you can use LEARN mode to store these

codes.

• The preset codes do not cover full functions.

If you need extra function, use LEARN mode to

store extra function.

• When the batteries are getting weak, the preset

procedure is not successful.

PROGRAMMING WITH THE 4-DIGIT CODE

2. 1.

1. Press and hold down the SOURCE button (ex

TV) for the appliance which should be controlled

and press SET button until the SEND indicator

blinks twice. Then back light ﬂ ashes.

2. Press the 4-digit code by numeric keys for

appliance (code table at the end of this book)

When the procedure is successful, the

SEND

indicator will blink twice.

Note:

If the indicator did not blink twice, then repeat steps 1

through 2 and try entering the same code again.

SCANNING THE CODE TABLE

1. Switch on the appliance which should be

controlled.

2. Press and hold down the SOURCE button for

appliance which should be controlled and press

SET button until the SEND indicator blinking

twice. Then back light ﬂ ashes.

3. Aim the remote controller at the appliance and

alternately press the CH+ and

SOURCE ON

buttons slowly.

4. Stop when the appliance turns off.

5. Press ENTER button once to lock in the code.

CHECKING THE CODE

4. 2.

1. Press and hold down the SOURCE button for

appliance which should be controlled and press

SET button until the SEND indicator blinking twice

then back light ﬂ ashes.

2. Press the INFO button.

The SEND indicator will blink twice.

3. To view the code for ﬁ rst digit, press 1 once.

Count the SEND indicator blinks (e.g. 3 blinks =

3) and write down the number.

Note:

If a code digit is “0”, the SEND indicator will not

blink.

4. Repeat step

3 three more times for remaining

digits. Use 2 for the second digit, 3 for the third

digit, and 4 for the fourth digit.

RESETTING THE CODE

1. Press and hold down the SOURCE button

for appliance which should be controlled and

press SET button until the SEND indicator

blinking twice.

Then back light ﬂ ashes.

2. Press the below codes to reset.

TV : 1000

DVD : 2000

CD : 3000

DSS : 4000

The indicator will blink twice.

Note:

After this procedure, the selected SOURCE button is

set initial code.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 28SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 28 07.8.24 1:14:57 PM07.8.24 1:14:57 PM

ENGLISH

LEARN MODE

This remote controller is capable of learning and

storing codes used by other remote controls that you

already own.

For codes which are not learned, the remote

controller will transmit either the Marantz preset

codes from the initial settings, or remote codes from

another manufacturer’s AV equipment which is set

by the customer.

The receiver sensor for the remote control signals is

located at the top of the remote controller.

Notes:

• This remote controller is capable to learn around 60

codes.

• When the batteries are getting weak , the learing

procedure is not successful.

LEARNING PROCEDURE

1. Place the remote controller so that its infrared

signal transmitter is facing the infrared signal

receiver on the Marantz remote controller at a

distance of about 2 inches (5 cm).

SYSTEM REMOTE CONTROLLER

2 inches

2. Press and hold down the SET and MENU/

INPUT buttons until LEARN indicator blinks.

3. Select the SOURCE button to select the

SOURCE.

4. Select the button to be learned.

• LEARN indicator lights up.

When the following key learned

• SOURCE buttons

The learning function is unavailable for all

SOURCE buttons in any mode.

• POWER ON button

• POWER OFF button

• VOL +/- button

• MUTE button

• INFO button

• SLEEP button

The above keys are common use in each

device mode. It can be learned in TV mode.

5. Press and hold the button of the original remote

controller to learn until the SEND indicator

blinks twice.

• When the SEND indicator blinks once,

repeat this step.

• When the memory of the RC101 is full, the

LEARN and SEND indicators blink once.

If you want to learn the code, you should

erase other learned button.

6. Repeat steps

4 and 5 to learn other buttons in

same SOURCE.

7. Repeat steps

3 to 6 to learn other SOURCE.

8. When you have finished programming the

remote controller, press the SET button, then

LEARN indicator stops blinking and exits from

the LEARN mode.

Notes:

• When the SEND indicator blinks once again, the

transmitting code is unavailable for RC101, or the

transmitting signal is intercepted by noise.

• If no buttons are pressed for approximately 1

minutes while in the LEARN mode, the remote

controller automatically exits from the LEARN

mode.

ERASING PROGRAMMED CODES (RETURNING TO

INITIAL SETTINGS)

Codes can be erased in three ways: by buttons,

sources, and by all memory contents.

Erasing the code by buttons

1. Press and hold down the SET and MENU/

INPUT buttons until LEARN indicator blinks.

2. Select the SOURCE button to select the button

to be erased.

3. Press and hold down the SLEEP button and

press the learned button twice to be erased.

• SEND indicator blinks twice and the mode

returns to LEARN mode.

4. To return the NORMAL mode, press the SET

button.

Erasing the code by SOURCE

1. Press and hold down the SET and MENU/

INPUT buttons until LEARN indicator blinks.

2. Press and hold down the SLEEP button and

press the learned SOURCE button twice to be

erased.

• LEARN indicator lights.

3. Press ENTER button to continue erasing.

• The SEND indicator blinks twice and the

mode returns to LEARN mode.

• To cancel the erasing operation, do not

press ENTER button and simply touch any

other button.

4. To return the NORMAL mode, press the SET

button.

Erasing the all SOURCES

1. Press and hold down the SET and MENU/

INPUT buttons until LEARN indicator blinks.

2. Press and hold down the SLEEP button and

press POWER ON and POWER OFF button.

• LEARN indicator lights.

3. Press ENTER button to continue erasing.

• The SEND indicator blinks twice and the

mode returns to LEARN mode.

• To cancel the erasing operation, do not

press ENTER button and simply touch any

other button.

4. To return the NORMAL mode, press the SET

button.

Note:

Erasing codes will return to the factory preset code,

or there will leave empty if the button has no factory

preset code.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 29SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 29 07.8.24 1:14:57 PM07.8.24 1:14:57 PM

ENGLISH

CLONE MODE

Creating copies using clone mode

All of the codes programmed to the RC101 remote

controller can be copied to another RC101 using a

few simple operations.

• The remote controller can copy the entire

contents.

• When copying the entire contents, all programmed

codes are copied.

Note:

The clone function can only be used for copying

when using the same model (RC101) for both the

transmitting and receiving remote controller.

Copying entire contents

1. Place the receiver sensor of the receiving

remote controller (top) so that it is facing the

transmitter of the transmitting remote controller

(top) at a distance of about 2 inches (5 cm).

2 inches

SYSTEM REMOTE CONTROLLER

2. Press SET button and PLAY button of the

transmitting remote controller until the SEND

indicator blinks twice.

Then backlight ﬂ ashes

The transmitting side is now ready.

3. Press SET button and STOP button of the

receiving remote controller until the LEARN

indicator blinks twice.

Then backlight ﬂ ashes.

The receiving side is now ready.

4. Press the ENTER cursor button on the receiving

remote controller.

Then back lights tune off.

5. Press the ENTER cursor button on the

transmitting remote controller.

Then backlights tune off.

6. When copying is started, the SEND indicator of

transmitting remote controller and the LEARN

indicator of receiving remote controller start to

blink.

When the copying operation is completed, the

back lights of transmitting remote controller and

receiving remote controller are turned on.

Do not touch either of the remote controls

during the copying operation. Doing so could

cause copying to fail.

If the copying fails in the middle of the copying

process, back light of receiving remote are

flash. Press the SET button to return the

normal mode. Check and perform steps 1 to 5

again.

Copying takes about 30 seconds to complete

when the transmitting remote controller has

been programmed to 100% capacity.

7. Once copying is completed, press the SET

button on both remote controls.

OTHER OPERATIONS

CHANGE THE MULTI ROOM CONTROL COMMANDS

FOR EACH ZONE

(When operating the unit by Multi Zone connected)

• Zone A: MULTI ROOM A Control (Default)

• Zone B: MULTI ROOM B Control

(The SR7002 does not use this zone.)

• Zone C: The unit does not use this zone.

• Zone D: MAIN ROOM

Change the control commands for each zone.

1. Press SET button and ZONE button until the

SEND indicator blinks twice.

Then backlight ﬂ ashes.

2. Press each zone button(A/B button)

When the procedure is successful, the SEND

indicator will blink twice.

These buttons change a special code of each zone.

POWER ON/OFF

SOURCE

INFO

VOL +/–

SLEEP

MUTE

Tuner mode operation remote code (Refer to p.26)

CHANGE THE CONTROL COMMANDS OF MULTI

SPEAKER FUNCTION FROM MULTI ROOM.

2. 1.

1. Press SET button and POWER ON button until

the SEND indicator blinks twice.

Then backlight ﬂ ashes.

2. Press the 1-digit code by numeric keys.

• Multi room mode: 1 (Default)

• Multi speaker mode: 2

Note

In case of Zone D, only control for main room is

possible.

3. Press ENTER button once to lock in the code.

When the procedure is successful, the SEND

indicator will blink twice.

These buttons change a special code of multi room

mode or multi speaker mode.

Note

The control commands can be set independently in

ZONE A/B.

POWER ON/OFF

VOL +/–

MUTE

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 30SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 1_3.indd 30 07.8.24 1:14:58 PM07.8.24 1:14:58 PM

ENGLISH

CONNECTIONS

SPEAKER PLACEMENT

The ideal surround speaker system for this unit is 7-

speaker systems, using front left and right speakers,

a center speaker, surround left and right speakers,

a surround back left and right speakers, and a

subwoofer.

For best results we recommend that all front speakers

be of the same type, with identical or similar driver

units. This will deliver smooth pans across the front

sound stage as the action moves from side to side.

Your center channel speaker is very important as

over 80 % of the dialog from a typical motion picture

emanates from the center channel.

It should possess similar sonic characteristics to the

main speakers. Surround channel speakers need not

be identical to the front channel speakers, but they

should be of high quality.

The surround center speaker is useful for playback

of Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES. One of

the beneﬁ ts of both Dolby Digital and DTS is that

surround channels are discrete full range, while they

were frequency limited in earlier “Pro Logic” type

systems.

Bass effects are an important part of home theater.

For optimal enjoyment a subwoofer should be used

as it is optimized for low frequency reproduction. If you

have full range front speakers, however, they may be

used in place of a subwoofer with proper setting of the

switches in the menu system.

90°

110°

22°

30°

135°

150°

0°

Front left and right speakers

We recommend to set the front L and R speakers

with 45-60 degrees from the listening position.

Center speaker

Align the front line of the center speaker with the front

L/R speakers. Or place the center speaker a little

backward from the line.

Surround left and right speakers

When this unit is used in surround operation, the

preferred location for surround speakers is on the

side walls of the room, at or slightly behind the

listening position.

The center of the speaker should face into the room.

Surround back left and right speakers

Surround back speakers are required when a full 7.1-

channel system is installed.

Speakers should be placed on a rear wall, behind the

listening position.

The center of the speaker should face into the room.

Subwoofer

We recommend using a sub-woofer to have maximum

bass effect. As the subwoofer only handle low frequency.

You can place it any where in the room.

HEIGHT OF THE SPEAKER UNITS

Front left and right speakers, and a center speaker

Align the tweeters and mid-range drivers on the

three front speakers at the same height, as best as

possible.

Surround left and right speakers, and surround

back speaker

Place the surround left, right and surround back

speakers higher than your ears by about 70cm–1m.

Also place the speakers at the same height, as best

as possible.

70cm

Note:

• Use magnetically-shielded speakers for front left,

right and the center speakers when the speakers are

installed near the TV.

CONNECTING SPEAKERS

INVERT

OUTPUT

INPUT

LEVEL

BTL REMOTE CONT.EXT. CONT. IN

VIDEO/

+5~13V DC

SYSTEM OUT OUT

INPUT

MASTERSLAVE

MIN MAX

SPEAKER SYSTEM

MINIMUM 4 OHMS

Powered

subwoofer

Power

Ampliﬁ er

Passive

subwoofer

Surround

Right Left

FRONT A

Surround

BACK

Center

Right Left

CONNECTING SPEAKER WIRE

1. Strip away approx. 3/8 inch (10 mm) of wire

insulation.

2. Twist the bared wire ends tight, to prevent short

circuits.

Loosen the knob by turning it counterclockwise.

4. Insert the bare part of the wire into the hole in

side of each terminal.

5. Tighten the knob by turning it clockwise to

secure the wire.

1. 2.

3. 4. 5.

3/8 inch

(10 mm)

Front Right

Front Left

Front Center

Surround Left Subwoofer

Surround Back

Left

Surround Right

Surround Back

Right

Right Left

FRONT B

Right Left

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 31SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 31 07.8.24 1:15:18 PM07.8.24 1:15:18 PM

ENGLISH

CONNECTING AUDIO COMPONENTS

OUT IN

DIGITAL

INPUT DIGITAL

OUTPUT

OUT IN

L R L R

RL RL

R L

R L R L

L R

The output audio signal from the TAPE OUT jack and

the CD/CD RECORDER OUT jack is the same signal

which is currently selected.

Caution:

• Do not connect this unit and other components

to mains power until all connections between

components have been completed.

Notes:

• Insert all plugs and connectors securely. Incomplete

connections may make noise.

• Be sure to connect the left and right channels

properly.

Red connectors are for the R (right) channel, and

white connectors are for the L (left) channel.

• Be sure to connect input and output properly.

• Refer to the instructions for each component that is

connected to this unit.

• Do not bind audio/video connection cables with

power cords and speaker cables this will result in

generating a hum or other noise.

CONNECTING DIGITAL AUDIO COMPONENTS

• There are 6 digital inputs, 3 coaxial jacks and

3 optical jacks, on the rear panel. You can use

these jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS

bitstream signals from a CD, DVD, or other digital

source components.

• There is one digital output coaxial jack and one

optical output jack on the rear panel. These jacks

can be connected to a CD recorder, or a MD deck

inputs, respectively.

• Refer to the instructions for each component. To

setup the digital audio format of DVD player, or

other digital source’s connected to digital input

jacks.

• Use ﬁ ber optical cables (optical) for DIG-1,2,3

input jacks. Use 75 ohms coaxial cables (for digital

audio or video) for DIG-4, 5, 6 input jacks.

• You can designate the input for each digital input/

output jacks according to your component. See

page 43.

CD recorder Tape Deck

Analog Audio

Digital Audio (coaxial)

Digital Audio (optical)

Notes:

• There is no Dolby Digital RF input jack. Use an

external RF demodulator Dolby Digital decoder

when connecting the Dolby Digital RF output jack

of the videodisc player to the digital input jack.

• The digital signal jacks on this unit conform to

the EIA standard. If you use a cable that does not

conform to this standard, this unit may not function

properly.

• Each type of audio jack works independently.

Signals input through the digital and analog jacks are

output through the corresponding digital and analog

jacks, respectively.

Caution:

•

Be sure to use speakers with the speciﬁ ed impedance as

shown on the rear panel of this unit.

•

To prevent damage to circuitry, do not let the bare

speaker wires touch each other and do not let them

touch any metal part of this unit.

• Do not touch the speaker terminals when the

power is on. It may cause you to receive an electric

shocks.

• Do not connect more than one speaker cable to one

speaker terminal. Doing so may damage this unit.

Note:

•

Be sure to connect the positive and negative cables for

the speaker properly. If they are miss-connected, the

signal phase will be reversed and the signal quality will

be corrupted.

CONNECTING A SUBWOOFER

Use the PRE OUT SUBWOOFER jack to connect a

powered subwoofer (power ampliﬁ er built in ).

If your subwoofer is a passive type (power ampliﬁ er

is not built in), connect a monaural power ampliﬁ er to

the PRE OUT SUBWOOFER jack and connect the

subwoofer to the ampliﬁ er.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 32SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 32 07.8.24 1:15:19 PM07.8.24 1:15:19 PM

ENGLISH

AUDIO

OUT

DIGITAL

OUT VIDEO

OUT S-VIDEO

OUT

S-VIDEO

AUDIO

OUT AUDIO

VIDEO

OUT IN S-VIDEO

OUT IN

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO IN

L R

L R L R LR

L LR R

AUDIO

OUT

DIGITAL

OUT VIDEO

OUT S-VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

VIDEO

OUT S-VIDEO

VIDEO

L R

CONNECTING VIDEO COMPONENTS

Analog Audio

Video

S-Video

DVD player VIDEO

PROJECTOR Satellite Tuner

Digital Audio

(coaxial)

VCR

VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPONENT JACKS

There are 3 types of video jacks on the rear panel.

VIDEO jack

The video signal for the VIDEO jacks is the

conventional composite video signal.

S-VIDEO jack

The video signal is separated into luminance (Y) and

color (C) signals for the S-VIDEO jack. The S-VIDEO

signals enables high-quality color reproduction. If

your video component has an S-VIDEO output, we

recommend to use it. Connect the S-VIDEO output

jack on your video component to the S-VIDEO input

jack on this unit.

Component jack

Make component video connections to a TV or

monitor with component inputs to produce higher

quality video images. Use a component video cable

or 3 video cords to connect the component video out

jacks on the unit to the monitor.

Notes:

•

Be sure to connect the left and right audio channels

properly.

Red connectors are for the R (right) channel, and

white connectors are the for L (left) channel.

• Be sure to connect the inputs and outputs of the

video signals properly.

•

If you connect the S-VIDEO or component signal to

the S-VIDEO or component jack on this unit, it is not

necessary to connect the conventional video signal to

the VIDEO (composite) jack. If you use both video

inputs, this unit gives priority to the S-VIDEO signal.

• Each type of video jack works independently.

Signals input to the VIDEO (composite) and S-

VIDEO jacks or component are output to the

corresponding VIDEO (composite) and S-VIDEO

or component jacks, respectively.

•

his unit

has the “TV-AUTO ON/OFF” function to

turn the TV ON or OFF automatically, by sensing the

incoming video signal from the VIDEO jacks.

• You may need to setup the digital audio output

format of your DVD player, or other digital source

components. Refer to the instructions of the each

component connected to the digital input jacks.

• There is no Dolby Digital RF input jack. Use an

external RF demodulator with a Dolby Digital

decoder to connect the Dolby Digital RF output jack

of the DVD player to the digital input jack on this

unit.

• The COMPONENT OUTPUT 1 and 2 terminals of

this unit can output the same video signal. Moreover,

the OUTPUT 2 terminal of the SR8002 can output

video signals for multi room playback. (See page

53)

Digital Audio

(optical)

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 33SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 33 07.8.24 1:15:20 PM07.8.24 1:15:20 PM

ENGLISH

HDMI JACK

This unit has four HDMI inputs and two HDMI output.

It can send digital video and audio signals from DVDs

and other sources directly to a display. It minimizes

signal degradation caused by analog conversion so

that high quality images can be enjoyed.

This unit is also capable of converting analog video

signals (Composite Video, S-Video, Component

Video) for HDMI output.

Select an input source from the OSD menu system.

(See page 43, 44)

Notes:

• When the HDMI output is connected to a display

monitor that does not support HDCP, signals are not

output. To view images in HDMI, it is necessary to

connect to a display that supports HDCP.

• There may be no image output if connected to a

TV or display that is not compatible with the above

format.

• Refer to the instruction manual of the TV or display

to be connected to the unit for detailed information

regarding the HDMI terminal.

* HDCP: High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection

CONNECTING HDMI COMPONENTS

An HDMI cable (sold separately) is used to connect

the HDMI jack on the unit with the HDMI jack on a DVD

player, TV, projector or other component. To transmit

multichannel audio via HDMI, the connected player

must support multichannel audio transmission through

its HDMI jack.

HDMI video streaming is compatible with DVI in

principle. Therefore, it is possible to connect to a TV

or monitor that has a DVI terminal using an HDMI-DVI

conversion cable or plug. When connecting to a DVI

terminal, connect the audio signal separately.

Notes:

• Some HDMI components can be controlled over

the HDMI cable, but this unit cannot control other

components this way.

• When connected to a monitor (i.e., TV, projector,

etc.) that does not support HDCP, video and audio

are not output.

• DVI cables come with 24-pin and 29-pin plugs. This

unit supports 24-pin DVI-D cables; 29-pin DVI

cables cannot connect to it.

DVD player VIDEO PROJECTOR

• Some source devices such as DVD players or set

top box do not support HDMI repeater operations

like those of the unit. In such case, pictures are not

properly projected on monitors such as TVs and

projectors.

• When multiple components are connected to this

unit, turn power to unused components off to

prevent interference between them.

• Disconnecting or connecting cables with the power

on can damage the equipment. Turn the power off

before disconnecting or connecting cables.

• Some DVD-Audio disks disable downmixing.

These types of disks are not played back correctly

unless the left, center, right and surround left and

right speakers, and subwoofer are connected.

• If a DVD player that does not support HDMI 1.1 or

later is connected to the unit, multi channel PCM

playback is not possible even with DVD-Audio

disks.

• If an Super Audio CD player that does not support

HDMI 1.2 or later is connected to the unit, DSD

playback is not possible even with Super Audio

CD.

(*DSD: Direct Stream Digital)

• The following functions are not available when the

unit is connected to equipment that does not support

HDMI 1.3a.

• Deep Color

• xvYCC

• Bitstream audio signal decoding, as for Dolby

Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD, and so on

For details, refer to the user’s manuals of connected

equipment.

• If a DVD player or other device with DVI output is

connected to the unit, a separate audio cable (optical-

digital, coaxial digital or analog) is needed for the

audio signals. In this case, select the connected audio

input as explained in “1-1 FUNC INPUT SETUP”.

(See page 43)

• Multi channel PCM signals and audio signals of 64

kHz or higher that are input from the HDMI jack are

not output from the DIGITAL OUT jacks.

• Depending on the quiality of the cable used, the

HDMI signal may be affected by noise.

HDMI OUTPUT HDMI INPUT

HDMI OUTPUT

SATELLITE TUNER

CONNECTING HDMI COMPONENTS

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 34SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 34 07.8.24 1:15:20 PM07.8.24 1:15:20 PM

ENGLISH

FRONT SURR.

SURR.

BACK SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

FRONT SURR.

SURR.

BACK SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

RL RL RL

R L

LR LR

R L

RL RLRL

R L

ADVANCED CONNECTING

CONNECTING MULTI CHANNEL AUDIO SOURCE

The 7.1CH INPUT jacks are for multichannel audio

source such as a Super Audio CD multichannel

player, DVD audio player or external decoder.

If you use these jacks, switch on the 7.1CH INPUT

and set the 7.1CH INPUT level by using the SETUP

MAIN MENU. See page 43.

CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL POWER AMPLIFIER

The PREOUT jacks are for connecting external

power ampliﬁ ers.

Be sure to connect each speaker to the corresponding

external power ampliﬁ er.

Power

Amplifer

DVD Audio player

Super Audio CD

Multi channel player

Center

Front

Left

Front

Right

Surround

Left Surround

Right

Subwoofer

Surround

Back Left

REMOTE

CONTROL REMOTE

CONTROL

OUT

EXTERNAL INTERNAL EXTERNAL INTERNAL EXTERNAL INTERNAL

RC OUT

CONNECTING THE REMOTE CONTROL JACKS

DVD player

CD recorder

You can control other Marantz products through this

unit with the remote controller by connecting the

REMOTE CONTROL terminals on each unit.

The signal transmitted from the remote controller

is received by the remote sensor on this unit. Then

the signal is sent to the connected device through

this terminal. Therefore you need to aim the remote

control only at the unit. Also, if a Marantz power

ampliﬁ er (some models excluded) is connected to

one of these terminals, the power ampliﬁ er’s, power

switch is synchronized with this unit’s power switch.

Set the REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH on the

back of other units (not the SR7002/8002) to “EXT.”

(EXTERNAL) to use this feature.

CD player

OPTION

Whenever external infrared sensors or similar devices

are connected to RC-5 IN of the unit, be sure to

always disable operation of the infrared sensor on the

unit by using the following procedure.

1. Hold down the MULTI button and the MENU

button on the front panel at the same time for

ﬁ ve seconds.

2. The setting “IR=ENABLE” is shown on the FL

DISPLAY.

3. Press the CURSOR buttons (1, 2) to change

this to “IR=DISABLE”.

4. Press the ENTER button. Once this setting

is made, the infrared sensor on the unit is

disabled.

Note:

• Be sure to set to “IR=ENABLE” when external

infrared sensors or similar devices are not connected.

Otherwise, the unit will be unable to receive remote

control commands.

5. To restore the original setting, perform steps 1

to 4 to set to “IR=ENABLE”.

Surround

Back Right

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 35SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 35 07.8.24 1:15:20 PM07.8.24 1:15:20 PM

ENGLISH

CONNECTING THE ANTENNA TERMINALS

FM ( 575 ))GNDGND AMAM

ANTANTENNA

FM Feeder Antenna

(For SR8002)

FM External

Antenna

AM Loop

Antenna

AM External

Antenna

ASSEMBLING THE AM LOOP ANTENNA

Release the vinyl tie and take out the connection

line.

2. Bend the base part in the reverse direction.

3. Insert the hook at the bottom of the loop part

into the slot at the base part.

CONNECTING THE SUPPLIED ANTENNAS

Connecting the supplied FM antenna

The supplied FM antenna is for indoor use only.

During use, extend the antenna and move it in various

directions until the clearest signal is received.

Fix it with push pins or similar implements in

the position that will cause the least amount of

distortion.

If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor

antenna may improve the quality.

Connecting the supplied AM loop antenna

The supplied AM loop antenna is for indoor use

only.

Set it in the direction and position it to where you

receive the clearest sound. Put it as far away as

possible from the unit, televisions, speaker cables,

and power cords.

If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor

antenna may improve the quality.

Press and hold down the lever of the AM antenna

terminal.

2. Insert the bare wire into the antenna terminal.

3. Release the lever.

Note:

• Connect the shielded grounding wire (black) to the

AM antenna GND terminal.

CONNECTING AN FM OUTDOOR ANTENNA

Notes:

• Keep the antenna away from noise sources (neon

signs, busy roads, etc.).

• Do not put the antenna close to power lines. Keep it

well away from power lines, transformers, etc.

• To avoid the risk of lightning and electrical shock,

grounding is necessary.

CONNECTING AN AM OUTDOOR ANTENNA

An outdoor antenna will be more effective if it is

stretched horizontally above a window or outside.

Notes:

• Do not remove the AM loop antenna.

• To avoid the risk of lightning and electrical shock,

grounding is necessary.

4. Place the antenna on stable surface.

CONNECTING THE ANTENNA WIRE TO THE

ANTENNA CONVERTER

Loosen the screws and attach the wire terminals,

then tighten the screws with a screwdriver.

FM Antenna

(For SR7002)

Antenna

Converter

(SR8002 Only)

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 36SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 36 07.8.24 1:15:21 PM07.8.24 1:15:21 PM

ENGLISH

XM RADIO OVERVIEW

This unit is the XM Ready® receiver. You can receive XM Satellite Radio® by connecting to the XM Mini-Tuner

and Home Dock (sold separately) and subscribing the XM service.

Introducing XM Satellite Radio

There’s a world of audio listening pleasure beyond AM and FM. XM Satellite Radio which includes:

• Over 170 Digital Channels

• The most commercial-free music in satellite radio

• Live concerts plus exclusive original programming

• The biggest names in news, talk, and entertainment

• The most sports play-by-play

• Major league Baseball. Every team. All season long.

Questions? Visit www.xmradio.com <http://www.xmradio.com/>

How to Subscribe

Listeners can subscribe by visiting XM on the Web at www.xmradio.com or by calling XM’s Listener Care at

(800) 967-2346. Customers should have their Radio ID and credit card ready. The Radio ID can be found by

selecting channel 0 on the radio.

(See the “CHECKING THE XM SIGNAL STRENGTH AND RADIO ID”)

A Warning Against Reverse Engineering

It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, or manipulate any technology incorporated

in receivers compatible with the XM Satellite Radio system.

Furthermore, the AMBE® voice compression software included in this product is protected by intellectual

property rights including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. The user of

this or any other software contained in an XM Radio is explicitly prohibited from attempting to copy, decompile,

reverse engineer, or disassemble the object code, or in any other way convert the object code into human-

readable form. The software is licensed solely for use within this product.

XM $ 12.95 monthly service subscription sold separately. XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock required to

receive XM service (sold separately). Installation costs and other fees and taxes, including a one-time

activation fee may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change.

Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an XL. Channle blocking is available for XM

radio receivers by calling 1-800-XMRADIO. Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at

xmradio.com. XM service only available in the 48 contiguous United States. [XM Ready, XMDirect*] are

CONNECTING THE XM CONNECT-AND-PLAY ANTENNA

• Plug the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock into XM terminal on the rear panel.

• Position the XM antenna near a south-facing window to receive the best signal.

When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock.

OFF

MULTI SPEAKER

/SPEAKER C

SUB SPEAKER : 6-8 OHMS

Note

• Keep the power supply cord unplugged until the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock connection have been

completed.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 37SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 37 07.8.24 1:15:21 PM07.8.24 1:15:21 PM

ENGLISH

L R LR

FRONTRC IN

R L

FRONT

RC OUT

VIDEO

ONON

OFFOFF

AKERMULTI SPEAKER

KER C/SPEAKER C

OHMSSUB SPEAKER : 6-8 OHMS

CONNECTING FOR THE MULTI ROOM

RIGHT

SPEAKER

LEFT

SPEAKER

IR RECEIVER

MULTIROOM

RIGHT

SPEAKER

MULTIROOM

LEFT

SPEAKER

MAIN AMP

(For multiroom)

MULTIROOM B

(Multi room speaker)

MONITOR

Note:

• You can use surround back speaker terminals as

MULTI SPK. terminals or SPEAKER C terminal

when you are not using surround back speakers.

CONNECTING FOR SPEAKER C USE

Bi-amp Connection

A bi-amp connection is possible with speakers that

have two sets of inputs (for treble and bass).

This allows you to drive the treble and bass units

with separate channel amps, which enables better

sound quality. Connect the speakers as shown in the

ﬁ gure. Set the SPEAKER C selector switch on the

rear panel to ON.

Notes:

• If incorrectly connected, a protective circuit in

the unit will trip and set the unit to standby. (The

STANDBY indicator will flash.) In such case,

recheck the connections between the speakers and

the unit.

• Turn power to the unit off before changing the

setting of the SPEAKER C selector switch.

ONON

OFFOFF

EAKERMULTI SPEAKER

KER C/SPEAKER C

OHMSSUB SPEAKER : 6-8 OHMS

RIGHT

SPEAKER

LEFT

SPEAKER

MULTIROOM A

Note:

The SR7002 does not use MULTIROOM B.

IR RECEIVER

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 38SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 38 07.8.24 1:15:21 PM07.8.24 1:15:21 PM

ENGLISH

a RS232C

Connect an external control device or other device for

servicing. (Use a straight cable for the connection.)

s DC OUT (DC TRIGGER)

External devices can be controlled from the unit

by connecting them to the DC OUT terminal (12 V

44mA max).

d EMITTER OUT (SR8002 Only)

Outputs the remote control signal input to the IR

RECEIVER IN terminals. External components can

be controlled by connecting them to the EMITTER

OUT terminal.

f FLASHER IN

This unit can be controlled by connecting a control

box or other control device to this unit.

f d

CONNECTING OTHER EQUIPMENT

g IR RECEIVER IN (SR8002 Only)

This unit can be operated by remote controller

without using the internal IR receiver, by connecting

an external IR receiver.

An IR receiver is connected as shown above.

Caution:

• Wrongly connecting an IR receiver or connecting

an IR receiver of the wrong voltage can damage the

unit, therefore do not do this.

• 50 mA of current are supplied to the device connected

to the IR RECEIVER IN terminal.

• Connecting a device that requires more than 50

mA of current to this unit will damage this unit.

Before using other devices, carefully check the

speciﬁ cations of those devices.

+12V

GND

Signal

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 39SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 39 07.8.24 1:15:21 PM07.8.24 1:15:21 PM

ENGLISH

SETUP

After all components are connected, initial setup

must be performed.

ONSCREEN DISPLAY MENU SYSTEM

This unit incorporates an onscreen menu system,

which makes various operations possible by using

the cursor (3, 4, 1 , 2) and OK/ENTER buttons on

the remote controller or on the front panel.

Note:

•

To view the onscreen displays, make certain you

have connected the MONITOR OUT jack on the rear

panel to the composite, S-Video, component video

or HDMI input of your TV or projector. (See page

33, 34)

1. Press the AMP button on the remote controller.

(This step is not needed when operating the

setup menus from the unit.)

2. Press the MENU button on the remote controller

or press the MENU button on the front panel.

The “MAIN MENU” of the OSD menu system is

displayed.

There are 6 items in the MAIN MENU.

3. Select the desired sub-menu with the

4 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER

button. The display will change to the selected

sub-menu.

Notes:

• If you desire to adjust any sub-menu, you need to set

it to UNLOCKED.

• To lock sub-menus, set items 1-6 on the MAIN

MENU to “LOCKED”.

(1) Move the cursor to “1. INPUT SETUP” in the

MAIN MENU.

(2) Select the “0” mark left of “LOCKED” with the 1

or 2 cursor buttons.

4. To exit from OSD menu system, press the EXIT

button, or move the cursor to EXIT and press

the OK/ENTER button.

Note:

• Settings are entered with the ENTER button on

the unit or the OK button on the remote controller.

When using the remote controller, use the OK

button as if it were the ENTER button.

SR7002/SR8002 FRONT BUTTON CONTROL

RC8001SR BUTTON CONTROL

231

564

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP·SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

EXIT button

Press this button to exit the OSD

menu system.

MENU button

Press this button to display

the OSD menu system.

UP button

RIGHT button

DOWN button

OK button

LEFT button

M-DAX

ENTER

THX

7.1CH INPUT

AUTO MULTI T-MODE MEMORY

DISPLAY

EXIT

BAND

MIC

SPEAKER

MULTI

UP button

RIGHT button

DOWN button

MENU button

Press this button to display the

OSD menu system.

EXIT button

Press this button to exit the

OSD menu system.

LEFT button

ENTER button AMP (Ampliﬁ er) button

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 40SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 40 07.8.24 1:15:22 PM07.8.24 1:15:22 PM

ENGLISH

Note:

• After you complete this portion of the setup, move

cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2

cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

MAIN MENU

1.INPUT SETUP

2.SPKR SETUP

3.SURR SETUP LOCKED

4.VIDEO SETUP

5.PREFERENCE UNLOCK

6.ACOUSTIC EQ

RETURN NEXT EXIT

2.SPKR SETUP

AUTO SETUP

MANUAL SETUP

THX AUDIO SETUP

RETURN NEXT EXIT

4.VIDEO SETUP

VIDEO CONVERT

TV.AUTO :DISABLE

OSD INFO :ENABLE

I/P CONVERT :DISABLE

HDMI OUT :OUTPUT1

COMPO OUT2 :MAIN

RETURN NEXT EXIT

5.PREFERENCE

MULTI ROOM SETUP A B

DC TRIGGER SETUP 1 2

STANDBY : NORMAL

BILINGUAL : MAIN

HDMI AUDIO: ENABLE

HDMI LIP : ENABLE

RETURN NEXT EXIT

6.ACOUSTIC EQ.

EQ.MODE : OFF

PRESET G.EQ ADJ

CHECK AUTO

RETURN NEXT EXIT

1.INPUT SETUP

FUNC INPUT SETUP

7.1CH INPUT SETUP

FUNCTION RENAME

RETURN NEXT EXIT

3.SURR SETUP

CHANNEL LEVEL

PL x MUSIC PARAMETER

CS PARAMETER

NEO:6 PARAMETER

RE-EQ : OFF

LFE LEVEL : -10dB

M-DAX : OFF

RETURN NEXT EXIT

“1. INPUT SETUP” (P. 42)

MAIN MENU

SUB MENU

“2. SPEAKER SETUP” (P. 45)

“3. SURROUND SETUP” (P. 51)

“4. VIDEO SETUP” (P. 53)

Note:

• The SR7002 does not have “COMPO OUT2”

Sub-menus.

“5. PREFERENCE” (P. 54)

Note:

• The SR7002 does not have “MULTI ROOM

SETUP” A and B selection options.

“6. ACOUSTIC EQ” (P. 56)

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 41SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 41 07.8.24 1:15:22 PM07.8.24 1:15:22 PM

ENGLISH

1 INPUT SETUP

This menu is for setting the matching the output of

connected audio devices and the input jacks of this

unit.

• FUNC INPUT SETUP :

“1-1 FUNC INPUT SETUP” (see page 43)

• 7.1 CH INPUT SETUP :

“1-2 7.1 CH INPUT SETUP” (see page 43)

• FUNC RENAME :

“1-3 FUNCTION RENAME” (see page 44)

1. Select “1. INPUT SETUP” from the MAIN

MENU with 3

4 cursor button, and press the

OK/ENTER button.

1.INPUT SETUP

FUNC INPUT SETUP

7.1CH INPUT SETUP

FUNCTION RENAME

RETURN NEXT EXIT

2. Select the desired sub-menu with the

4 cursor buttons, and press the OK/ENTER

button.

1.INPUT SETUP

FUNC INPUT SETUP

7.1CH INPUT SETUP

FUNCTION RENAME

RETURN NEXT EXIT

FUNC INPUT SETUP 2

FUNC:MODE DIG HDMI C0MP V/S

TAPE:ANA - - - 1

CD/R:AUTO 5 - - 2

AUX2:ANA - - - 3

RETURN BACK EXIT

FUNC INPUT SETUP 1

FUNC:MODE DIG HDMI COMP V/S

TV :AUTO 11 11

DVD :AUTO 2 2 2 2

VCR1:AUTO 3 3 3 3

DSS :AUTO 4 4 4 4

AUX1:AUTO F - -

RETURN NEXTT EXIT

FUNCTION RENAME

FUNCTION: TV

RENAME : TV________

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV

WXYZabcdefghijklmnopqr

stuvwxyz0123456789!"#$

%&’()*+,../:;<=>?

_{|}SPACE BACK DEFAULT

RETURN NEXT EXIT

7.1CH INPUT SETUP

VIDEO-IN : LAST

FRONT L : 0dB

CENTER : 0dB

FRONT R : 0dB

SURR.R : 0dB

SURR.B R : 0dB

SURR.B L : 0dB

SURR. L : 0dB

SUB W : 0dB

RETURN NEXT EXIT

☞ P. 43 ☞ P. 43 ☞ P. 44

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 42SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 42 07.8.24 1:15:22 PM07.8.24 1:15:22 PM

ENGLISH

1-1 FUNC INPUT SETUP

(ASSIGNABLE DIGITAL INPUT)

The 6 and F (Front) digital inputs can be assigned to

a desired source.

HDMI and COMPONENT inputs can be assigned to

the preferred source.

Use this menu to select which digital input jacks are

to be assigned to which input source.

1. Select “FUNC INPUT SETUP” from the

1.INPUT SETUP menu with the 3

4 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

FUNC INPUT SETUP 1

FUNC:MODE DIG HDMI COMP V/S

TV :AUTO 11 11

DVD :AUTO 2 2 2 2

VCR1:AUTO 3 3 3 3

DSS :AUTO 4 4 4 4

AUX1:AUTO F - -

RETURN NEXTT EXIT

2. Select a setting with the 3, 4, 1, and 2 cursor

buttons, and assign a mode and input jack

(DIG, HDMI, COMP, V/S).

MODE

AUTO:

Select “AUTO”, for automatic detection of the

digital input signal condition.

If there is no digital signal, but there is an analog

signal present, the analog signal will be played.

"AUTO" is the initial setting of all input sources.

HDMI:

Select “HDMI”

, when only a HDMI signal will be

used

DIG:

Select “DIG”, when only a digital signal will be

used.

ANA:

Select “ANA” for input sources for which no digital

input jacks are used.

DIG

6 and F(Front) digital inputs can be assigned to a

desired source.

Assign the number of a digital input jack to the

device.

HDMI

Assign the number of an HDMI input jack to the

device.

Note:

• When FUNCTION MODE is set to HDMI and

HDMI AUDIO of “5. PREFERENCE” is set to

THROUGH, audio is not output from the unit. (See

page 54)

COMP

Assign the number of a component video input

jack to the device.

V/S

Assign the number of a composite video and S-

video input jack to the device.

Note:

• Video and S-video can use the same numbers when

assigning to input functions.

• The ✽ mark in AUX.1 indicates that other inputs

cannot be assigned.

3. Press the OK/ENTER button.

4. Select each mode setting and input terminal

with the 1

2 cursor buttons.

5. Press the OK/ENTER button.

6. Repeat steps 2-5 until all items are set.

7. After you complete this portion of the setup,

move the cursor to “NEXT” with the 3, 4, 1,

and 2 cursor buttons and then press the OK/

ENTER button to go to the next page.

FUNC INPUT SETUP 2

FUNC:MODE DIG HDMI C0MP V/S

TAPE:ANA - - - 1

CD/R:AUTO 5 - - 2

AUX2:ANA - - - 3

RETURN BACK EXIT

8. Repeat steps 2-5 until all items are set.

After you complete this portion of the setup,

move the cursor to “RETURN” with 3, 4, 1,

and 2 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER

button.

To return to the Func Input Setup 1 menu from

the Func Input Setup 2 menu, move the cursor

to “BACK” with the 3, 4, 1, and 2 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

Note:

• Assignments cannot be made in sections with a ✽

mark.

1-2 7.1 CH INPUT SETUP

This menu is for adjusting the speaker levels for 7.1-

channel input sources.

Here you will adjust the volume for each channel so

that they are all heard by the listener at the same

level.

1. Select “7.1 CH INPUT SETUP” from the

1.INPUT SETUP menu with the 3

4 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

7.1CH INPUT SETUP

VIDEO-IN : LAST

FRONT L : 0dB

CENTER : 0dB

FRONT R : 0dB

SURR.R : 0dB

SURR.B R : 0dB

SURR.B L : 0dB

SURR. L : 0dB

SUB W : 0dB

RETURN NEXT EXIT

2. Select “VIDEO-IN” with the 3

4 cursor

buttons.

3. Using the 1

2 cursor buttons, select the

video input source to be played through the

MONITOR OUT jack.

The input source is switched by pressing the

2 cursor buttons as follows;

LAST ↔ TV ↔ DVD ↔ VCR1 ↔ DSS ↔

AUX1 ↔ V-OFF ↔ LAST ↔...

Notes:

•

When “LAST” is selected, the source is set to the

source selected before the 7.1 ch input menu was

activated.

• When

“

V-OFF

” is selected,

no signal is emitted from

MONITOR OUT jack.

4. Select desired channel with the 3

4 cursor

buttons.

5. Using the 1

2 cursor buttons, adjust the

volume level of each channel.

Move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1, and

2 cursor buttons, and press the OK/ENTER button to

go to the 1.INPUT SETUP menu.

Note:

• The volume level can be set between -12 dB and

+12 dB in 1 dB increments on all channels except the

subwoofer (SUB W), which can be set from -18dB

to +12 dB in 1 dB increments.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 43SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 43 07.8.24 1:15:22 PM07.8.24 1:15:22 PM

ENGLISH

1-3 FUNCTION RENAME

Input sources can be registered under any name.

This menu is for renaming input source.

This menu is for renaming function name. Names

can be up to 10 characters long, including spaces.

(Characters are selected from those appearing on

the display.) This name appears on the unit's FL

display and the OSD, but it does not appear in the

OSD Setup menu.

1. Select “FUNCTION RENAME” from the 1.

INPUT SETUP menu with the 3

4 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

FUNCTION RENAME

FUNCTION: TV

RENAME : TV________

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV

WXYZabcdefghijklmnopqr

stuvwxyz0123456789!"#$

%&’()*+,../:;<=>?

_{|}SPACE BACK DEFAULT

RETURN NEXT EXIT

2. Select “FUNCTION” with the 3

4 cursor

buttons.

3. Select an input source with the 1

2 cursor

buttons.

4. Select “RENAME” with the 3

4 cursor

buttons.

5. Move the cursor to the character (1st to 10th) to

change with the 1

2 cursor buttons.

6. Move the cursor to the character list with the 4

cursor button. (Move the cursor to the letter “A”

to begin with.)

7. Select a character with the 3, 4, 1, and 2

cursor buttons.

8. Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the

selected letter.

9. Repeat steps 5-8 until the new name is input.

BACK:

Deletes the character left of the cursor in the

“RENAME” area one character at a time.

DEFAULT:

Restores the name in the “RENAME” area to the

name in the “FUNCTION” area.

SPACE:

Inserts a space at the cursor point of the “RENAME”

area.

Note:

• RENAME cannot be left blank.

Move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1, and

2 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button to

go to the 1. INPUT SETUP menu.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 44SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 44 07.8.24 1:15:23 PM07.8.24 1:15:23 PM

ENGLISH

2 SPKR (SPEAKER) SETUP

After you have installed the unit connected all the

components and determined the speaker layout, it

is now time to perform the settings in the Speaker

Setup menu for the optimum sound acoustics for

your environment and speaker layout.

Before you perform the following settings, it is

important that you first determine the following

characteristics:

• AUTO SETUP:

“2-1 AUTO SETUP (MultEQ Setup)”

(see page 46)

• MANUAL SETUP:

“2-2 MANUAL SETUP”

(see page 49)

• THX AUDIO SETUP:

“2-3 THX AUDIO SETUP”

(see page 50)

1. Select “2.SPKR SETUP” from the MAIN MENU

with 3

4 cursor buttons and press the OK/

ENTER button.

2.SPKR SETUP

AUTO SETUP

MANUAL SETUP

THX AUDIO SETUP

RETURN EXIT

2. Select the desired menu with the 3

4 cursor

buttons, and press the OK/ENTER button.

Note:

• After you complete this the portion of the setup,

press the 3, 4, 1, and 2 cursor button. The cursor

will move to “RETURN” and press the OK/

ENTER button to go to the Sub-menu.

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:--

1st MIC POSITION

NOW ANALYZING !!

CANCEL

EXIT

AUTO SETUP

AUTO SETUP: START

MAIN ROOM

SURR BACK: 2CH

RETURN EXIT

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:OK

2nd MIC POSITION!!

START

CHECK

CALCULATE

EXIT

CHECK RESULT

SPEAKER CONFIG

SPEAKER SIZE

DISTANCE

CHANNEL LEVEL

CROSSOVER FREQ

STORE

EXIT

SPEAKER SIZE

THX SPKR : NO

SUB W : YES

FRONT : SMALL

CENTER : SMALL

SURR. : SMALL

SURR.B : 2CH

SURR.B SIZE : SMALL

LPF/HPF : 80Hz

BASS MIX :

RETURN NEXT EXIT

SPEAKER DISTANCE

UNIT : ft

FRONT L : 10.0 ft

CENTER : 10.0 ft

FRONT R : 10.0 ft

SURR.R : 10.0 ft

SURR.B R : 10.0 ft

SURR.B L : 10.0 ft

SURR.L : 10.0 ft

SUB W : 10.0 ft

RETURN BACK NEXT EXIT

THX AUDIO SETUP

ADVANCED SPKR ARRAY

SURR.B SPKR

:TOGETHER

RETURN EXIT

2.SPKR SETUP

AUTO SETUP

MANUAL SETUP

THX AUDIO SETUP

RETURN EXIT

SPEAKER LEVEL

TEST MODE : MANUAL

FRONT L : 0.0dB

CENTER : 0.0dB

FRONT R : 0.0dB

SURR.R : 0.0dB

SURR.B R : 0.0dB

SURR.B L : 0.0dB

SURR.L : 0.0dB

SUB W : 0.0dB

RETURN BACK EXIT

AUTO SETUP

NOW ANALYZING!!

CANCEL

AUTO SETUP

______________

NOW CALCULATING!

☞ P. 46 ☞ P. 49 ☞ P. 56

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 45SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 45 07.8.24 1:15:23 PM07.8.24 1:15:23 PM

ENGLISH

Note:

• The detection check measures the state of use of all

speakers whether actually used or not.

For example, if the center speaker is not used, the

test tone will require time to go from the L-channel

to the R-channel, therefore be careful not to unplug

the microphone or operate this unit during this

time.

6. When the 1 st Position Check ends, the

following OSD appears on the display.

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:OK

2nd MIC POSITION!!

START

CHECK

CALCULATE

EXIT

Here, to view the results of the detection check,

select “CHECK” with the 3/4 cursor buttons

and press the OK/ENTER button. The results

will be displayed.

SPEAKER CONFIG

CHECK !! SPEAKER

FRONT : YES

CENTER : NON

FRONT R : YES

SURR.R : YES

SURR.B R : NON

SURR.B L : NON

SURR.L : YES

SUB W : YES

RETURN EXIT

If the check results indicate an error, take suitable

action with that item and remeasure. (For error

messages, see “ERROR MESSAGES” on

page 48.)

After confirming the check results, select

“RETURN” with the 3/4 cursor buttons and

press the OK/ENTER button to return to the

OSD menu.

At this point, you can select “EXIT” to end Auto

Setup and return to “2. SPKR SETUP”.

Note:

• AUTO SETUP is not available in Pure Direct,

Source Direct, or 7.1 Channel Input modes.

2-1 AUTO SETUP (MultEQ™ SETUP)

The AUTO SETUP (MultEQ™ Setup) feature of

the unit measures sound characteristics of the

speaker system and room where the unit is used and

automatically optimizes settings.

The Audyssey MultEQ™ technology adopted by

this unit provides the best listening environment for

multiple listeners.

To do this, the AUTO SETUP feature measures a

test tone emitted by each channel in a maximum of 6

listening positions, using the supplied microphone.

The measurement results are analyzed using an

original algorithm and environmental settings are

made to improve the sound characteristics of the

listening area.

To set up the speaker system (i.e., adjusting speaker

distance, etc.) without using the AUTO SETUP feature,

see “MANUAL SETUP” on page 49 of the manual.

HOW TO PERFORM AUTO SETUP

During measurement, the OSD menu displays the

condition, therefore turn power to the monitor on.

1. Connect the supplied microphone to the MIC

jack on the unit.

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8002

POWER ON/OFF PHONES

STANDBY

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B V-OFF

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP SURR DIRECT

AUTO DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1

PCM

AAC

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIOS-VIDEODIGITAL VIDEO L R

DOWN

VOLUME

ENTER

INPUT SELECTOR

M-DAX

2. Set the microphone in the listening position.

Notes:

• Measurement can be done in a maximum of 6

listening positions.

For the ﬁ rst measurement, set the microphone in the

main listening position.

• Use a stand or tripod to position the microphone at

ear height in the listening position.

• Remove any obstructions between the speakers and

microphone.

• To use the internal subwoofer of the amp, set the

volume to the middle point and set the crossover

frequency to the highest.

• During measurement, step away from the microphone

and operate the unit via the remote controller from a

position that is out of the path of the speaker sound.

• The test tone output from the speakers during

measurement is loud. Be mindful of neighbors and

watch out for small children.

3. Select “2. SPKR SETUP” from the MAIN

MENU, select “AUTO SETUP” with the 3/4

cursor buttons, and press the OK/ENTER

button to display the start screen.

4. Select the number of channels for the surround

back speaker you are using.

For a 5.1 channel speaker system, select

“NON” (Surround Back speaker off). (To use

speaker C or multi speaker, select “NON”. See

page 38, 55.)

Select “START” with the 3/4 cursor buttons

and press the OK/ENTER button to start

measurement.

AUTO SETUP

AUTO SETUP: START

MAIN ROOM

SURR BACK: 2CH

RETURN EXIT

5. 1 st Position Check

During the ﬁ rst position check, the following

screen is displayed as the unit checks

background noise in the listening room,

presence of speakers, and speaker polarity

and measures the acoustical characteristics in

the ﬁ rst position where the microphone is set

up.

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:--

1st MIC POSITION

NOW ANALYZING !!

CANCEL

EXIT

7. Move the microphone to the second listening

position, select “START” with the 3/4 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button to

measure the second point. At this point, you

can cancel second point measurement and

calculate measurement results by selecting

“CALCULATE” and pressing the OK/ENTER

button.

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:OK

2nd MIC POSITION!!

START

CHECK

CALCULATE

EXIT

8. Repeat steps 7 until measuring 6 points

between the main listening position and

surrounding positions.

When all measurements end, the following

OSD appears on the display.

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:OK

CALCULATE

EXIT

Select “CALCULATE” with the 3/4 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button

to calculate measurement results. During

calculations, the following OSD appears on the

display.

AUTO SETUP

______________

NOW CALCULATING!

EXIT

Note:

• Less than 6 positions can be measured, but it is

recommended to measure in all 6 positions in order

to obtain the best results.

• The time needed to complete calculations depends

on the number of connected speakers and measured

listening positions. The more speakers and listening

positions, the more time is needed.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 46SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 46 07.8.24 1:15:23 PM07.8.24 1:15:23 PM

ENGLISH

9. Checking Measurement Results

When calculations for the measurement results

end, a screen appears for confirming the

calculation results.

CHECK RESULT

SPEAKER CONFIG

SPEAKER SIZE

DISTANCE

CHANNEL LEVEL

CROSSOVER FREQ

STORE

EXIT

Select items to check with the 3/4 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button to

enter them.

Note:

To check equalizer (MultEQ) parameters, see page

57.

[Example]

Conﬁ rmation screen for speaker detection

SPEAKER CONFIG

CHECK !! SPEAKER

FRONT : YES

CENTER : NON

FRONT R : YES

SURR.R : YES

SURR.B R : NON

SURR.B L : NON

SURR.L : YES

SUB W : YES

RETURN NEXT

[Example] Conﬁ rmation screen for the distance from

speakers to the listening position

DISTANCE

UNIT : ft

FRONT L : 30.00ft

CENTER : 19.33ft

FRONT R : 29.66ft

SURR.R : 21.50ft

SURR.B R : 12.33ft

SURR.B L : 11.66ft

SURR.L : 16.33ft

SUB W : 12.50ft

RETURN NEXT

* The units can be changed by moving the cursor to

[ft] of UNIT and pressing 1 / 2 the cursor buttons.

Each time a 1 / 2 cursor button is pressed, the units

alternate between [ft] (feet) and [m] (meters).

the OK/ENTER button.

Note:

Pressing “EXIT” prior to pressing “STORE” erases all

measurement results and calculation results, therefore

operate the remote controller with care.

When storing operations end, the following OSD

appears on the display.

2.SPKR SETUP

AUTO SETUP

MANUAL SETUP

THX AUDIO SETUP

RETURN EXIT

Notes:

• Do not turn the power to the unit off while storing

parameters in memory. This may erase all data in the

unit’s memory and may damage the unit.

• Please set any THX Certiﬁ ed speakers manually to

“Small” and the crossover “80 Hz” after Auto setup

operation.

[Example] Conﬁ rmation screen for speaker size and

crossover frequency

SPEAKER SIZE

FRONT L : AUTO

CENTER : AUTO

FRONT R : AUTO

SURR.R : AUTO

SURR.B R : AUTO

SURR.B L : AUTO

SURR.L : AUTO

RETURN NEXT

CROSSOVER FREQ

FRONT : AUTO

CENTER : AUTO

SURR : AUTO

SURR.B : AUTO

RETURN

* AUTO is displayed to indicate that the speaker size

and crossover frequency results were automatically

measured.

10. Storing Measurement Results in Memory

Once finished confirming the measurement

results, select “RETURN” with the 3/4 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button to

display the CHECK RESULT screen.

CHANNEL LEVEL

FRONT L : 0.0dB

CENTER : -6.5dB

FRONT R : -1.5dB

SURR.R : +1.0dB

SURR.B R : +9.5dB

SURR.B L : +12.0dB

SURR.L : -2.5dB

SUB W : -12.5dB

RETURN NEXT EXIT

CHECK RESULT

SPEAKER CONFIG

SPEAKER SIZE

DISTANCE

CHANNEL LEVEL

CROSSOVER FREQ

STORE

EXIT

Place the cursor on “STORE” and press the

OK/ENTER button to store all parameters

including the equalizer parameters in memory.

If not wanting to store the calculation results in

memory, place the cursor on “EXIT” and press

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 47SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 47 07.8.24 1:15:24 PM07.8.24 1:15:24 PM

ENGLISH

ERROR MESSAGES

Displayed Error Cause How to Remedy

MIC SET ERROR!!

AUTO SETUP

AUTO SETUP: START

MAIN ROOM

SURR BACK: 2CH

MIC SET ERROR!!

RETURN EXIT

• The microphone is not properly connected. • Connect the included microphone.

• Check the microphone connection.

NOISE ERROR!!

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:

NOISE ERROR !!

RETURN EXIT

• There is too much noise in the listening room to measure properly.

• Volume from the speakers is low.

• During measurement, turn off devices that make noise such as air

conditioners.

• Measure at a time when the surrounding area is quiet.

ANALYZE ERROR!!

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:

ANALYZE ERROR !!

RETURN NEXT EXIT

* Under ANALYZE ERROR, select “NEXT” with the 3/4 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button. A detail screen like the

following appears on the display.

SPEAKER CONFIG

CHECK !! SPEAKER

FRONT L : YES REV

CENTER : NON

FRONT R : YES REV

SURR.R : NON ERR

SURR.B R : YES ERR

SURR.B L : YES ERR

SURR.L : NON ERR

SUB W : YES

RETURN EXIT

• The speakers required for suitable playback were not detected.

• Speaker polarity is connected backwards.

In the examples at left, the following trouble is detected.

• The polarity of the left and right channels of the front speakers is

backwards ([REV] appears on the display.)

• The surround speaker is not connected ([NON] is displayed), but

the surround back speaker is connected

(In this kind of situation, [ERR] is displayed for all surround and

surround back speakers.)

An error is indicated in addition to the above if the speakers are

connected as follows.

• When using just one surround back speaker, but it is connected to

the surround back R-channel

(To use just one surround back speaker, connect it to the L-

channel.)

• Check the speaker that is indicated as having reversed polarity

([REV] can appear with some speakers even when properly

connected. In such case, ignore the error indication.)

• Check speaker direction and layout

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 48SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 48 07.8.24 1:15:24 PM07.8.24 1:15:24 PM

ENGLISH

2-2 MANUAL SETUP

1. Select “2. SPKR SETUP” from the MAIN

MENU.

2. Select “MANUAL SETUP” with the 3

cursor buttons.

3. Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the

selection.

SPEAKER SIZE

THX SPKR : NO

SUB W : YES

FRONT : SMALL

CENTER : SMALL

SURR. : SMALL

SURR.B : 2CH

SURR.B SIZE : SMALL

LPF/HPF : 80Hz

BASS MIX :

RETURN NEXT EXIT

When setting the speaker size in the SPEAKER SIZE

menu, use the guidelines below.

LARGE:

The complete frequency range for the channel you

are setting will be output from the speaker.

SMALL:

Frequencies of the channel you are setting that

are lower than approx. 80 Hz will be output from

the subwoofer.

If the SUB. W is set to “NONE” and the front

speakers are set to “LARGE,” then the sound will

be output from both the left and right speakers.

4. Select each speaker with the 3

4 cursor

buttons.

5. Set the size of each speaker with the 1

cursor buttons.

6. After you complete this portion of the setup,

move the cursor to “NEXT” with the 3, 4, 1

and 2 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER

button to go to the next page.

THX SPKR

If you are using a full THX speaker systems which are

approved by THX Ltd:

• The front, center and surround speaker size

should be “SMALL”.

• The subwoofer should be “YES”.

• LPF/HPF (the crossover frequency) should be

“80Hz”.

You need to set the number of surround back

speakers

and the surround back speaker size should

be “SMALL”.

SUB W

YES:

Select when a subwoofer is connected.

NO:

Select when a subwoofer is not connected.

FRONT

LARGE:

Select if the front speakers are large.

SMALL:

Select if the front speakers are small.

• If “NO” is selected for the subwoofer setting, then

this setting is ﬁ xed at “LARGE”.

CENTER

NONE:

Select if no center speaker is connected.

LARGE:

Select if the center speaker is large.

SMALL:

Select if the center speaker is small.

SURR.

NONE:

Select if no surround left and right speakers are

connected.

LARGE:

Select if the surround left and right speakers are

large.

SMALL:

Select if the surround left and right speakers are

small.

SURR. B

NONE:

Select if no surround back left and right speakers

are connected.

2CH:

Select if the surround back left and right speakers

are connected.

1CH:

Select if one surround back speaker is connected.

In this case, the audio signal is emitted from the

SURR BACK LEFT output terminal.

Notes:

• If “NONE” is selected for the SURR. setting, then

this setting is ﬁ xed to “NONE.”

SURR. BACK SIZE

LARGE:

Select if the surround back speakers are large.

SMALL:

Select if the surround back speakers are small.

Note:

• If “NONE” is selected for the SURR. setting, then

this setting is not available.

LPF/HPF

When you use a subwoofer, you can select the cutoff

frequency for the small speakers used. Select one of

the crossover frequency levels according to the size

of the small speakers connected.

60Hz → 80Hz → 100Hz → 120Hz → 140Hz →

160Hz → 180Hz

Note:

• If using small front speakers, set a slightly higher

frequency. If using large front speakers, set a slightly

lower frequency.

BASS MIX

• The bass mix setting is only valid when “LARGE”

is set for the front speakers and “YES” is set for the

subwoofer during stereo playback.

This setting has effect only during playback of

PCM or analog stereo sources.

• When “BOTH” is selected, the low frequencies will

be played through the main L&R speakers and the

subwoofer.

In this playback mode, the low frequency range

expands more uniformly throughout the room, but

depending on the size and shape of the room,

interference may result in a decrease of the actual

volume of the low frequency range.

• By selecting “MIX”, the low frequencies will play

through the main L&R only. This selection is

preferred by THX.

Note:

• LFE signals during playback of Dolby Digital or

DTS will be played through the subwoofer.

After you complete this portion of the setup,

move the cursor to “NEXT” with the

3, 4, 1

and 2

cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER

button to go to the next page.

SPEAKER DISTANCE

UNIT : ft

FRONT L : 10.0 ft

CENTER : 10.0 ft

FRONT R : 10.0 ft

SURR.R : 10.0 ft

SURR.B R : 10.0 ft

SURR.B L : 10.0 ft

SURR.L : 10.0 ft

SUB W : 10.0 ft

RETURN BACK NEXT EXIT

Use this menu to specify the distance of each

speaker’s position from the listening position. The

delay time is automatically calculated according to

these distances.

Begin by determining the ideal or most commonly

used seating position in the room.

This is important for the timing of the acoustics to

create the proper sound space that the unit and

today’s sound systems are able to produce.

Note:

• For speakers for which you have selected “NONE”,

the speaker conﬁ guration sub-menu will not appear

here. (There are several useful books and special

DVD and LD’s available to guide you through proper

home theater conﬁ guration. If you are unsure, have

your Marantz dealer perform the installation for you.

They are trained professionals familiar with even

the most sophisticated custom installations.

Marantz

recommends the www.cedia.org website for further

information.)

8. Select either m (meters) or ft (feet) for UNIT

with the 1

2 cursor buttons.

9. Select each speaker with the 3

4 cursor

buttons.

10. Set the distance for each speaker , press the 1

2 cursor buttons.

FRONT L:

Set the distance from the front left speaker to your

normal listening position.

CENTER:

Set the distance from the center speaker to your

normal listening position.

FRONT R:

Set the distance from the front right speaker to

your normal listening position.

SURR. L:

Set the distance from the surround left speaker to

your normal listening position.

SURR. R:

Set the distance from the surround right speaker to

your normal listening position.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 49SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 49 07.8.24 1:15:24 PM07.8.24 1:15:24 PM

ENGLISH

SUB W:

Set the distance from the subwoofer to your

normal listening position.

SURR. B L:

Set the distance from the surround back left

speaker to your normal listening position.

SURR. B R:

Set the distance from the surround back right

speaker to your normal listening position.

Notes:

• Set the distance to each speaker in meters (m) or feet

(ft) as follows.

m: 0.03 - 9.15 m in 0.03 m steps

ft: 0.1 - 30.0 ft in 0.1 ft steps

(The values appearing on the FL display are

approximate.)

• For the speakers that you have selected “NONE” the

speaker size menu will not appear.

• The setting for surr.back L and surr.back R appears

if it is set, two surround back speakers in the

SPEAKER SIZE menu.

• The setting of SURR. BACK appears if it is set for

one surround back speaker in the SPEAKER SIZE

menu.

11. After you complete this portion of the setup,

move the cursor to “NEXT” with the 3, 4, 1

and 2 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER

button to go to the next page.

SPEAKER LEVEL

TEST MODE : MANUAL

FRONT L : 0.0dB

CENTER : 0.0dB

FRONT R : 0.0dB

SURR.R : 0.0dB

SURR.B R : 0.0dB

SURR.B L : 0.0dB

SURR.L : 0.0dB

SUB W : 0.0dB

RETURN BACK EXIT

Here you can set the volume for each speaker so that

they are all heard by the listener at the same level.

We recommend holding a dB SPL (Sound Pressure

Level) meter at the listening position, at arms length,

and pointing straight up at the ceiling, adjust the level

of each speaker in turn unit it reads 75dB SPL when

the meter is set to “C” weighting and Slow responce.

Note:

• The speaker level settings are not available in 7.1

Channel Input mode, Pure Direct mode and Source

Direct mode.

TEST MODE:

Select “MANUAL” or “AUTO” generation of the test

tone with the 1

2 cursor buttons.

If you select “AUTO”, the test tone will be cycled

through in a circular pattern beginning at Left →

Center → Right → Surround Right → Surround

Back Right → Surround Back Left → Surround

Left → Subwoofer → Left, in 2 seconds increments

for each channel.

Using the 1

2 cursor buttons, adjust the volume

level of the noise from the speaker so that it is the

same level for all the speakers.

If you select “MANUAL”, adjust the output level of

each speaker as listed below.

12. Move the cursor to FRONT L by pressing the

4 cursor button. This unit will emit a pink noise

from the front left speaker.

Remember the level of this noise and then

press the 4 cursor button.

(Note that this can be adjusted to any level

between -12 and +12 dB in 0.5 dB increments.)

This unit will now emit the pink noise from the

center speaker.

13. Using the 1 and 2 cursor buttons, adjust the

volume level of the noise from the center

speaker so that it is the same level as the front

left speaker.

14. Press the 4 cursor button again. This unit will

now emit the pink noise from the front right

speaker.

15. Repeat steps 13 and 14 for the front right and

other speakers until all speakers are adjusted

to the same volume level.

After you complete this portion of the setup, press the

OK/ENTER button to move the cursor to “RETURN”.

Press the OK/ENTER button to go to “2. SPKR

SETUP”.

Notes:

• Speakers for which you selected “NONE” in the

SPEAKER SIZE menu will not appear.

• Surr. Back L and Surr. Back R appear if it is set for

two surround back speakers in the SPEAKER SIZE

menu.

• Surr. Back appears if it is set for one surround back

speaker in the SPEAKER SIZE menu.

• To adjust the speaker levels for 7.1 channel input

sources, you will need to use the 7.1 Ch Input sub

menu. (See page 51)

• SUB W can be set from –18dB to +12dB.

2-3 THX AUDIO SETUP

You can set the advanced Speaker Array.

1. Select “2. SPEAKER SETUP” from the MAIN

MENU.

2. Select “THX AUDIO SETUP” with the 3

cursor buttons.

3. Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the

selection.

THX AUDIO SETUP

ADVANCED SPKR ARRAY

SURR.B SPKR

:TOGETHER

RETURN EXIT

Advanced Speaker Array (ASA)

SURR.B SPKR: TOGETHER, CLOSE or APART

The best ASA effect is when the surround back

speakers are together and facing forward.

If the distance between the surround back speakers

is,

• Less than 12 in. (30 cm): TOGETHER

• Greater than 12 in. (30 cm), and less than 48 in.

(122 cm): CLOSE

• Greater than 48 in. (122 cm): APART

Speaker type and positioning

This diagram shows the desired positioning for 7.1

channel speaker systems used in ASA mode. During

system setup, select the distance between surround

back speakers.

SBL SBR

SL SR

Surround B

Surround A

Surround-L Surround-R

Surround A

Di-polar Radiating Speaker

Direct Radiating Speaker

Front-L Center Front-R

Surround Back

Note:

• If you set SURR.B = 1CH or NONE in the

SPEAKER SIZE menu, Advanced Speaker Array

will not be activated.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move

the cursor to “RETURN” with 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor

buttons and press OK/ENTER button to go to the 2.

SPKR SETUP menu.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 50SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 50 07.8.24 1:15:25 PM07.8.24 1:15:25 PM

ENGLISH

3 SURROUND SETUP

This menu is for setting surround effect parameters

for the various surround input signals so as to bring

out the live audio effect of your speaker system.

• CHANNEL LEVEL:

“3-1 CHANNEL LEVEL”

(see page 51)

• PL

x MUSIC PARAMETER:

“3-2 PLIIx MUSIC PARAMETER”

(see page 52)

• CS

PARAMETER:

“3-3 CSII

PARAMETER”

(see page 52)

• NEO:6 PARAMETER:

“3-4 NEO:6 PARAMETER”

(see page 52)

1. Select “3. SURR SETUP” from the MAIN

MENU with the 3

4 cursor buttons and press

the OK/ENTER button.

2. Select the desired menu with the 3

4 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

3.SURR SETUP

CHANNEL LEVEL

PL x MUSIC PARAMETER

CS PARAMETER

NEO:6 PARAMETER

RE-EQ : OFF

LFE LEVEL :

M-DAX : OFF

RETURN NEXT EXIT

RE-EQ:

Turns THX Cinema Re-EQ™ on and off.

Select the Cinema Re-EQ™ with the 1 or 2 cursor

button to activate it.

LFE LEVEL:

Select the output level of the LFE signal included in

the Dolby Digital signal or the DTS signal.

Select “0dB”, “–10 dB” or “OFF” with 1 or 2 cursor

button.

M-DAX:

Select the desired M-DAX mode.

Select “HIGH”, “LOW” or “OFF” with the 1 or 2

cursor button. (See page 59)

After you complete this portion of the setup, move

the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1, 2 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

3.SURR SETUP

CHANNEL LEVEL

PL x MUSIC PARAMETER

CS PARAMETER

NEO:6 PARAMETER

RE-EQ : OFF

LFE LEVEL :

M-DAX : OFF

RETURN NEXT EXIT

CHANNEL LEVEL

SURR.MODE:

AUTO

CENTER : 0.0dB

SURR.R : 0.0dB

SURR.B R : 0.0dB

SURR.B L : 0.0dB

SURR.L : 0.0dB

SUB W : 0.0dB

RETURN EXIT

NEO:6 PARAMETER

CENTER GAIN : 0.3

RETURN NEXT EXIT

PL x MUSIC PARAMETER

PARAMETER :DEFAULT

PANORAMA :OFF

DIMENSION : 0

CENTER WIDTH: 3

RETURN NEXT EXIT

CS PARAMETER

TRUBASS : 0

SRS DIALOG : 0

RETURN NEXT EXIT

☞ P. 52

☞ P. 51

☞ P. 52

3-1 CHANNEL LEVEL

1. Select “3. SURR SETUP” from MAIN MENU

with 3

4 cursor buttons and press the OK/

ENTER button.

2. Select “CHANNEL LEVEL” with the 3

cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER

button.

3. Set the SURR. MODE with the 1

2 cursor

buttons.

CHANNEL LEVEL

SURR.MODE:

AUTO

CENTER : 0.0dB

SURR.L : 0.0dB

SURR.R : 0.0dB

SURR.BACK L : 0.0dB

SURR.BACK R : 0.0dB

SUB W : 0.0dB

RETURN EXIT

4. Select the desired menu item with the 3

cursor buttons, set the desired level with the 1

2 cursor buttons, and press the OK/ENTER

button.

SURROUND MODE:

The surround mode can be independently set for

3 modes.

1. Multi Ch STEREO

2. CSII

3. Others

CHANNEL LEVEL

CENTER LEVEL:

Set the effect level of the center speaker between

–12 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .

• If “NONE” was selected for the center speaker

setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this setting will

not appear.

SURR L or R LEVEL:

Set the effect level of the Surround speaker

between –12 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .

• If “NONE” was selected for the surround speakers

setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this setting will

not appear.

SURR. BACK L or R LEVEL:

Set the effect level of the Surround Back speaker

between –12 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .

• If “NONE” was selected for the surround back

speakers setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this

setting will not appear.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 51SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 51 07.8.24 1:15:25 PM07.8.24 1:15:25 PM

ENGLISH

SUB W LEVEL:

Set the effect level of the subwoofer speaker

between –18 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .

• If “NONE” was selected for the subwoofer speaker

setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this setting will

not appear.

Note:

• Setting to a mode other than multichannel stereo or

CSII will affect the speaker level as explained in “2-2

MANUAL SETUP”.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move the

cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button to go to the

3. SURR SETUP menu.

3-4 NEO:6 PARAMETER

The DTS NEO:6 mode enables a maximum 6.1

channel output with just 2 channel input. (It also

supports 5.1 channel input.)

This mode expands the sound image from the center

channel.

1. Select “3. SURROUND SETUP” from MAIN

MENU with the 3

4 cursor buttons and press

the OK/ENTER button.

2. Select “NEO:6 PARAMETER” with the 3

cursor buttons.

3. Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the

selection.

NEO:6 PARAMETER

CENTER GAIN : 0.3

RETURN NEXT EXIT

4. Set the CENTER GAIN level between 0.0 and

1.0 in 0.1 level

increments

with the 1

2 cursor

buttons.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move

cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

Notes:

• This parameter can only be set in the NEO:6-Music

mode.

• If “NONE” was selected for the center speaker

setting in the SPEAKER SIZE menu, this setting is

disabled.

3-2 PL

x (PRO LOGIC

x) MUSIC PARAMETER

Pro LogicIIx-Music mode creates a rich and

enveloping surround ambience from stereo sources

such as CDs.

In this mode, this unit includes three controls to ﬁ ne-

tune the sound ﬁ eld as follows.

1. Select “3. SURR SETUP” in MAIN MENU

with 3

4 cursor buttons and press the OK/

ENTER button.

2. Select “PL

x MUSIC PARAMETER” with the 3

4 cursor buttons.

3. Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the

selection.

PL x MUSIC PARAMETER

PARAMETER :DEFAULT

PANORAMA :OFF

DIMENSION : 0

CENTER WIDTH: 3

RETURN NEXT EXIT

PARAMETER:

Select “DEFAULT” or “CUSTOM” with the 1 or 2

cursor buttons.

If you select “CUSTOM”, you can adjust three

parameters as listed below.

PANORAMA:

Select the PANORAMA mode “ON” or “OFF” with

the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

Panorama wraps the sound of the front left and right

speakers around you, for an exciting perspective.

DIMENSION:

Set the DIMENSION level between –3 and +3 level

in 1 level intervals with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

Adjust the sound ﬁ eld either towards the front or

towards the rear.

This can be useful to help achieve a more

suitable balance from all the speakers with certain

recordings.

CENTER WIDTH:

Set the CENTER WIDTH level between 0 and 7 in

1 level intervals with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

Center width allows you to gradually spread the

center channel sound into the front left and right

speakers.

At its widest setting, all the sound from the center

is mixed into the left and right speakers.

This control may help achieve a more spacious

sound or a better blend for the front image.

If “NONE” was selected for the center speaker

setting in the SPEAKER SIZE menu, this setting

cannot be selected.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move

cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

3-3 CS

PARAMETER

1. Select “3. SURROUND SETUP” from MAIN

MENU with the 3

4 cursor buttons and press

the OK/ENTER button.

2. Select “CS

PARAMETER” with the 3

cursor buttons.

3. Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the

selection.

CS PARAMETER

TRUBASS : 0

SRS DIALOG : 0

RETURN NEXT EXIT

TRUBASS:

Set the TRUBASS level between 0 and 6 in 1- level

increments with the

1 or 2

cursor buttons.

TRUBASS produced by the speakers are an octave

below the actual physical capabilities of the speakers

adding exciting, deeper bass effects.

SRS DIALOG:

Set the SRS DIALOG level between

0 and 6

in 1-

increments

with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

This can be popped out of the surround audio

effects, allowing the listener to easily discern what

the actors say.

If “NONE” was selected for the center speaker

setting in the SPEAKER SIZE menu, this setting

cannot be selected.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move

cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

Note:

• This parameter can only be set in the CSII mode.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 52SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 52 07.8.24 1:15:25 PM07.8.24 1:15:25 PM

ENGLISH

4 VIDEO SETUP

Video settings are made as follows.

1. Select “4. VIDEO SETUP” from the MAIN

MENU with the 3/4 cursor buttons and press

the OK/ENTER button.

4.VIDEO SETUP

VIDEO CONVERT

TV.AUTO :DISABLE

OSD INFO :ENABLE

I/P CONVERT :ENABLE

HDMI OUT :OUTPUT1

COMPO OUT2 :MAIN

RETURN NEXT EXIT

2. Select the desired menu with the 3/4 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

• VIDEO CONVERT

“4-1 VIDEO CONVERT”

• TV-AUTO

Select the TV AUTO ON/OFF function to enable

or disable with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons. (refer to

page 66)

• OSD INFO

Select the OSD information function to “ENABLE”

or “DISABLE” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

If you select “ENABLE”, this unit will display the

status of the feature (Volume up/down, input

select, etc..) on the monitor. If you do not desire

this information, select “DISABLE”.

Note:

• OSD information is not output to Monitor Output

of HDMI and Component Video. However, OSD

information is output if the Video Convert function

is used to output Video or S-Video video signals to

Monitor Out of HDMI and Component Video.

For details, refer to“VIDEO CONVERT”on page 59.

• IP CONVERT

Select the IP CONVERT ON/OFF function to

enable or disable with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

(refer to page 59)

• HDMI OUT

This setting is for selecting which output terminal,

HDMI 1 or HDMI 2, to output the signal to. Select

the output destination with the 1 / 2 cursor

buttons.

To use the remote controller (RC8001SR) to

change the HDMI OUT setting, press the AMP

button and then the > button until the second page

is displayed. After HDMI 1 or HDMI 2 is displayed

on the remote controller, press the D3 or D4 button

to switch between them.

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

AMP

VOL

USE

PAGE

• COMPONENT OUT 2

(This feature is not available on the SR7002.)

This setting is for selecting whether to output

the images for the main room or the images for

the multi room system to the COMPONENT

MONITOR OUT 2 terminal. Select the output

destination between MAIN and MULTI with the 1 /

2 cursor buttons.

Note:

• When MULTI is selected, video signals converted

from the MONITOR OUT 2 terminal are not

output.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move

cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor

buttons and press the OK/

ENTER

button.

4-1 VIDEO CONVERT

This unit is equipped to convert video signals for

monitor output.

This section explains how to set up conversion for

each type of video input.

1. Select “4. VIDEO SETUP” from the MAIN

MENU with the 3 / 4 cursor buttons and press

the OK/ENTER button.

2. Select “VIDEO CONVERT” with the 3 / 4 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

VIDEO CONVERT

TV : ANA&HDMI

DVD : ANA&HDMI

VCR1 : ANA&HDMI

DSS : ANA&HDMI

AUX1 : ANA&HDMI

TAPE : ANA&HDMI

CD/R : ANA&HDMI

AUX2 : ANA&HDMI

RETURN BACK EXIT

3. Select “FUNCTION” with the 3 / 4 cursor

buttons and set the video conversion mode

with the 1 / 2 cursor buttons

ANA&HDMI:

This mode both up-converts and down-converts

analog video signals (Composite Video, S-Video,

Component Video). Furthermore, it up-converts

from analog video signal to HDMI. (It cannot down-

convert from HDMI digital video signals to analog

video signals.)

ANA ONLY:

This mode both up-converts and down-converts

analog video signals (Composite Video, S-Video,

Component Video). It does not up-convert to

HDMI.

OFF:

This mode turns off all conversion features.

Note:

• For details on video convert feature, see page 59.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 53SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 53 07.8.24 1:15:26 PM07.8.24 1:15:26 PM

ENGLISH

5 PREFERENCE

• MULTI ROOM SETUP :

“5-1 MULTI ROOM SETUP”

(see page 55)

• DC TRIGGER SETUP :

“5-2 DC TRIGGER SETUP”

(see page 55)

1. Select “5. PREFERENCE” from MAIN MENU

with the 3

4 cursor buttons and press the

OK/ENTER button.

5.PREFERENCE

MULTI ROOM SETUP A B

DC TRIGGER SETUP 1 2

STANDBY : NORMAL

BILINGUAL : MAIN

HDMI AUDIO: ENABLE

HDMI LIP : ENABLE

RETURN NEXT EXIT

2. Select the desired menu with the 3

4 cursor

buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

STAND BY:

When this is set to “ECONOMY”, you can reduce

the power consumption when the unit is in the

Standby mode. When “ECONOMY” is selected,

“TV AUTO” and “RS-232C” are disabled when the

unit is in the Standby mode.

BILINGUAL:

In the Bilingual mode, Dolby Digital and DTS

output is set to either “MAIN” or “SUB”. Select

“BILINGUAL” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, then

select MAIN ↔ SUB ↔ MAIN+SUB with the 1 or

2 cursor buttons.

HDMI AUDIO:

This setting determines whether to play back audio

input to the HDMI jacks through the unit or output it

through the unit to a TV or projector.

ENABLE: The audio input to the HDMI jacks

can be played back by this unit.

In such case, audio signals are not

output to the TV or projector.

THROUGH: The audio input to the HDMI jacks is

not output from the speaker terminals

of the unit. Audio data is output

directly to the TV or projector. This

setting is used to listen to audio on a

multi channel TV, etc.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move the

cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor

buttons and press the OK/

ENTER

button.

(The SR7002 is not equipped

with the MULTI ROOM SETUP

B feature)

DC TRIGGER SETUP

DC TRIG-1:DISABLE

TV : TAPE :

DVD : CD/R :

VCR1 : AUX2 :

DSS : TUNER :

AUX1 : 7.1CH :

RETURN BACK EXIT

DC TRIGGER SETUP

DC TRIG-2:DISABLE

TV : TAPE :

DVD : CD/R :

VCR1 : AUX2 :

DSS : TUNER :

AUX1 : 7.1CH :

RETURN BACK EXIT

MULTI ROOM SETUP B

AUDIO :DVD

SLEEP :OFF

MONO/ST:STEREO

MULT:OFF MSPK:

VOL :VARI VOL :

LEV :-90dB LEV :

RETURN BACK EXIT

MULTI ROOM SETUP A

VIDEO :DVD

AUDIO :DVD

SLEEP :OFF

MONO/ST:STEREO

OSD INFO:ENABLE

MULT:OFF MSPK:

VOL :VARI VOL :

LEV :-90dB LEV :

RETURN BACK EXIT

5.PREFERENCE

MULTI ROOM SETUP A B

DC TRIGGER SETUP 1 2

STANDBY : NORMAL

BILINGUAL : MAIN

HDMI AUDIO: ENABLE

HDMI LIP : ENABLE

RETURN NEXT EXIT

HDMI LIP (Auto Lipsync Correction):

Video signals may take longer to process than

audio signals depending on the connected video

equipment.

When the unit is connected to TV or Projector

supporting Auto Lipsync Correction in HDMI

1.3a, audio and video can be automatically

synchronized using this function.

Use the 1 or 2 cursor buttons to switch between

ENABLE and DISABLE.

ENABLE: Auto Lipsync Correction is used to

synchronize audio and video.

DIESABLE: Deactivates this function.

Note:

• This function is not available when the unit is

connected to equipment that does not support HDMI

1.3a or Auto Lipsync Correction. For details, check

the user’s manual of the connected equipment.

• If this function is unavailable, you can use the

regular lipsync function to synchronize audio and

video. (See page 66)

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 54SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 54 07.8.24 1:15:26 PM07.8.24 1:15:26 PM

ENGLISH

5-1 MULTI ROOM SETUP

The SR8002 has source selectors, sleep timers and

multispeaker output remote controller for the two

other rooms in the multi room system. (The SR7002

has only one other room in the multi-room system.)

These features can be set from this menu.

1. Select “5. PREFERENCE” from the MAIN

MENU with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and

press the OK/ENTER button.

2. Select “MULTI ROOM SETUP” with the 3 or 4

cursor buttons and select either “Room A” or

“Room B” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

3. Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the

setting.

The following explanation shows how to operate

MULTI ROOM A of the multi-room system.

The MULTI ROOM B setting does not have the

VIDEO FUNCTION.

(The SR7002 does not have a MULTI ROOM B

setting)

MULTI ROOM SETUP A

VIDEO :DVD

AUDIO :DVD

SLEEP :OFF

MONO/ST:STEREO

OSD INFO:ENABLE

MULT:OFF MSPK:

VOL :VARI VOL :

LEV :-90dB LEV :

RETURN BACK EXIT

4. Select the desired item with the 3

4 cursor

button.

VIDEO:

Select the video source of the multiroom output

with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

AUDIO:

Select the audio source of the multiroom output

with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

SLEEP:

The sleep mode is available when the multiroom is

active, set the time with 1 or 2 cursor buttons. The

sleep timer can be set to a maximum 90 minutes

in 10 minute increments.

MONO/ST:

This mode switches audio output to the multi room

system between MONAURAL and STEREO,

using the 1 and 2 cursor buttons.

OSD INFO:

With this function, on-screen display information is

shown on connected TVs or other devices when

you switch input functions. Select “ENABLE” with

the 1 or 2 cursor buttons to enable OSD INFO or

“DISABLE” to disable it. Select “DISABLE” if this

function is not needed.

MULTI (MULTI ROOM):

Switch the multiroom output “ON” or “OFF” with the

1 or 2 cursor buttons.

MSPK (MULTI SPEAKER):

Switch the speaker output “ON” or “OFF” with the

1 or 2 cursor buttons.

VOL (VOLUME SETUP):

Select whether the multiroom or multi speaker

output level is variable or ﬁ xed with the 1 or 2

cursor buttons.

LEVEL (VOLUME LEVEL):

Adjust the multiroom output level with the 1 or 2

cursor buttons. The volume can be set between

-90 dB and 0 dB in 1 dB increments.

Note:

• This setting can be changed when the SURR B is

set to “NONE” in the SPEAKER SIZE menu and

“SPEAKER C” is in the OFF position on the rear

panel. When this setting is unavailable, “***” is

displayed.

• If “VOLUME” is set to “FIXED”, the multiroom

output level cannot be adjusted from the A or B

room.

• MSPK cannot be on for both Room A and Room B at

the same time. After you complete this portion of the

setup, move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3 or

4 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.

5-2 DC TRIGGER SETUP

This unit has 2 DC trigger control jacks, which can

be used to link with input functions for the main room

or multiroom.

Each trigger can be setup separately.

1. Select “5. PREFERENCE” from MAIN MENU

with the 3

4 cursor buttons and press the

OK/ENTER button.

2. Select “DC TRIGGER SETUP 1or 2” with the

3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons.

3. Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the

selection.

DC TRIGGER SETUP

DC TRIG-1:DISABLE

TV : TAPE :

DVD : CD/R :

VCR1 : AUX2 :

DSS : TUNER :

AUX1 : 7.1CH :

RETURN NEXT EXIT

4. You can select “MAIN ROOM”, “MULTI

ROOM A”, “MULTI ROOM B”, “REMOTE”

“DISABLE” with the 1

2 cursor buttons.

(The SR7002 does not have a MULTI ROOM B

setting)

Note:

• REMOTE is available for the external control. The

RC8001SR cannot operate the function.

5. Select desired input source with the 3

cursor buttons.

6. Set to “ON” or “OFF” with the 1

2 cursor

buttons.

7. After you complete this portion of the setup,

move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3

4 cursor button and press the OK/ENTER

button.

Note:

• When an input source that is on in the set room is

selected, voltage is output to the DC TRIGGER

output terminal.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 55SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 55 07.8.24 1:15:27 PM07.8.24 1:15:27 PM

ENGLISH

6 ACOUSTIC EQ

This display is for setting up the equalizer and

changing the Equalizer mode.

• PRESET G. EQ ADJ :

“6-1 PRESET G. EQ ADJ”

(see page 57)

• CHECK AUTO 1 & 2 :

“6-2 CHECK AUTO”

(see page 57)

EQ MODE:

There are 4 equalizer modes to choose from:

PRESET G. EQ that allows the user to manually

adjust the equalizer, and AUDYSSEY, FRONT and

FLAT that automatically adjust the equalizer from the

measurement results of the AUTO SETUP feature

(see page 46).

AUDYSSEY:

This mode adjusts the frequency characteristics

of all speakers so as to create the best listening

environment for the sound characteristics of the

listening room.

FRONT:

This mode matches the characteristics of each

speaker to those of the front speakers.

FLAT:

This mode ﬂ attens the frequency characteristics of

all speakers. It is suited for playback of multichannel

music such as Dolby Digital and DTS.

PRESET:

This mode adjusts the graphic equalizer that

was set in PRESET G.EQ ADJ to adjust the

characteristics of each speaker (see page 57).

OFF:

The graphic equalizer is not used.

1. Select “6. ACOUSTIC EQ” from MAIN MENU

with the 3

4 cursor buttons and press the

OK/ENTER button.

6.ACOUSTIC EQ.

EQ.MODE : OFF

PRESET G.EQ ADJ

CHECK AUTO

RETURN NEXT EXIT

2. Select “EQ. MODE” with the 3

4 cursor

buttons.

3. Select “FRONT”, “FLAT”, “AUDYSSEY”,

“PRESET” or “OFF” with the 1

2 cursor

buttons.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move the

cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor

buttons and press the OK/

ENTER

button.

To use the remote controller (RC8001SR) to change

the EQ MODE, press the AMP button and then the

> button until the second page is displayed. When

EQ is displayed on the remote controller, press the

EQ (D5) button.

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAP E

TUNER

CD-R

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

AMP

VOL

USE

PAGE

Each time this button is pressed, the EQ MODE

changes as follows.

OFF AUDYSSEYFRONT FLAT PRESET

Notes:

• “FRONT”, “FLAT” and “AUDYSSEY” can be

selected after executing the AUTO SETUP feature.

• If a speaker that was determined “NON” in Auto

Setup is manually turned on, the “AUDYSSEY”,

“FRONT” and “FLAT” modes cannot be selected.

• The equalizer turns off when the Pure Direct mode,

Source Direct mode, Dolby Headphone or Virtual

mode is set.

• ACOUSTIC EQ MODEs are not used during

playback of Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, or

DTS-HD signals.

• Tone Control is disabled when an EQ MODE is in

use.

6.ACOUSTIC EQ.

EQ.MODE : OFF

PRESET G.EQ1 ADJ

CHECK AUTO

RETURN NEXT EXIT

PRESET ADJUST

RESET:ALLCH 63-15.0

CH :SR 125 -2.5

250 -5.0

500 +9.0

1k +3.5

2k -5.5

4k -7.0

8k-18.5

16k-20.0

RETURN EXIT

125 500 2k 8k

250 1k 4k 16k

0dB

CHECK AUTO

MD:AUDYSSEY 63-15.0

CH:SR 125 -2.0

250 -5.0

500 +9.0

1k +3.0

2k -5.0

4k -7.0

8k-18.0

16k-20.0

RETURN EXIT

125 500 2k 8k

250 1k 4k 16k

0dB

-20-20

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 56SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 56 07.8.24 1:15:27 PM07.8.24 1:15:27 PM

ENGLISH

6-2 CHECK AUTO

These menus are for confirming the results of

AUTO SETUP function equalizer measurement

(AUDYSSEY, FRONT, FLAT).

1. Select “6. ACOUSTIC EQ” from MAIN MENU

with the 3

4 cursor buttons and press the

OK/ENTER button.

2. Select “CHECK AUTO” with the

cursor

buttons.

3. Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the

selection.

CHECK AUTO

MD:AUDYSSEY 63 0.0

CH:FL 125 0.0

250 0.0

500 0.0

1k 0.0

2k 0.0

4k 0.0

8k 0.0

16k 0.0

RETURN EXIT

125 500 2k 8k

250 1k 4k 16k

0dB

-20

Select MD (mode) with the 3 / 4 cursor buttons

followed by the desired equalizer (“AUDYSSEY”,

“FRONT”, “FLAT”).

CH:

Select the channel to check with the 1 or 2 cursor

buttons.

Notes:

• The frequency will not be exactly the same as in the

Preset G. EQ modes.

• FL and FR are not indicated on the CHECK AUTO

2 menu.

4. Once ﬁ nished checking, select “RETURN” with

the 3 / 4 cursor buttons and press the OK/

ENTER button to return to the “6. ACOUSTIC

EQ” menu.

6-1 PRESET G. EQ ADJ

These modes allow you to set a 9-band graphic

equalizer for each of the 7 channels.

1. Select “6. ACOUSTIC EQ” from MAIN MENU

with the 3

4 cursor buttons and press the

OK/ENTER button.

Select “PRESET G. EQ ADJ” with the 3

cursor buttons.

3. Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the

selection.

125 500 2k 8k

250 1k 4k 16k

PRESET ADJUST

RESET:CH 63 0.0

CH :FL 125 0.0

250 0.0

500 0.0

1k 0.0

2k 0.0

4k 0.0

8k 0.0

16k 0.0

RETURN EXIT

0dB

-20

RESET:

Using the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, select the

channel(s) to be reset to either the currently

displayed channel (“CH”) or all channels (“ALL”),

and press the OK/ENTER button to enter the

setting.

“ALL” : Resets all channels.

“CH” : Resets only the currently displayed

channel.

CH:

Select the channel (“FL”, “C”, “FR”, “SR”, “SBR”,

“SBL” or “SL”) to adjust with the 1 or 2 cursor

buttons, and switch to the adjustment mode with

the 4 cursor button.

Frequency:

Select the target frequency on the graph with the

1 or 2 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER

button to enter the selection. Adjust the level with

the 3 or 4 cursor buttons. (Note that this can be

adjusted to any level between –20 and +9 dB in 0.5

dB increments.)

Move to the next frequency with the 1 or 2 cursor

buttons, and adjust the level.

After you complete this portion of the setup, press the

OK/ENTER button to enter the settings. Move cursor

to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons

and press the OK/ENTER button.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 57SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 2_3.indd 57 07.8.24 1:15:27 PM07.8.24 1:15:27 PM

ENGLISH

NIGHT MODE

Useful at night or when loud noise is undesirable,

this mode compresses the dynamic range, making

it easier to hear quieter audio content without

increasing the overall volume.

Note that the effect of night mode is determined

by the Dolby Digital content. Night mode may have

no effect with content that does not support this

function.

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

AMP

VOL

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAGE

1234

1. To select this mode, press the AMP button on

the remote controller, and then press the >

button until PAGE3 is displayed.

2. Each time the NIGHT (D1) button is pressed,

the mode changes according to the following

options indicated on the front of the unit.

• AUTO Mode

NIGHT AUTO

AUTO mode is available when decording Dolby

TrueHD signals.

When night mode is activated, “NIGHT” is

illuminated on the front of the unit. (See page 9)

↓

•

NIGHT Mode ON

NIGHT ON

Setting the Night mode to “ON” compresses the

dynamic range in Dolby Digital only.

↓

• NIGHT Mode OFF

NIGHT OFF

Turn off the Night mode.

ADJUSTING THE MAIN VOLUME

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

VOLUME

DOWN

M-DAX A/B

T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

AK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

PCM

AAC

2 31

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

VOL

Adjust the volume to a comfortable level using

the VOLUME control knob on the front panel or

VOLUME 3 / 4 buttons on the remote controller.

To increase the volume, turn the VOLUME knob

clockwise or press VOLUME 3 button on the remote,

to decrease the volume, turn counterclockwise or

press VOLUME 4 button on the remote controller.

Notes:

• The volume can be adjusted within the range of – ∞

to 18 dB, in steps of 1 dB.

•

However, when the channel level is set as described on

page 51, if the volume for any channel is set at +1 dB

or greater, the volume cannot be adjusted up to 18 dB.

(In this case the maximum volume adjustment range

is “18 dB - Maximum value of channel level)

SELECTING THE SURROUND MODE

Example: AUTO SURROUND

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8002

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO MULTI

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEA

DSD

POWER ON/OFF

DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED

SLEEP SURR DIRECT

AUTO

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

AMP

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

1CH

ATT

SPK

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

VOL

LEARN

NAME

USE

PAGE

1234

(Using the unit)

To select the Auto surround mode during playback,

press the AUTO button on the front panel.

(Using the remote controller)

To select the Auto surround mode, press the

AMP button and press the > button until PAGE1 is

displayed. Press the AUTO (D1) button.

• For surround modes, see “Surround Mode” on

page 60.

• To add the THX mode to the Auto Surround mode,

press either the THX button on the unit or the THX

button on the remote controller.

• To select a speciﬁ c surround mode, Press the

individual surround mode button on page 1.2 on

the remote controller.

DIALOGUE NORMALIZATION MESSAGE

Dialogue Normalization (Dial Norm) is a feature of

Dolby Digital.

When playing back software which has been encoded

in Dolby Digital, sometimes you may see a brief

message on the FL display which will read "D-NORM

X dB" (X being a numeric value).

Dialogue Normalization serves to let you know if the

source material has been recorded at a higher or

lower level than usual. For example, if you see the

following message: "D-NORM + 4 dB" on the FL

display, to keep the overall output level constant just

turn down the volume control by 4 dB. In other words,

the source material that you are listening to has been

recorded 4 dB louder than usual.

If you do not see a message on the FL display, then

no adjustment of the volume control is necessary.

BASIC OPERATION

(PLAY BACK)

SELECTING AN INPUT SOURCE

Before you can listen to any input media, you must

ﬁ rst select the input source on the unit.

Example : DVD

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

DVD

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8002

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO MULTI

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPE

DSD

POWER ON/OFF

DISP MULTI AUTO TUNE

SLEEP SURR DIRECT

AUTO

To select DVD, turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob

on the front panel or press the DVD button on the

remote controller two times in a row. After you have

selected DVD, simply turn on the DVD player and

play the DVD.

• As the input source is changed, the new input

name will appear momentarily an OSD information

on the video display. The input name will also

appear in the display, on the front-panel.

• If you use the FUNCTION RENAME feature (see

page 44) , the renamed name appears on the

display.

• As the input is changed, this unit will automatically

switch to the digital input, surround mode,

attenuation, and night mode status which were

entered during the conﬁ guration process for that

source.

• When a video source is selected, the selected

video signal is output from the MONITOR OUT

terminal.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 58SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 58 07.8.24 1:15:58 PM07.8.24 1:15:58 PM

ENGLISH

(Using the remote controller)

When switching to M-DAX mode, press the AMP

button and then the > button until the PAGE 4 is

displayed.

When “M-DAX” is displayed on the remote controller,

press the M-DAX (D5) button.

Each time this button is pressed, M-DAX changes

as follows.

OFF LOW HIG

Notes:

• M-DAX is compatible with PCM (48 kHz or lower)

and two-channel analog sources.

• The M-DAX is not available when Dolby Virtual

Speaker mode is being used.

VIDEO CONVERT

ANALOG VIDEO CONVERSION

This unit is equipped to convert video signals

for monitor output. Because of this, indifferent of

the connection (VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPONENT

VIDEO) between the playback device and this unit,

listening and viewing are possible with a single

higher grade cable between the MONITOR OUT

terminal of the unit and the monitor.

UP-CONVERSION FROM ANALOG VIDEO

SIGNALS TO HDMI

The up-conversion feature of this unit can output

the input analog video signals (for component video

signals of 480i, 480p, 1080i and 720p resolution, and

S-Video and Video (composite) of 480i resolution) to

the HDMI MONITOR terminal.

Notes:

• HDMI video input is only output to the HDMI

MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit. If connecting

a playback device such as a DVD player to the

HDMI input jack, connect the HDMI MONITOR

OUT terminal of the unit to a TV monitor.

• This mode is unavailable for the REC out terminal.

• This mode is unavailable for still picture, fast

forward and reverse play on video component.

•

If, while attempting to use the video convert

feature, the unit cannot synchronize with the

display device, “NO SIGNAL” appears on the

monitor or noise is generated, this feature cannot

be used. All of these signs are caused by equipment

incompatibility; there is nothing wrong with the unit.

If this occurs, set “VIDEO CONVERT” in the

“VIDEO SETUP” menu to “DISABLE”. Next,

connect the video input signal to the display component

via the MONITOR OUT terminal under VIDEO and

the S-video input signal to the display component via

the MONITOR OUT terminal under S-VIDEO.

• The video convert feature constantly monitors

input video signals and determines whether to

convert the input signals or not. However, some

input video signals cannot be detected correctly.

If this occurs, set “VIDEO CONVERT” in the

“VIDEO SETUP” menu to “DISABLE”.

•

For optimal video performance, THX recommends

setting the “VIDEO CONVERT” mode “DISABLE”.

CONNECTION EXAMPLE

• When a monitor is connected to the HDMI

MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

VOLUME

DOWN

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8002

M-DAX

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO MULTI

A/B

T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

POWER ON/OFF

VIDEO

or S-VIDEO

or component HDMI

or HDMI

Notes:

• If the resolution of the component video signal

input from the playback device is other than 480i,

480p, 1080i or 720p, images are not output from the

HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit.

• If the resolution of the S-Video or Video signal input

from the playback device is other than 480i, images

are not output from the HDMI MONITOR OUT

terminal of the unit.

• When a monitor is connected to the VIDEO or S-

VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals of the unit

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

VOLUME

DOWN

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8002

M-DAX

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO MULTI

A/B

T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

POWER ON/OFF

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP SURR DIRECT

AUTO DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

VIDEO

or S-VIDEO

VIDEO

or S-VIDEO

or component

HDMI

ADJUSTING THE TONE (BASS & TREBLE)

CONTROL

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

AMP

VOL

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAGE

1234

During a listening session you may wish to adjust the

Bass and Treble Control to suit your listening tastes

or room acoustics.

(Using the remote controller)

adjust the tone

, press the AMP button and press

the > button PAGE3 is displayed.

To adjust the bass effect, press BASS+ (D2) or

BASS– (D3).

To adjust the treble effect, TREB+ (D4) or TREB–

(D5).

Notes:

• The tone control function is unavailable for the

Source Direct, Pure Direct, Headphone, Dolby

Virtual Speaker, THX mode, and 176.4/192kHz

PCM.

• The tone control function is not available when

ACOUSTIC EQ is being used.

• Additionally, tone control is not available during

Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, or DTS-HD

playback.

TEMPORARILY TURNING OFF THE SOUND

2 31

5 64

8 97

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

MUTE

To temporarily silence all speaker outputs such as

when interrupted by a phone call, press the MUTE

button on the remote controller.

This will interrupt the output to all speakers and the

head-phone jack, but it will not affect any recording or

dubbing that may be in progress.

When the system is muted, the display will show

“MUTE” .

Press the MUTE button again to return to normal

operation.

USING THE SLEEP TIMER

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

To program this unit for automatic standby, press the

SLEEP button on the remote controller.

Each press of the button will increase the time before

shut down in the following sequence.

OFF 10 20 30 5040

100 90 80 70 60110120

The sleep time will be shown for a few seconds in the

display on the front panel, and it will count down until

the time has elapsed.

When the programmed sleep time has elapsed, the

unit will automatically turn off.

Note that the SLEEP indicator on the display will

illuminate when the Sleep function is programmed.

To cancel the Sleep function, press the SLEEP

button until the display shows “SLEEP OFF” and the

SLEEP indicator will disappear.

M-DAX (Marantz Dynamic Audio eXpander)

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

AMP

VOL

USE

PAGE

This function makes up for lost audio content in MP3

or AAC sources (from lossy compression) during

playback. Choose one of the following levels for this

effect as desired.

“HIGH”: Stronger effect

“LOW”: Weaker effect

“OFF”: Deactivated.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 59SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 59 07.8.24 1:15:59 PM07.8.24 1:15:59 PM

ENGLISH

Notes:

• The HDMI video signal input from the playback

device is not output from the VIDEO or S-VIDEO

MONITOR OUT terminals of the unit.

• If the resolution of the component video signal input

from the playback device is other than 480i, it is not

output from the VIDEO or S-VIDEO MONITOR

OUT terminals of the unit.

• When a monitor is connected to the COMPONENT

VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

VOLUME

DOWN

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8002

M-DAX

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO MULTI

A/B

T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

POWER ON/OFF

VIDEO

or S-VIDEO component

or component

HDMI

Notes:

• The HDMI video signal input from the playback

device is not output from the COMPONENT

VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit.

Notes of OSD menu system:

• The setup menu can be displayed through all

video out terminals (“HDMI”, “COMPONENT”,

“SVIDEO” and “VIDEO”).

• OSD information is output only to the VIDEO and

S-VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals.

OSD information is also output when the video

conversion feature is on and the video signal input

to the VIDEO or S-VIDEO input jack of the unit

is converted and output from the COMPONENT

VIDEO or HDMI MONITOR OUT terminals.

I/P CONVERT

The video circuit of the unit is equipped with an I/P

conversion feature.

When this feature is on, 480i analog video signals

(VIDEO, S-VIDEO or COMPONENT VIDEO) input

from a playback device can be converted to 480p and

progressively output to the COMPONENT VIDEO or

HDMI MONITOR OUT terminals of the unit.

(For setting instructions, see page 53)

SURROUND MODE

This unit is equipped with many surround modes. These are provided to reproduce a variety of surround sound

effects, according to the content of the source to be played.

The available surround modes may be restricted depending on the input signal and speaker setup.

The relationship between the selected surround mode and the input signal

The surround mode is selected with the surround mode selector on the unit or the remote controller. However,

the sound you hear is subject to the relationship between the selected surround mode and the input signal. That

relationship is as follows:

Surround Mode Input Signal Decoding

Output Channel Front information display

L/R C SL

SBL

SBR

SubW

Signal format indicators Channel status

AUTO Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital EX

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1

OOO

2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Dolby D (2ch) Dolby Digital 2.0

---

2 DIGITAL L, R

Dolby D (2ch Surr) Pro Logic II x movie

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

Dolby Digital Plus (5.1ch)

DolbyDigital +

OOO

2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Dolby Digital Plus (6.1ch)

DolbyDigital +

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Dolby Digital Plus (7.1)

DolbyDigital +

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Dolby TrueHD (5.1ch)

DolbyTrueHD

OOO

2 DIGITAL

Depend on speaker setup

Dolby TrueHD (6.1ch)

DolbyTrueHD

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL

Depend on speaker setup

Dolby TrueHD (7.1ch)

DolbyTrueHD

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL

Depend on speaker setup

DTS-ES DTS-ES

OOOOO

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DTS 96/24 DTS-96/24

OOO

dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DTS (5.1ch) DTS 5.1

OOO

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DTS-HD (5.1) DTS-HD

OOO

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DTS-HD (6.1) DTS-HD

OOOOO

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DTS-HD (7.1) DTS-HD

OOOOO

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM

OOO

PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz

OOO

PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM

OOO

DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (2ch) PCM (Stereo)

---

DSD L, R

PCM (Audio) PCM (Stereo)

---

PCM L, R

PCM 96kHz PCM (Stereo 96kHz)

---

PCM L, R

HDCD HDCD

---

PCM, HDCD L, R

Analog Stereo

---

ANALOG -

7.1ch input Multi Ch

OOOOO

ANALOG -

SOURCE DIRECT

PURE DIRECT

Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital EX

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1

OOO

2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Dolby D (2ch) Dolby Digital 2.0

---

2 DIGITAL L, R

Dolby D (2ch Surr) Pro Logic II x movie

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

Dolby Digital Plus (5.1)

DolbyDigital +

OOO

2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Dolby Digital Plus (6.1)

DolbyDigital +

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Dolby Digital Plus (7.1)

DolbyDigital +

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Dolby TrueHD (5.1) DolbyTrueHD

OOO

2 DIGITAL

Depend on speaker setup

Dolby TrueHD (6.1) DolbyTrueHD

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL

Depend on speaker setup

Dolby TrueHD (7.1) DolbyTrueHD

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL

Depend on speaker setup

DTS-ES DTS-ES

OOOOO

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DTS 96/24 DTS-96/24

OOO

dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DTS (5.1ch) DTS 5.1

OOO

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DTS-HD (5.1) DTS-HD

OOO

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DTS-HD (6.1) DTS-HD

OOOOO

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DTS-HD (7.1) DTS-HD

OOOOO

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM

OOO

PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz

OOO

PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (5.1ch) SA-CD (5.1ch)

OOO

DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (2ch) SA-CD (2ch)

---

DSD L, R

PCM (Audio) PCM (Stereo)

----PCM L, R

PCM 96kHz PCM (Stereo 96kHz)

----PCM L, R

HDCD HDCD

- - - - PCM, HDCD L, R

Analog Stereo

- - - - ANALOG -

7.1ch input Multi Ch

OOOOO

ANALOG -

EX/ES Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital EX

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital EX

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Dolby Digital Plus (5.1)

DolbyDigital +

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Dolby TrueHD (5.1) DolbyTrueHD

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL

Depend on speaker setup

DTS-ES DTS-ES

OOOOO

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DTS (5.1ch) DTS-ES

OOOOO

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Multi-PCM Multi Ch-PCM + Dolby

Digital EX

OOOOO

PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM + Dolby

Digital EX

OOOOO

DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 60SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 60 07.8.24 1:16:00 PM07.8.24 1:16:00 PM

ENGLISH

Notes:

• Dolby Digital (2 channel L/R): Speakers for signal

with Dolby Surround are fully equipped.

• No sound is outputs from the surround speaker,

center speaker and subwoofer if the DVD disc has

no surround data.

• Surround modes other than Stereo are not available

during Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, or DTS-

HD playback.

If surround modes other than Stereo are selected

and Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, or DTS-

HD content is played, the surround mode setting is

disabled.

Surround Mode Input Signal Decoding

Output Channel Front information display

L/R C SL

SBL

SBR

SubW

Signal format indicators Channel status

DOLBY

(PLIIx movie)

(PLIIx music)

(PLIIx game)

Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital EX

OOO

2 DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1

OOO

2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1 + PLII x

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Dolby D (2ch) Pro Logic IIx

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL L, R

Dolby D (2ch Surr) Pro Logic II x

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

Dolby Digital Plus (5.1)

DolbyDigital +

OOO

2 DIGITAL L,C,R,SL,SR,LFE

Dolby Digital Plus (6.1)

DolbyDigital +

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL L,C,R,SL,SR,S,LFE

Dolby Digital Plus (7.1)

DolbyDigital +

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL L,C,R,SL,SR,S,LFE

Dolby TrueHD (5.1) DolbyTrueHD

OOO

2 DIGITAL

Depend on speaker setup

Dolby TrueHD (6.1) DolbyTrueHD

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL

Depend on speaker setup

Dolby TrueHD (7.1) DolbyTrueHD

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL

Depend on speaker setup

Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM + PLIIx

OOOOO

PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM + PLII x

OOOOO

DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (2ch) Pro Logic IIx

OOOOO

DSD L, R

PCM (Audio) Pro Logic IIx

OOOOO

PCM L, R

HDCD Pro Logic IIx

OOOOO

PCM, HDCD L, R

Analog Pro Logic IIx

OOOOO

ANALOG -

DTS

(Neo:6 Cinema)

(Neo:6 Music)

DTS-ES DTS 5.1

OOO

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DTS 96/24 DTS-96/24

OOO

dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DTS (5.1ch) DTS 5.1

OOO

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DTS-HD(5.1) DTS-HD

OOO

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DTS-HD(6.1) DTS-HD

OOOOO

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DTS-HD(7.1) DTS-HD

OOOOO

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Dolby D (2ch) Neo:6

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL L, R

Dolby D (2ch Surr) Neo:6

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

SA-CD (2ch) Neo:6

OOOOO

DSD L, R

PCM (Audio) Neo:6

OOOOO

PCM L, R

HDCD Neo:6

OOOOO

PCM, HDCD L, R

Analog Neo:6

OOOOO

ANALOG -

CSII Cinema

CSII Music

CSII Mono

Dolby D (2ch) CSII

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL L, R

Dolby D (2ch Surr) CSII

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

SA-CD (2ch) CSII

OOOOO

DSD L, R

PCM (Audio) CSII

OOOOO

PCM L, R

HDCD CSII

OOOOO

PCM, HDCD L, R

Analog CSII

OOOOO

ANALOG -

STEREO Dolby Surr.EX Stereo

---

2 DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Dolby D (5.1ch) Stereo

---

2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Dolby D (2ch) Stereo

---

2 DIGITAL L, R

Dolby D (2ch Surr) Stereo

---

2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

Dolby Digital Plus (5.1)

Stereo

---

2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Dolby Digital Plus (6.1)

Stereo

---

2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Dolby Digital Plus (7.1)

Stereo

---

2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Dolby TrueHD (5.1) Stereo

---

2 DIGITAL

Depend on speaker setup

Dolby TrueHD (6.1) Stereo

---

2 DIGITAL

Depend on speaker setup

Dolby TrueHD (7.1) Stereo

---

2 DIGITAL

Depend on speaker setup

DTS-ES Stereo

---

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DTS 96/24 Stereo

---

dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DTS (5.1ch) Stereo

---

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DTS-HD (5.1) Stereo

---

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DTS-HD (6.1) Stereo

---

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DTS-HD (7.1) Stereo

---

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Multi Ch-PCM Stereo

---

PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz

Stereo

---

PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (5.1ch) Stereo

---

DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (2ch) Stereo

---

DSD L, R

PCM (Audio) Stereo

---

PCM L, R

PCM 96kHz Stereo

---

PCM L, R

HDCD Stereo

---

PCM, HDCD L, R

Analog Stereo

---

ANALOG -

Dolby Virtual

Speaker

Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Virtual Speaker

----2 DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Virtual Speaker

----2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Dolby D (2ch) Dolby Virtual Speaker

----2 DIGITAL L, R

Dolby D (2ch Surr) Dolby Virtual Speaker

----2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

DTS-ES Dolby Virtual Speaker

- - - - dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DTS 96/24 Dolby Virtual Speaker

- - - - dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DTS (5.1ch) Dolby Virtual Speaker

- - - - dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Multi Ch-PCM Dolby Virtual Speaker

- - - - PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (5.1ch) Dolby Virtual Speaker

- - - - DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (2ch) Dolby Virtual Speaker

- - - - DSD L, R

PCM (Audio) Dolby Virtual Speaker

----PCM L, R

HDCD Dolby Virtual Speaker

- - - - PCM, HDCD L, R

Analog Dolby Virtual Speaker

- - - - ANALOG -

Multi Ch.

Movie

Music

(O): Movie mode only.

Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital EX

O (O) O O O

2 DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1

O (O) O

2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Dolby D (2ch) Multi Channel

O (O) O O O

2 DIGITAL L, R

Dolby D (2ch Surr) Multi Channel

O (O) O O O

2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

Abbreviations

L/R : Front speakers

C : Center speaker

SL/SR : Surround speakers

SBL/SBR : Surround back speakers

SubW : Subwoofer

Surround Mode Input Signal Decoding

Output Channel Front information display

L/R C SL

SBL

SBR

SubW

Signal format indicators Channel status

Multi Ch.

Movie

Music

(O): Movie mode only.

DTS-ES DTS-ES

O (O) O O O

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DTS 96/24 DTS-96/24

O (O) O

dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DTS (5.1ch) DTS 5.1

O (O) O

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM

O (O) O

PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz

O (O) O

PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM

O (O) O

DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (2ch) Multi Channel

O (O) O O O

DSD L, R

PCM (Audio) Multi Channel

O (O) O O O

PCM L, R

HDCD Multi Channel

O (O) O O O

PCM, HDCD L, R

Analog Multi Channel

O (O) O O O

ANALOG -

Dolby H.P Dolby Surr.EX Dolby H.P

----2 DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby H.P

----2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Dolby D (2ch) Dolby H.P

----2 DIGITAL L, R

Dolby D (2ch Surr) Dolby H.P

----2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

Dolby Digital Plus (5.1)

Stereo

---

2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Dolby Digital Plus (6.1)

Stereo

---

2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Dolby Digital Plus (7.1)

Stereo

---

2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Dolby TrueHD (5.1) Stereo

---

2 DIGITAL

Depend on speaker setup

Dolby TrueHD (6.1) Stereo

---

2 DIGITAL

Depend on speaker setup

Dolby TrueHD (7.1) Stereo

---

2 DIGITAL

Depend on speaker setup

DTS-ES Dolby H.P

- - - - dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DTS 96/24 Dolby H.P

- - - - dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DTS (5.1ch) Dolby H.P

- - - - dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DTS-HD (5.1) Stereo

---

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DTS-HD (6.1) Stereo

---

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DTS-HD (7.1) Stereo

---

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Multi Ch-PCM Dolby H.P

- - - - PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (5.1ch) Dolby H.P

- - - - DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (2ch) Dolby H.P

- - - - DSD L, R

PCM (Audio) Dolby H.P

----PCM L, R

HDCD Dolby H.P

- - - - PCM, HDCD L, R

Analog Dolby H.P

- - - - ANALOG -

THX

(AUTO)

Dolby Surr.EX

Dolby Digital + THX Surround EX

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Dolby D (5.1ch)

Dolby Digital 5.1+ THX 5.1

OOO

2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Dolby D (2ch)

Pro Logic IIx movie + THX

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL L, R

Dolby D (2ch Surr)

Pro Logic IIx movie + THX

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

DTS-ES DTS-ES + THX

OOOOO

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DTS (5.1ch) DTS + THX 5.1

OOO

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM + THX5.1

OOO

PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM + THX5.1

OOO

DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (2ch)

Pro Logic IIx movie + THX

OOOOO

DSD L, R

PCM (Audio)

Pro Logic IIx movie + THX

OOOOO

PCM L, R

HDCD

Pro Logic IIx movie + THX

OOOOO

PCM, HDCD L, R

Analog

Pro Logic IIx movie + THX

OOOOO

ANALOG -

THX Select2

(THX EX)

(THX Cinema)

(THX Music)

(THX Games)

Dolby Surr.EX

Dolby Digital + THX Surround EX

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1+ THX

Select2 Cinema

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Dolby D (2ch)

Pro Logic IIx movie + THX

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL L, R

Dolby D (2ch Surr)

Pro Logic IIx movie + THX

OOOOO

2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

DTS-ES DTS-ES + THX

OOOOO

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DTS (5.1ch)

DTS + THX Select2 Cinema

OOOOO

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM + THX

Select2 Cinema

OOOOO

PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM + THX

Select2 Cinema

OOOOO

DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

SA-CD (2ch)

Pro Logic IIx movie + THX

OOOOO

DSD L, R

PCM (Audio)

Pro Logic IIx movie + THX

OOOOO

PCM L, R

HDCD

Pro Logic IIx movie + THX

OOOOO

PCM, HDCD L, R

Analog

Pro Logic IIx movie + THX

OOOOO

ANALOG -

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 61SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 61 07.8.24 1:16:01 PM07.8.24 1:16:01 PM

ENGLISH

2 MODE

(Dolby Digital, Pro Logic

x MOVIE, Pro Logic

MUSIC, Pro Logic

x GAME)

This mode is used with source materials encoded in

Dolby Digital and Dolby Surround.

DOLBY DIGITAL

This mode is enabled when playing source materials

encoded in Dolby Digital.

Playing multichannel-encoded 5.1 channel Dolby

Digital sources provides 5 main audio channels (left,

center, right, surround left and surround right) and a

Low Frequency Effect channel.

Dolby Digital EX decoding is not available in this

mode.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx has 5 modes:

Pro Logic

x MOVIE

This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround

sound from Dolby Surround, encoded stereo movie

soundtracks.

Pro Logic

x MUSIC

This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround

sound from conventional stereo sources (analog or

digital), such as CD, tape, FM, TV, stereo VCR, etc.

Pro Logic

x GAME

This mode

restores the impact low-frequency

surround effects by routing them to the system’s

subwoofer.

5.1ch + Pro Logic

x Movie

This mode provides 7.1 channel surround sound from

5.1 channel sources

movie soundtracks

5.1ch + Pro Logic

x Music

This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround sound

from 5.1 channel sources music soundtracks.

Notes:

• Pro Logic IIx mode will decode as Pro Logic II

mode when the SURR. B is set to “NONE” from

SPEAKER SETUP menu. (See page 49)

• Pro Logic IIx mode is available for a 2 channel input

signal which is encoded in Dolby Digital, HDCD or

PCM format.

dts

dts, Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music

This mode is for DTS-encoded source materials

such as laserdisc, CD and DVD. Neo:6 is for some 2

channel sources.

dts

This mode is enabled when playing source materials

encoded in dts multichannel.

Playing multichannel encoded-5.1 channel dts

sources provides five main audio channels (left,

center, right, surround left and surround right) and a

Low Frequency Effects channel.

dts-ES decoding is not available in this mode.

The DTS mode cannot be used when an analog

input has been selected.

Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music

This mode decodes 2 channel signals into 6 channel

signals using high-accuracy digital matrix technology.

The DTS Neo:6 decoder has near-discrete properties

in the frequency characteristics of the channels as

well as in channel separation.

According to the signals to be played back, DTS Neo:6

uses either the Neo:6 Cinema mode optimized for

movie playback or the Neo:6 Music mode optimized

for music playback.

Note:

•

The Neo:6 mode is available for 2 channel input

signals which are encoded in Dolby Digital, HDCD

or PCM format.

CIRCLE SURROUND

(CS

-CINEMA, CS

-MUSIC, CS

-MONO)

Circle Surround is designed to enable multichannel

surround sound playback of non-encoded and

multichannel encoded material.

Backward compatibility provides listeners with up to

6.1 channels of surround performance from an entire

collection of music and ﬁ lm, including broadcast,

videotape and stereo recorded music.

Depending on source material, you can select CSII-

Cinema mode, CSII-Music mode or CSII-Mono

mode.

Note:

• The CS II mode is available for 2 channel input

signals which are encoded in Dolby Digital, HDCD

or PCM format.

AUTO

When this mode is selected, the unit determines

whether the digital input signal is Dolby Digital,

Dolby Digital Surround EX, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby

TrueHD, DTS-HD, DTS, DTS-ES, DTS 96/24 or PCM

audio.

Surround EX & DTS-ES will operate for multichannel

sources that have a Dolby Digital Surround EX or

DTS-ES auto trigger ﬂ ag in the digital signal.

When a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input, the

number of channels for which the corresponding

signal is encoded will be played.

Inputting a Dolby Digital two channel signal with

Dolby surround status automatically subjects that

signal to Pro Logic IIx movie processing before play.

PCM 96 kHz source material can be played in this

mode.

Notes:

• When you use this mode with certain DVD and CD

players, performing operations such as skip or stop

may momentarily interrupt the output.

• When the signal is not decoded, the mode is changed

to AUTO mode automatically. See page 60 to

conﬁ rm the available decoding modes.

SOURCE DIRECT

In the Source Direct mode, the tone control circuit

Acoustic EQ. and bass management conﬁ guration

are bypassed for full-range frequency response and

the purist audio reproduction.

Notes:

• Speaker size is set to Front L/R = LARGE, Center =

LARGE, Surround L/R = LARGE and Subwoofer

= YES automatically. Tone controls, equalizer and

additional processing are deactivated.

• When you use this mode with certain DVD and CD

players, performing operations such as skip or stop

may momentarily interrupt the output.

• In SOURCE DIRECT mode, ACOUSTIC EQ and

M-DAX are not available.

PURE DIRECT

The Pure Direct mode further reduces sources of

noise in addition to effect of the Source Direct mode,

by blocking output from the video jacks (VIDEO,

S-VIDEO, COMPONENT VIDEO and HDMI) and

turning the FL display off.

Note:

• In PURE DIRECT mode, ACOUSTIC EQ and M-

DAX are not available.

EX/ES

This mode provides 6.1 channel surround for Dolby

Digital EX, and DTS-ES-encoded source material

such as DVD.

This mode cannot be used when an analog input has

been selected.

Dolby Digital EX

In a movie theater, ﬁ lm soundtracks that have been

encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology

are able to reproduce an extra channel which has

been added during the mixing of the program.

This channel, called surround back, places sounds

behind the listener in addition to the currently

available front left, front center, front right, surround

right, surround left and subwoofer channels.

This additional channel provides the opportunity

for more detailed imaging behind the listener and

brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound

localization than ever before.

Dolby Digital EX is not available in systems that do

not have without surround back speaker(s).

DTS-ES (Discrete 6.1, Matrix 6.1)

DTS-ES adds the surround center channel audio to

the DTS 5.1 channel format to improve the acoustic

positioning, and makes acoustic image movement

more natural with the 6.1 channel reproduction.

This unit incorporates a DTS-ES-decoder, which

can handle DTS-ES Discrete-encoded and DTS-ES

Matrix-encoded program sources from DVD, etc.

DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 features digital discrete

recording of all channels, including the surround back

channel(s), and higher quality audio reproduction.

DTS-ES is not available in systems that do not have

surround back speakers.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 62SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 62 07.8.24 1:16:04 PM07.8.24 1:16:04 PM

ENGLISH

STEREO

This mode bypasses all surround processing.

In stereo program sources, the left and right channels

play normally when PCM audio or analog stereo is

input.

With Dolby Digital and DTS sources, the 5.1 channels

are converted to two channel stereo. 96 kHz PCM

source material can be played back in stereo mode.

Dolby Virtual Speaker

Dolby Virtual Speaker technology uses proprietary

technology of Dolby Laboratories to create a virtual

surround sound ﬁ eld using only two speakers for the

front channels, allowing the user to experience sound

as if surround speakers were actually being used.

MULTI CH. (MOVIE, MUSIC)

This mode is used to create a wider, deeper and more

natural soundstage from two channel source material.

This is done by feeding the left channel signal to

both the left front and left surround speakers and the

right channel signal to both the right front and right

surround speakers. Additionally, the center channel

reproduces a mix of the right and left channels.

Note:

• Audio is not output from the CENTER channel

when using MULTI CH. MUSIC mode.

THX CINEMA

THX Cinema mode applies additional processing

to Dolby Digital, DTS and Dolby Pro Logic multi-

channel, surround sources. The THX processing

was developed by THX Ltd. to recreate the sound of

top-quality theater.

Use the THX Cinema mode for all movies on disc,

tape or broadcast. In this mode, the THX Surround

EX mode is not available.

THX SURROUND EX

In a movie theater, ﬁ lm soundtracks that have been

encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology

are able to reproduce an extra channel which has

been added during the mixing of the program.

This channel, called Surround Back, places sounds

behind the listener in addition to the currently

available front left, front center, front right, surround

right, surround left and subwoofer channels.

This additional channel provides the opportunity

for more detailed imaging behind the listener and

brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound

localization than ever before.

THX Surround EX will operate for any 5.1 channel

source whenever THX is active.

THX Surround EX is not available in system without

surround back speaker(s).

Note:

• When playing Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded

software in 6.1 channels, it is required to select the

THX Surround EX mode.

THX SELECT2 CINEMA

THX SELECT2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using

all 7.1 speakers giving you the best possible movie

watching experience. In this mode, ASA processing

blends the surround L/R speakers and surround back

speakers, providing the optimal mix of ambient and

directional surround sound.

This mode permits the playback of a non Surround

EX/ES-encoded 5.1 movie over a 7.1 system.

DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1 Discrete) and Dolby

Digital Surround EX-encoded soundtracks will be

automatically detected, if the appropriate ﬂ ag has

been encoded.

Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks

are missing the digital ﬂ ag that allows automatic

switching.

If you know that the movie that you are watching is

encoded in Surround EX, you can manually select the

THX Surround EX playback mode, otherwise the THX

SELECT2 Cinema mode will apply ASA processing to

provide optimum replay.

THX MUSIC

For the replay of multichannel music, the THX Music

mode should be selected. In this mode, THX ASA

processing is applied to the surround channels of all

5.1-encoded music sources, such as DTS and Dolby

Digital, to provide a wide, stable, rear soundstage.

This mode is to be used with multichannel music

sources such as DTS 5.1 music and Dolby Digital

5.1 music.

Notes:

• These modes are only available when you have

setup SPEAKER SIZE menu system (i.e. 2 surround

back speakers).

• These modes are only available when the input

signal has surround left and surround right contents.

THX GAMES

For the replay of stereo and multichannel game

audio the THX Games mode should be selected.

In this mode, THX ASA processing is applied to

the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0-encoded

game sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and

Dolby Digital. This accurately places all game audio

surround information, providing a full 360-degree

playback environment. THX Games mode is unique

as it gives you a smooth transition of audio in all

points of the surround ﬁ eld.

Neural Surround

Neural SurroundTM represents the latest advancement

in surround technology developed for music.

Neural SurroundTM employs psychoacoustic

frequency domain processing which allows delivery

of a more detailed sound stage with superior channel

separation and localization of audio elements.

System playback is scalable from 5.1 to 7.1 multi-

channel surround playback.

This is the optimum mode for playing sources

recorded in XM HD Surround. (See page 77)

CAUTION

Note for DTS

•

To connected DVD player, laserdisc player or CD

player needs to support DTS digital output. You

may not be able to play some DTS source signals

from certain CD players and LD players even if

you connect the player to the unit digitally. This is

because the digital signal has been processed

(such as the output level, sampling frequency or

frequency response), and the unit cannot recognize

the signal as DTS data.

• Depending on the player used, DTS play may

produce a short noise. This is not a malfunction.

• While signals from a DTS laserdisc or CD are

playing in another surround mode, you cannot

switch to digital input or from digital input to analog

input from the INPUT SETUP in the MAIN MENU

or by pressing the A/D button.

• You can not listen to DTS-encoded software in a

multiroom.

•

The outputs for VCR 1 OUT, DSS/VCR 2 OUT,

TAPE OUT and CD-R OUT output analog audio

signals only. Do not record from CDs or LDs that

support DTS using these outputs. If you do, the

DTS-encoded signal will be recorded as noise.

Note or Dolby Digital Surround EX

•

When playing Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded

software in 6.1 channels, it is required to set the

EX/ES mode.

• Note that some Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded

software does not contain the identiﬁ cation signal.

In this case, set the EX/ES mode manually.

Note for 96 kHz/192 kHz PCM audio

•

The AUTO, Pure Direct, and Stereo modes can be

used when playing PCM signals with a sampling

frequency of 96/192 kHz (such as from DVD-Video/

Audio discs).

•

Certain DVD player models inhibit digital output. For

details, refer to the player’s operation manual.

•

Some DVD discs feature copy protection. When using

such disc, 96 kHz PCM signal are not output from the

DVD player. For details, refer to the player’s operation

manual.

Note for HDCD

•

HDCD is effective only through digital input.

•

You may not be able to play some HDCD source

signals from certain CD players if you connect the

player to the unit digitally. This is because the digital

signal has been processed (such as the output level,

sampling frequency or frequency response) and the

unit cannot recognize the signal as HDCD data.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 63SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 63 07.8.24 1:16:04 PM07.8.24 1:16:04 PM

ENGLISH

OTHER FUNCTION

DISPLAY MODE

PHONES

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8002

M-DAX

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO MULTI T-MODE MEMORY

DISPLAY

EXIT

BAND

MIC

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP SURR DIRECT

AUTO DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

DISP

You can select the display mode for the front display

of the unit.

To select this mode, press the DISPLAY on the

remote controller or the front panel.

When this button is pressed, the display mode is

switched in the following sequence.

Input Mode → Surround Mode → Auto display OFF

→ Display OFF → Normal Mode → Input Mode

Normal Mode:

Displays the selected input function. If the function

has been renamed using the Function Rename

feature (see page 44), the renamed name appears

on the display.

Input Mode:

Displays the input mode set via the Function Input

Setup feature (see page 43).

Surround Mode:

Displays the status of the selected surround

mode.

Auto Display Off mode:

The display is off. But, if you make a change to

the unit such as the input or surround mode, the

display will show that change, then go back to off

after about 3 seconds. When changing the volume,

it is not displayed.

Display Off mode:

The display is off completely.

Note:

• Only the DISP indicator will be illuminated on the

front display in display off condition.

RECORDING AN ANALOG SOURCE

In normal operation, the audio or video source

selected for listening through this unit is sent to the

record outputs.

This means that any program you are watching

or listening to may be recorded simply by placing

machines connected to the outputs for TAPE OUT,

CD/CDR OUT, VCR1 OUT, and DSS/VCR2 OUT in

the record mode.

To record the input source signal you are currently

watching or listening to

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8002

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO MULTI

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAK

MULTI

DSD

POWER ON/OFF

DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED

SLEEP SURR DIRECT

AUTO

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

TAPE

DSS

AUX2

AUX1

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

1. Select the input source to record by turning the

INPUT FUNCTION SELECTOR knob on the

front panel or simply press the input selector

buttons on the remote controller.

The input source is now selected and you may

watch or listen to it as desired.

2. The currently selected input source signal

is output to the TAPE OUT, CD/CDR OUT,

VCR1 OUT, and DSS/VCR2 OUT outputs for

recording.

3. Start recording to the recording component as

desired.

SELECTING ANALOG AUDIO INPUT OR

DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

AMP

VOL

USE

PAGE

If you have already assigned the digital inputs, you

can temporarily select the audio input mode for each

input source as following procedures.

Press the AMP button and press the > button until

PAGE4 is displayed. Press the A/D (D3) button.

When this button is pressed, the input mode is

switched in the following sequence.

Auto → HDMI → Digital → Analog → Auto

Auto mode:

The types of signals being input to the digital and

analog input jacks for the selected input source are

detected automatically.

If no digital signal is being input, the analog input

jacks are selected automatically.

HDMI mode:

HDMI mode can be selected only when an HDMI

input has been assigned as an input source.

When “HDMI AUDIO” under PREFERENCE of the

SETUP MENU is set to “THROUGH”, the HDMI

mode cannot be selected.

Digital mode:

The input signal is ﬁ xed to an assigned digital input

terminal.

Analog mode:

The analog input jacks are selected.

This selection is temporary and will not be stored in

memory.

To store changes to the input mode, select “1. INPUT

SETUP” from the MAIN MENU. (See page 43)

LISTENING THROUGH HEADPHONES

This jack may be used to listen to the unit’s output

through a pair of headphones. Be certain that the

headphones have a standard 1/4” stereo phono

plug.

Note that the speakers will automatically be turned

off when the headphone jack is in use.

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8002

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO MULTI

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

POWER ON/OFF

DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SP

SLEEP SURR DIRECT

AUTO DISC 6.

Note:

• When using headphones, the surround mode will

change to STEREO and Dolby Headphone by

MENU and Cursor button.

• The surround mode returns to the previous setting

as soon as the headphone plug is removed from the

jack.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 64SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 64 07.8.24 1:16:05 PM07.8.24 1:16:05 PM

ENGLISH

DOLBY HEADPHONE MODE

This feature simulates the waveforms of the actual

sounds heard from the speakers.

When headphones are used, the MENU button

automatically switches to the Dolby headphone

mode.

The OSD that appears when the MENU button is

pressed is shown below.

HEAD PHONE

DOLBY HP MODE :DH

SURROUND :PL

II MV

L LEVEL :+10.0dB

R LEVEL : 0.0dB

DOLBY HP (Headphone) MODE can be selected

with the left and right cursor buttons.

BYPASS → DH (DOLBY Headphone) → BYPASS

BYPASS: Bypasses the Dolby headphone mode

and delivers ordinary 2-channel stereo.

DH: Dolby Headphone is a signal processing

system that delivers a sound similar to

room speakers.

It makes it possible to experience the

volume and space of a 5-channel

surround system using ordinary stereo

headphones.

When the PURE DIRECT mode is selected, Dolby

surround processing is bypassed and “✽✽✽” is

displayed as the mode indication.

The surround mode can be selected when the

modes in DH is selected.

L/R LEVEL can be set in the ±12 dB range.

Notes:

• The surround mode returns to the previous setting as

soon as the plug is removed from the jack.

• In headphone mode, Tone Control and ACOUSTIC

EQ are not available.

ATTENUATION TO ANALOG INPUT SIGNAL

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

ATT

If the selected analog audio input signal is greater

than the capable level of internal processing, the

“PEAK” indicator will light up on the front display. If

this happens, you should press the ATT button on

the remote controller.

“ATT” indicator will be illuminated when this function

is activated. The signal-input level is reduced by

about half. Attenuation will not work with the output

signal of TAPE-OUT, CD/CD-R, VCR1-OUT and

DSS/VCR2-OUT.

This function is memorized for each individual input

source.

SPEAKER A/B

DIGITAL

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

VOLUME

DOWN

M-DAX

ENTER

7.1CH INPUT

MULTI

A/B

T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

SPEAKER

MULTI

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFF

LTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SURR DIRECT

AUTO DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

SPK-AB

This unit has speaker system - A and speaker

system- B for front L/R channels.

You can select these systems by pressing

SPEAKERS A/B button on the front panel or SPK-

AB on the remote controller.

7.1 CH INPUT

This unit is equipped for future expansion through the

use of Multi channel Super Audio CD multichannel

player or DVD-Audio player.

When this is selected, the input signals connected to

the L(front left), R (front right), CENTER, SL (surround

left), SR (surround right) and SBL (surround back left)

and SBR (surround back right) channels of the 7.1

CH. In jacks are output directly to the front (left and

right), center, surround (left and right) and surround

back speaker systems as well as the pre-out jacks

without passing through the surround circuitry.

In addition, the signal input to the SW (subwoofer)

jack is output to the PRE OUT SW (subwoofer) jack.

When 7.1 CH. INPUT is selected, the last video input

used remains routed to the Monitor Outputs.

This permits simultaneous viewing with video

sources

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8002

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO MULTI

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

POWER ON/OFF

DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR

SLEEP SURR DIRECT

AUTO DISC 6.1

1. 2.

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

VOLUME

DOWN

M-DAX A/B

DE MEMORY CLEAR

SPEAKERS

MIC

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

7.1CH

CH.SEL

1. Select a desired Video source to decide the

routed video signal to the Monitor Outputs.

2. Press the 7.1 CH INPUT button on the front

panel or press 7.1 CH on the remote controller

to switch the 7.1 channel input.

3. If it is necessary to adjust the output level of

each channel, press the CH.SEL button on the

remote controller.

Adjust the speaker output levels so that you can

hear the same sound level from each speaker

at the listening position. For the front left, front

right, center, surround left, surround right and

surround back speakers, the output levels can

be adjusted between –12 to +12 dB.

The subwoofer can be adjusted between –18

and +12 dB.

These adjustments result will be stored to 7.1

CH. INPUT memory.

4. Adjust the main volume with the MAIN

VOLUME knob or the VOL buttons on the

remote controller.

To cancel the 7.1 CH. INPUT setting, press the 7.1

CH INPUT button on the front panel or press 7.1 CH

on the remote controller.

Notes:

• When the 7.1 CH. Input is in use, you may not select

a surround mode, as the external decoder determines

processing.

• In addition, there is no signal at the record outputs

when the 7.1 CH. Input is in use.

• Furthermore, the following functions are not

available during 7.1 CH Input use.

Test Tone, NIGHT MODE, Source Direct, Pure

Direct, RE-EQ, Tone Control, Multi EQ

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 65SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 65 07.8.24 1:16:05 PM07.8.24 1:16:05 PM

ENGLISH

AUX2 INPUT

If you don’t need to connect 7.1 Ch. input terminals

with multi channel decoder,

L(front left) and R (front right) inputs terminals are

available as AUX2 input.

In this case, You can connect additional audio source

to AUX2 as other audio input terminals.

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8002

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH

MODE AUTO MULTI

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

DSD

POWER ON/OFF

DISP MULTI AUTO

SLEEP SURR

AUTO

VIDEO ON/OFF

When no video signal is connected to the unit or

a DVD, etc., is connected directly to your TV, the

unnecessary video circuit can be turned off by

selecting the “VIDEO OFF” setting.

To select video off, press the AMP button and press

the > button until PAGE 4 is displayed. Press the V-

OFF button.

NES

ND RECEIVER SR8002

M-DAX

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO MULTI

A/B

T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP SURR DIRECT

AUTO DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

AMP

VOL

USE

PAGE

1234

TV AUTO ON/OFF FUNCTION

This function allows the component connected to the

TV-VIDEO in jack to control the power (ON/OFF) to

the unit.

AUTO POWER ON

1. Be sure the TV auto mode is ENABLED. (Refer

to page 53:)

2. Connect your TV TUNER (etc) to the TV-

VIDEO in terminal. Be sure to connect the

VIDEO input.

3. Turn OFF the power to the TV TUNER and the

unit.

4. Turn ON the TV TUNER and tune in a receivable

station.

5. When the station is received, this unit turns ON

and TV is selected automatically.

AUTO POWER OFF

1. In the above situation, turn the TV TUNER OFF

or select a channel that does not contain any

broadcast.

2. The power to the unit switches to STANDBY

after approx. 5 minutes.

Notes:

• AUTO POWER OFF is canceled if this unit is set to

a source other than TV.

The function reactivates when TV is selected again.

• Some TV broadcasts may cause the TV AUTO

FUNCTION to turn ON.

• The S-Video terminal does not support “TV AUTO

ON/OFF” function.

LIP.SYNC

Depending on the image device (TV, monitor,

projector, etc.) connected to the unit a time lag can

occur between image signal processing and audio

signal processing. Though minor, this time lag can

interfere with movie and music enjoyment. The LIP.

SYNC feature delays the audio signal with respect to

the image signal output from the SR7001 to correct

the time lag between the sound and image. It can be

operated with the “LIP.SYNC” and 1 and 2 cursor

buttons of the remote controller. Set the remote

controller to the AMP mode before operating the

LIP.SYNC feature. The initial setting is OFF (0 ms).

The time lag can be adjusted in 10 ms steps up to

200 ms.

Watch the picture on the image device (i.e., TV,

monitor, projector, etc.) as you adjust the time lag.

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

GUIDE

LIP.SYNC

Note:

• The LIP.SYSNC feature turns OFF (0 ms) in

the SOURCE/PURE DIRECT mode. When the

SOURCE/PURE DIRECT mode is deactivated, the

set value of the LIP.SYSNC feature is automatically

restored.

• Even if you do not correct the time lag manually this

way, audio and video are automatically synchronized

when the unit is connected to TV or Projectors

supporting Auto Lipsync Correction in HDMI 1.3a.

For instructions on Auto Lipsync Correction, see

page 54.

DUAL BACKUP MEMORY

The unit stores settings information in nonvolatile

memory even when the main power supply is turned

off. Using the Dual Backup Memory function, you

can write settings information to another memory

area to back up saved settings for recovery anytime

as needed.

BACKUP

Set up the unit in the state for which you want to

store the settings. Hold the MEMORY and ENTER

buttons on the front panel simultaneously for at least

3 seconds.

DIGITAL

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

VOLUME

DOWN

M-DAX

7.1CH INPUT

MULTI

A/B

T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

SPEAKER

MULTI

ENTER

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFF

LTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SURR DIRECT

AUTO DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

“MEMORY SAVING” is displayed and the unit’s

settings are saved. The stored settings information

is retained until Dual Backup Memory is used again

and the information is overwritten.

MEMORY SAVING

Note:

• The following settings values cannot be backed

up.

• Main Room Volume

• Multi Room Volume

• Multi Speaker Room Volume

RECOVERY OF MEMORY

Recover backed up settings as follows.

Hold the MEMORY and MENU buttons on the front

panel simultaneously for at least 3 seconds.

DIGITAL

DOWN

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO MULTI

A/B

T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

RE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

ENTER

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP SURR DIRECT

AUTO DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

“MEMORY LOAD” is displayed and the unit’s stored

settings are reapplied.

The unit temporarily enters standby mode. If there is

no backup data, “NO BACKUP” is displayed and no

data is recovered.

MEMORY LOAD

NO BACKUP

Note:

• Because the following settings values are

not backed up, each Volume value is set to

Minimum.

• Main Room Volume

• Multi Room Volume

• Multi Speaker Volume

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 66SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 66 07.8.24 1:16:06 PM07.8.24 1:16:06 PM

ENGLISH

1. To select tuner, Press the TUNER button twice

within two seconds on the remote controller.

2. Press the > button until PAGE 1 is displayed.

3. Press the BAND (D5) button to select either

FM or AM.

4. Press the GUIDE on the remote controller,

display will show “FREQ----”.

lnput your desired station’s, frequency with the

ten numbered keypad on the remote

controller

The desired station will automatically be tuned.

BASIC OPERATION

(TUNER)

To operate the unit from the remote controller, press

the TUNER button on the remote controller so that

the tuner mode is engaged.

LISTENING TO THE TUNER

Frequency scan step for AM is selectable.

Default setup is 10 kHz step, if your country’s

standard is 9 kHz step, Press BAND button on the

front panel or TUNER button on the remote controller

more than 5 seconds. Scan step will change.

Note:

• This function is not available on the SR8002.

•

Preset memory for the tuner will clear by changing

this setup.

AUTO TUNING

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8002

PURE DIRECT THX

MODE AUTO MU

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

DSD

POWER ON/OFF

DISP MULTI

SLEEP

AUTO

SOURCE

VOL

USE

PAGE

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

TUNER

M-DAX

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO MULTI

A/B

T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

URE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP SURR DIRECT

AUTO DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

3. 2.

USE

PAGE

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

TUNER

(Using the unit)

1. Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select

“TUNER”.

2. Press the BAND button to select either FM or

AM.

3. Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons on the front

Panel for more than 1 second to start the auto

tuning function.

4. Automatic searching begins then stops when a

station is tuned in.

(Using the remote controller)

1. To select tuner, Press the TUNER button twice

within two second on the remote.

2. Press the > button until PAGE 1 is displayed.

3. Press the BAND (D5) button to select either

FM or AM.

4. Press the > button until PAGE 2 is displayed.

Press and hold the SCAN+ (D1) or SCAN– (D2)

button for 1 second or more.

6. Automatic searching begins then stops when a

station is tuned in.

If tuning does not stop at the desired station, use to

the “MANUAL TUNING” operation.

MANUAL TUNING

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8002

PURE DIRECT THX

MODE AUTO MU

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

DSD

POWER ON/OFF

DISP MULTI

SLEEP

AUTO

VOL

USE

PAGE

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

TUNER

M-DAX

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO MULTI

A/B

T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

URE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP SURR DIRECT

AUTO DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

3. 2.

SOURCE

USE

PAGE

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAP E

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

TUNER

(Using the unit)

1. Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select

“TUNER”.

2. Press the BAND button to select either FM or

AM.

3. Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons on the front

Panel to select the desired station.

(Using the remote controller)

1. To select tuner, press the TUNER button twice

within two seconds on the remote controller.

2. Press the > button until PAGE 1 is displayed.

3. Press the BAND (D5) button to select either

FM or AM.

4. Press the > button until PAGE 2 is displayed.

5. Press the SCAN+ (D1) or SCAN

–

(D2) button

to tune in the deseired station.

DIRECT FREQUENCY CALL

SOURCE

VOL

USE

PAGE

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

GUIDE

2 31

5 64

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

TUNER

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 67SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 67 07.8.24 1:16:06 PM07.8.24 1:16:06 PM

ENGLISH

MANUAL PRESET MEMORY

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

2 31

5 64

MEMO

M-DAX

ENTER

URE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO MULTI

A/B

T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

IRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP SURR DIRECT

AUTO DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

3. 2. 4.

(Using the unit)

1. Tune into the radio station you desire (Refer to

the “MANUAL TUNING” or “AUTO TUNING”

section).

2. Press the MEMORY button on the front panel.

“– –“ (preset number) starts blinking on the

display.

3. Select the preset number by pressing the 1

or 2

cursor

buttons, while this is still blinking

(approx. 5 seconds)

4. Press the MEMORY button again to enter. The

display stops blinking.

The station is now stored in the speciﬁ ed preset

memory location.

(Using the remote controller)

1. Tune into the radio station you desire (Refer to

the “MANUAL TUNING” or “AUTO TUNING”

section).

2. Press the MEMO button on the remote

controller. “– –“ (preset number) starts blinking

on the display.

3. Enter the desired preset number by pressing

the numeric buttons.

Note:

• When entering a single digit number (2 for example),

either input “02” or just input “2” and wait for a few

seconds.

PRESET MEMORY

With this unit you can preset up to 60 FM/AM stations

in any order.

For each station, you can memorize the frequency

and reception mode if desired.

AUTO PRESET MEMORY

This function automatically scans the FM and AM

band and enters all stations with proper signal

strength into the memory.

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

VOLUME

DOWN

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8002

M-DAX

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO MULTI

A/B

T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

POWER ON/OFF

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP SURR DIRECT

AUTO DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

2. 4. 1. 3. 5.

1. To select FM , press the BAND button on the

front panel.

2. While pressing the MEMORY button, press the

1 cursor button.

“AUTO PRESET” will appear on the display,

and scanning starts from the lowest frequency.

3. Each time the tuner ﬁ nds a station, scanning

will pause and the station will be played for ﬁ ve

seconds.

During this time, the following operations are

possible.

The band can be changed by the BAND button.

4. If no button is pressed during this period, the

current station is memorized in location Preset

01.

If you wish to skip the current station, press the

3 cursor button during this period, this station

is skipped and auto presetting continues.

5. Operation stops automatically when all 60

preset memory positions are ﬁ lled or when

auto scanning attains the highest end of all

bands. If you desire to stop the auto preset

memory at anytime, press the CLEAR button.

Analog Mono Mode

T-MODE:MONO

MONO mode is selected and the AUTO indicator

disappears from the FL display. Monaural broadcasts

are received in TUNER mode.

Note:

• On the SR7002, the TUNER mode cannot be

changed when BAND is set to AM.

• The SR7002 does not display the mode on the FL

display when the TUNER MODE is switched.

The AUTO indictor appears on the FL display when

the mode is switched to Analog Auto Mode. (See

page 9)

• If the unit receives a weak signal or it is difﬁ cult to

receive a stereo signal, press the T-MODE button

on the remote controller or the unit to switch to

MONO mode. This reduces the amount of noise

and makes broadcasts easier to hear. The AUTO

indicator on the FL display disappears.

(FM) TUNING MODE (AUTO STEREO OR MONO)

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

VOLUME

DOWN

M-DAX

A/B

T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

-OFF

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

VOL

USE

PAGE

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

TUNER

In TUNER mode, press the T-MODE button on the

remote controller to switch between AUTO STEREO

and monaural sound.

1. Press the > button on the remote controller to

display Page 2.

2. Each time the T-MODE (D3) button is pressed,

the TUNER mode changes and the mode is

displayed on the FL display.

Analog / Digital Auto Mode (Only on the SR8002)

T-MODE:DIG-AT

For listening to HD Radio stations.

See p.70 for more information on HD Radio

technology.

Note:

• This mode is not available on the SR7002.

Analog Auto Mode

(when receiving FM broadcasts)

T-MODE:ANA-AT

AUTO STEREO mode is selected and the AUTO

indicator is illuminated on the FL display.

When stereo broadcasts are received, the ST

indicator is illuminated on the FL display.

Note:

• This mode is not available when BAND is set to

AM.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 68SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 68 07.8.24 1:16:07 PM07.8.24 1:16:07 PM

ENGLISH

4. Up to 10 channels can be displayed at a time.

If there are more than 10 channels, press P-

INFO (D5) on the remote controller once more

to display the next page.

The list display will disappear automatically in 5

seconds.

CLEARING STORED PRESET STATIONS

You can remove preset stations from the memory

using the following procedure.

DIGITAL

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 IN

VOLU

DOWN

M-DAX

ENTER

A/B

T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

KER

LTI

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFF

ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

3.2.

2 31

5 64

CLEAR

DSS

VCRDVD

TEST

SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

MEMO

CLEAR

MEMO

1. Recall the preset number to be cleared with

the method described in “Recalling” a preset

station.

2. Press the MEMORY button on the front panel

or press the MEMO button on the remote.

The stored preset number blinks in the display

for 5 seconds. While blinking, press the

CLEAR button on the front panel or the remote

controller.

4. “xx CLEAR” appears on the display to indicate

that the specified preset number has been

cleared.

Note:

•

To clear all stored preset stations, press and hold the

CLEAR and the ENTER buttons for two seconds.

4. You can fast forward the preset stations, press

the CH+ continuously.

5. When the desired preset station is received,

cancel the preset scan operation by pressing

the CLEAR button or P-SCAN (D4) on the

remote controller.

PRESET CHANNEL LIST DISPLAY

A complete list of the broadcast channels stored in

this unit can be displayed.

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

TUNER

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAGE

1234

1. Press the Tuner button on the remote controller

twice within two seconds to switch to the

TUNER function.

2. Press > on the remote controller to display

PAGE2, then press P-INFO (D5).

3. The list of preset channels will be displayed on

the screen of the TV monitor connected to this

unit.

PRESET LIST

NO. 1 FM 87.10 MHz

NO. 2 FM 93.10 MHz

NO. 3 FM 94.70 MHz

NO.10 FM105.70 MHz

RETURN NEXT EXIT

On the SR8002, multicast channels are also

displayed, as shown below, when an HD Radio

channel is set to the preset channels.

PRESET LIST

NO. 1 FM 87.10 MHz

NO. 2 FM 93.10 MHz

NO. 3 FM 94.70 MHz

NO. 4 FM 94.70 MHz-3

NO. 5 FM 94.70 MHz-4

NO.10 FM105.70 MHz

In the list of preset channels above, preset

numbers 4 and 5 are the multicast channels for

preset number 3.

RECALLING A PRESET STATION

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

TUNER

VOL

MUTE

GUIDE

LIP.SYNC

MUTE

(Using the unit)

1. Select the desired preset station by pressing

the 1 or 2

cursor

buttons on the front panel.

(Using the remote controller)

ress the TUNER button twice within two

seconds on the remote.

2. Press the CH+ or CH– button to tune in the

deseired preset station.

Or enter the preset station number with the

numeric buttons.

PRESET SCAN

2 31

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

MUTE

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

TUNER

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAGE

1234

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

CLEAR

(Using the remote controller)

ress the TUNER button twice within two

seconds on the remote controller.

2. Press the > button until PAGE2 is displayed and

press the P-SCAN (D4) on the remote.

“PRESET SCAN” appears on the front display

and then the preset station with the lowest

preset number is recalled ﬁ rst.

3. Preset stations are recalled in sequence (No.1

→ No.2 → etc.) for 10 seconds each.

No stored preset number will be skipped.

SORTING PRESET STATIONS

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

VOLUME

DOWN

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8002

M-DAX

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO MULTI

A/B

T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

POWER ON/OFF

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP SURR DIRECT

AUTO DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

If you have stations memorized, and there is a gap in

the sequential order:

I.e. the stations are stored as follows

1) 87.1 MHz

2) 93.1 MHz

3) 94.7 MHz

10) 105.9 MHz

(notice there is no stations programmed for pre sets

for 4-9), you can have pre set 10 become pre set 4:

To sort the numbers, press and hold the MEMORY

and the 4 cursor buttons.

“PRESET SORT” will appear on the display and

sorting will be done.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 69SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 69 07.8.24 1:16:08 PM07.8.24 1:16:08 PM

ENGLISH

5. After selecting the ﬁ rst character to be entered,

press the MEMORY or ENTER button, or press

the MEMO button on the remote controller.

The entry in this column is ﬁ xed and the next

column starts to ﬂ ash. Fill the next column the

same way.

To move back and forth between the characters,

press the 1 / 2 cursor buttons or press CH+ or

CH– button on the remote controller.

Note:

• Unused columns should be filled by entering

blanks.

6. To save the name, press the MEMORY or

ENTER button on the front panel, or press the

MEMO button on the remote controller for more

than 2 seconds.

Instead of using the 3 and 4 cursor buttons

or the SCAN+ and SCAN– buttons of the

remote controller unit to select characters,

characters can be input from the numeric keys

of the remote controller. See the below table

for a correspondence between characters and

numeric keys.

Ten keypad Press, press again, press again, etc.

1A → B → C → 1 → A

2D → E → F → 2 → D

3G → H → I → 3 → G

4J → K → L → 4 → J

5M → N → O → 5 → M

6P → Q → R → 6 → P

7S → T → U → 7 → S

8V → W → X → 8 → V

9Y → Z → space → 9 → Y

0– → + → / → 0

Note:

On the SR8002, when the unit receives HD Radio

and RBDS broadcasts, the HD Radio and RBDS text

data is displayed. Therefore, the preset station names

entered with this function are not displayed.

NAME INPUT OF THE PRESET STATION.

This function allows the name of each preset channel

to be entered using alphanumeric characters.

Before name inputting, you need to store preset

stations with the preset memory operation.

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

VOLUME

DOWN

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8002

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO MULTI

A/B

T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

POWER ON/OFF

ENTER

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP SURR DIRECT

AUTO DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

5. 2.

SOURCE

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAGE

1234

VOL

MUTE

LIP.SYNC

MEMO

CLEAR

THX

MEMO

1. Recall the preset number to be inputted name

with the method described in “Recalling” a

preset station.

2. Press the MEMORY button on the front panel

or press the MEMO button on the remote

controller for more than 3 seconds.

3. The left most column of the station name

indicator ﬂ ashes, indicating the character entry

ready status.

4. When you press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons on

the front panel or the SCAN+ or SCAN– buttons

on the remote controller (page 4), alphabetic

and numeric characters will be displayed in the

following order:

A → B → C ... Z → 1 → 2 → 3 ..... 0 → – → +

→ / → (Blank) → A

UP →

→ DOWN

FOR LISTENING TO HD Radio STATIONS

(SR8002 ONLY)

HD Radio technology brings digital radio to

conventional analog AM and FM radio stations, with

improved sound quality, better reception, and new

data services.

HD Radio technology provides CD-quality sound for

FM stations, and FM-quality sound for AM stations.

In addition, FM HD Radio stations can transmit

multiple programs on the same frequency by using

multicast channels.

Text data display incudes station name, song title,

artist name, and so on.

For more information about HD Radio technology,

visit: www.ibiquity.com

TUNING MODE

HD Radio stations transmit analog and digital signals

for broadcast programs.

You can change the TUNING mode to the desired

signal type.

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

VOLUME

DOWN

M-DAX

A/B

T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

-OFF

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

VOL

USE

PAGE

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

TUNER

1. Press the > button on the remote controller to

display Page 2.

2. Each time the T-MODE (D4) button is pressed,

the TUNER mode changes and the mode is

displayed on the FL display.

Analog/Digital Auto Mode

T-MODE:DIG-AT

Use this mode when listening to HD Radio stations.

(It is recommended that you normally use this

mode.)

AUTO STEREO mode is selected and the AUTO

indicator is illuminated on the FL display.

When stereo broadcasts are received, the ST

indicator is illuminated on the FL display.

When an HD Radio (digital) signal is received, the

DIGITAL indicator is illuminated on the FL display.

Note:

In this mode, if the strength of the HD Radio signal is

weak, the unit automatically changes to Analog mode

to receive the analog signal.

Analog Auto Mode

(when receiving FM broadcasts)

T-MODE:ANA-AT

In this mode, the unit receives only analog signals

and changes to AUTO STEREO mode.

See p.68 for more information on Analog received.

(Only analog broadcasts are received.)

Notes:

• In this mode, HD Radio signals cannot be received.

(Only analog broadcasts are received.)

• This mode is not available when BAND is set to

AM.

Analog Mono Mode

T-MODE:MONO

In this mode, the unit receives only analog signals

and changes to Monaural mode.

See p.68 for more information on Analog Mono

Mode.

Note:

In this mode, HD Radio signals cannot be received.

(Only analog broadcasts are received.)

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 70SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 70 07.8.24 1:16:09 PM07.8.24 1:16:09 PM

ENGLISH

HD RADIO AUTO TUNING

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO MULTI

A/B

T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

URE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

ENTER

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP SURR DIRECT

AUTO DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

LIP.SYNC

VOL

You can use TUNING mode to scan for HD Radio

stations.

(Using the SR8002)

1. Press the ENTER button on the front panel.

2. Automatic searching begins then stops when a

station is tuned in.

(Using the remote controller)

1. Press the OK button on the remote controller.

2. Automatic searching begins then stops when a

station is tuned in.

Notes:

• When TUNING mode is set to a mode other than

Analog/Digital Auto mode (DIG-AT), TUNING

mode automatically changes to Analog/Digital Auto

mode.

• If tuning does not stop at the desired station, use

manual tuning. (See p.67 for the manual tuning

operation.)

SWITCHING HD-RADIO INFORMATION INTHE FRONT

PANEL FL DISPLAY

You can display HD Radio information (such as

station name, artist name/song title or signal status)

for the channel currently selected in the front panel

FL display.

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

USE

PAGE

234

1. Press the > button until PAGE 3 is displayed.

2. Select the information with the DISP (D1)

button.

Auto display mode

Text 1 (artist name)

Text 2 (song title)

HD Radio signal strength

Frequency

When the auto display mode is displayed:

FM WXYZ-FM 1

When the unit is tuned to an HD Radio station,

the station name (call sign) is displayed on the FL

display.

Notes:

• The station name is displayed if the text data from

the HD Radio station can be received. If the signal

from the radio station is weak, text data may be

displayed intermittently or not all.

If the text data cannot be received, the frequency

is displayed. The station name is displayed if it has

been registered with the preset station name input

function.

(See p.70 for information on the PRESET STATION

NAME INPUT function.)

• When the unit receives a broadcast with multicast

channels, the multicast program number (HD 1) is

displayed to the right of the station name displayed

on the FL display.

When (HD 1) is displayed, you can select the multicast

channel. (See p.72 for information on multicast

channels.)

When the Text 1 (Artist name) is displayed:

TXT1

↓

Pink Floid

The “TXT1” is displayed for 2 seconds, followed by

the artist’s name. If artist’s name is more than 13

characters long, the text is scrolled.

Notes:

• If the signal from an radio station is weak, text data

may be displayed intermittently or not all.

• When the unit receives an analog broadcast not from

an HD Radio station but from an RBDS station, the

radio text is displayed on the FL display. (See p.73

for information on RBDS.)

When the Text 2(Song title) is displayed:

TXT2

↓

Money

The “TXT 2” is displayed for 2 seconds, followed by

the song title. If song title is more than 13 characters

long, the text is scrolled.

Notes:

• If the signal from an radio station is weak, text data

may be displayed intermittently or not all.

• When the unit receives an analog broadcast not from

an HD Radio station but from an RBDS station,

the program service name is displayed on the FL

display. (See p.73 for information on RBDS.)

CHECKING THE HD Radio SIGNAL STRENGTH

HD SIG:777777

• The HD Radio signal strength of the FL display

changes as shown below according to the

receiving condition.

HD SIG: ■■■■■■

SIGNAL: STRONG

(Signal strength is good)

HD SIG: ■■■■

SIGNAL: MARGINAL

(Signal strength is Marginal)

HD SIG: ■■

SIGNAL: WEAK

(Signal strength is poor)

HD SIG:

SIGNAL: NON

(Loss of the signal)

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 71SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 71 07.8.24 1:16:09 PM07.8.24 1:16:09 PM

ENGLISH

This TUNER information can also be displayed on a

TV-monitor connected to the SR8002.

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

AMP

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

Press the AMP button on the remote controller.

2. Press the OSD button. The following information

display will be output.

VIDEO :DVD

AUDIO :FM

SURR-MODE :AUTO

MULTIROOMA:OFF SPK:OFF

MULTIROOMB:OFF SPK:OFF

MAIN VOLUME

------------------

3. When this display appears, press the OSD

button again. TUNER information like the

following will appear.

TUNER INFORMATION

FREQ:FM 100.10MHz

WXYZ-FM

TXT1:Pink floid

TXT2:Money

PTY :Rock

HD-SIG:MARGINAL

4. Press the OSD button again. The information

display will go out.

Note:

• When the entire TXT1 or TXT2 character string

cannot be displayed at once, the display changes

to scrolling display. If text data cannot be received,

“---” is displayed.

SELECTING MULTICAST CHANNELS

FM HD Radio stations can transmit multiple programs

on the same frequency by using what are called

MULTICAST CHANNELS.

SOURCE

USE

PAGE

M-DAX

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO MULTI

A/B

T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

RE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP SURR DIRECT

AUTO DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

(Using the SR8002)

1. Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons on the front

panel to select the desired Multicast Channel.

(Using the remote controller)

1. Press the > button until PAGE 2 is displayed.

2. Press the SCAN+ (D1) or SCAN- (D2) button

to tune in the deseired Multicast channel.

When the unit receives multicast channels, the

multicast program number (HD 2) is displayed to

the right of the station name displayed on the

FL display.

FM WXYZ-FM 2

• This function is not available for AM HD Radio

stations because they cannot broadcast multicast

channels.

• If the received HD Radio station have multicast

channels, the unit scans for frequencies as shown

below.

Example:

When two multicast channels are broadcast by an

HD Radio station at 100.10 MHz

1. Unit receives 99.90 MHz.

↓ (Press [SCAN +].)

2. Unit receives the main channel of the HD Radio

station at 100.10 MHz.

↓ (Press [SCAN +].)

3. Unit receives multicast channel 1 at 100.10

MHz.

↓ (Press [SCAN +].)

4. Unit receives multicast channel 2 at 100.10

MHz.

↓ (Press [SCAN +].)

5. Unit receives 100.30 MHz.

(The station at 100.10 MHz does not have a

third multicast channel, so the next frequency

(100.30 MHz) is received.)

Notes:

• If digital audio data cannot be received after the

station is selected, or if the station signal is weak,

the unit may not be able to receive the multicast

channels.

• If the station signal is weak, the digital audio of

the multicast channel may cut out. In this case,

“LOADING” is displayed on the FL display.

• If the digital signal of the multicast channel cannot

be received, “OFF AIR” is displayed on the FL

display and the main channel is selected.

• Multicast channels cannot be received on AM

broadcasts.

PTY AUTO SEARCH

You can use the Program Type information search

function for some HD Radio stations. See PTY AUTO

SEARCH on p.73.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 72SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 72 07.8.24 1:16:10 PM07.8.24 1:16:10 PM

ENGLISH

RBDS OPERATION (SR8002 ONLY)

RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System) is a description

of the station’s programming hidden space in the FM

signal.

Your new unit is equipped with RBDS to assist in the

selection of FM stations using station and network

names, rather than broadcast frequencies. Additional

RBDS functions include the ability to search for

programme types.

Note:

When the unit is receiving an HD Radio (digital)

signal, the HD Radio text data is displayed instead of

the RBDS data.

RADIO TEXT

Some RBDS stations broadcast RADIO TEXT,

which is additional information on the station and

programme being broadcast.

RADIO TEXT information appears as ‘running’ text

in the display. RADIO TEXT is transmitted character

by the radio station. As a result of that it may take

some time until the entire text has been completely

received.

RBDS DISPLAY

When a unit is tuned to an FM station that is

transmitting RBDS data, the Front Panel Information

Display will automatically show the call sign or RBDS

TEXT in place of the typical display of the station’s

broadcast frequency.

To change the display, press the TUNER button and

press the the > button until PAGE3 is displayed.

Select the information with the DISP (D1) button.

Auto display mode

Text 1 (Radio Text)

Text 2 (Program Service name)

HD Radio signal strength

Frequency

When the auto display mode is displayed:

FM WXYZ

When the unit is tuned to an RBDS station, the station

name (call sign) is displayed on the FL display.

Notes:

When the unit receives the RDBS text data from a

station, the station name is displayed. If the signal

from the radio station is weak, text data may be

displayed intermittently or not all.

If the text data cannot be received, the frequency is

displayed. You can use the preset station name input

function to register the station name. The registered

station name is then displayed.

(See p.70 for information on the PRESET STATION

NAME INPUT function.)

When the Text 1 (Radio Text) is displayed:

TXT1

↓

Pink Floid

The “TXT1” is displayed for 2 seconds, followed by

the Radio Text (RT). If RT is more than 13 characters

long, the text is scrolled.

Notes:

• If the signal from an radio station is weak, text data

may be displayed intermittently or not all.

• When the unit is tuned to an HD Radio station, the

artist name is displayed on the FL display. (See p.71

for information on HD Radio technology.)

When the Text 2(Program service name) is

displayed:

TXT2

↓

Money

The “TXT 2” is displayed for 2 seconds, followed by

the Program Service (PS). If PS is more than 13

characters long, the text is scrolled.

Notes:

• If the signal from an radio station is weak, text data

may be displayed intermittently or not all.

• When the unit is tuned to an HD Radio station, the

song title is displayed on the FL display.

(See p.71 for information on HD Radio technology.)

CHECKING THE HD Radio SIGNAL STRENGTH

HD SIG:

• The signal strength is only displayed when the unit

is tuned to a digital HD Radio station. “SIGNAL:

NON” is displayed when receiving an analog

signal.

• You can view the tuner information on a TV monitor

when connected to the SR8002. (See p.33, 34 for

the operation details.)

PTY AUTO SEARCH

Your unit is equipped to automatically search for

stations transmitting any of 29 different programme

types. To search for a PTY, follow these procedures:

DIGITAL

S-

DOWN

M-DAX

ENTER

IRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

E AUTO MULTI

A/B

T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

UND

SPEAKER

MULTI

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP SURR DIRECT

AUTO DISC 6.1 MT X 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

EXIT

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

THX

2 31

5 64

LEARN

NAME

MACRO

USE

PAGE

1234

1. Press the PTY button in the TUNER MODE on

the remote controller. The current station’s PTY

will be displayed, or the currently selected PTY

group will be displayed in blinking if no station

or RBDS data is present.

To change to a new PTY type, press the

TUNING 3 or 4 button on the front panel or

numeric buttons on the remote controller until

the desired PTY is shown in the display.

3. Once the desired PTY group or type has

been selected, press the PTY button while

the display blink (approx. 5 seconds). The

PTY Auto search will start, and the tuner will

pause at each station broadcasting RBDS

PTY information corresponding to the selected

choice.

4. To advance to the next RBDS station with the

desired PTY, press the PTY button again within

5 seconds.

Notes:

• Not all RBDS stations and HD Radio stations

broadcast PTY information.

• PTY AUTO SEARCH may not function for stations

with weak signals if the unit is unable to detect the

information needed for the search.

NUMBER DISPLAY PROGRAMME TYPE

1 NEWS News

2 INFORM Information

3 SPORTS Sports

4 TALK Talk

5 ROCK Rock

6 CLS ROCK Classic Rock

7 ADLT HIT Adult Hits

8 SOFT RCK Soft Rock

9 TOP 40 Top 40

10 COUNTRY Country

11 OLDIES Oldies

12 SOFT Soft

13 NOSTALGA Nostalgia

14 JAZZ Jazz

15 CLASSICL Classical

16 R & B Rhythm and Blues

17 SOFT R&B Soft Rhythm and Blues

18 LANGUAGE Foreign Language

19 REL MUSC Religious Music

20 REL TALK Religious Talk

21 PERSNLTY Personality

22 PUBLIC Public

23 COLLEGE College

24 WEATHER Weather

25 ALERT! Emergency

26 TRAFFIC Trafﬁ c

27 GOVERMNT Government

28 EMERGNCY Emergency

29 READSVCS Radio Reading Services

30 PRIVSVCS Private Services

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 73SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 73 07.8.24 1:16:11 PM07.8.24 1:16:11 PM

ENGLISH

LISTENING TO XM SATELLITE RADIO

SELECTING AN INPUT SOURCE

Before you can listen to XM Satellite Radio, you must

ﬁ rst select the input source on the unit.

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8002

PURE DIRECT THX

MODE AUTO

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

DSD

POWER ON/OFF

DISP MULTI

SLEEP AU

USE

PAGE

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

TUNER

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

VOLUME

DOWN

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8002

M-DAX

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO MULTI

A/B

T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

POWER ON/OFF

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP SURR DIRECT

AUTO DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1

PCM

AAC

(Using the unit)

1. Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select

“TUNER”.

2. Press the BAND button to select either XM or

DAB.

(Using the remote controller)

1. To select tuner, Press the TUNER button twice

within two seconds on the remote controller.

2. Press the > button until PAGE 1 is displayed.

Select XM or DAB with the D3 button.

CHECKING THE XM SIGNAL STRENGTH

AND RADIO ID

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

USE

PAGE

234

1. Press the > button until PAGE 3 is displayed.

2. Press the D1 (DISP) button four times to

display the signal status on the front display of

the unit.

SIGNAL:

• The display changes as shown below according to

the receiving condition.

SIGNAL: ■■■■■■

SIGNAL: STRONG

(Signal strength is good)

SIGNAL: ■■■■

SIGNAL: MARGINAL

(Signal strength is Marginal)

SIGNAL: ■■

SIGNAL: WEAK

(Signal strength is poor)

XM NO SIGNAL

SIGNAL: NON

(Loss of the signal)

3. Adjust the antenna location until signal strength

is good.

4. Select channel 0 (XM000) with the 3 or 4

cursor buttons of the unit or the SCAN + or

SCAN – buttons of the remote controller.

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

USE

PAGE

8002

M-DAX

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO MULTI

A/B

T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP SURR DIRECT

AUTO DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1

PCM

AAC

• The Radio ID is displayed.

XMOOORADIO ID

Note:

•

If “ANTENNA” appears in the front panel display,

the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock may not be

connected to the XM terminal on the rear panel of

this unit properly.

SWITCHING XM INFORMATION IN THE FRONT

PANEL DISPLAY

You can display XM information (such as artist name/

song title, category or signal status) for the channel

currently selected in the front panel display.

SOURCE

OFF

ON/OFF

POWER

USE

PAGE

234

1. Press the > button until PAGE 3 is displayed.

2. Select the information with the DISP (D1)

button.

Artist name/Song title

Channel category

Channel number/name

Signal Status

When the Channel number/name mode is displayed:

XMO40:DeepTrc

40:DeepTracks

(If text is more than 13 characters long, the text is

scrolled.)

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 74SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 74 07.8.24 1:16:11 PM07.8.24 1:16:11 PM

ENGLISH

When the Artist name/Song title is displayed:

NAME/TITLE

Pink Floid /

Floid / Money

The “NAME/TITLE” is displayed for 2 seconds,

followed by the artist’s name and song title.

(If artist’s name or song title is more than 13 characters

long, the text is scrolled.)

When the channel category is displayed:

CAT:Rock

Note:

• To change the display content from XM information

to unit functions, do so from the display mode.

(See “DISPLAY MODE” on page 47)

This XM information can also be displayed on a TV

monitor connected to the unit.

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

THX

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

DISP

OSD

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

AMP

1. Press the AMP button on the remote

controller.

2. Press the OSD button. The following information

display will be output.

VIDEO :DVD

AUDIO :XM

SURR-MODE :AUTO

MULTIROOMA:ON SPK:OFF

MULTIROOMB:OFF SPK:OFF

MAIN VOLUME

-------------------

3. When this display appears, press the OSD

button again. XM information like the following

will appear.

XM INFORMATION

XM :040

CHAN :DeepTracks

NAME :Pink Floid

TITLE :Money

CAT :Rock

SIGNAL:MARGINAL

4. Press the OSD button again. The information

display will go out.

Note:

•

If the information contains a character that cannot

be recognized by that unit, the character will be

displayed with “ ”(space).

SEARCH MODE

You can search for the channel you want to listen to

using one of three search modes. You can also enter

the number directly to select the desired channel.

ALL CHANNEL SEARCH MODE

USE

PAGE

PHONES

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8002

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO MULTI T-MODE

DISPLAY

EXIT

BAND

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP SURR DIRECT

AUTO DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1

PCM

AAC

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAP E

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

TUNER

(Using the unit)

1. Press the 3 or 4 cursor button on the front

panel to select the desired station.

(Using the remote controller)

1. Press the TUNER button twice within two

seconds on the remote controller.

2. Press the > button until PAGE 4 is displayed.

Press and hold the SCAN+ (D1) or SCAN− (D2)

button.

PRESET SEARCH MODE

VOL

MUTE

GUIDE

LIP.SYNC

MUTE

M-DAX

ENTER

RE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO MULTI

T-MODE MEMORY CLE

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAK

BAND

MIC

RECT

URROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP SURR DIRECT

AUTO DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1

PCM

AAC

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

TUNER

(Using the unit)

1. Press the 1 or 2 cursor button on the front

panel to select the desired preset station.

(Using the remote controller)

1. Press the TUNER button twice within two

seconds on the remote controller.

2. CH+ or CH− button to tune in the desired

preset station.

Or enter the preset station number with the

numeric buttons.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 75SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 75 07.8.24 1:16:12 PM07.8.24 1:16:12 PM

ENGLISH

CATEGORY SEARCH MODE

You can select the desired channel from the category

allocated to each channel.

Category being aired can be only selected.

M-DAX

ENTER

URE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO MULTI

A/B

T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

IRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP SURR DIRECT

AUTO DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1

PCM

AAC

VOL

USE

PAGE

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAP E

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

TUNER

(Using the unit)

1. Press the ENTER button on the front panel.

2. Press the 1 or 2 button on the front panel to

select the desired Category.

3. After selecting the Category, Press the 3 or 4

cursor button to select the desired station of the

category.

4. You can return to the normal mode by press the

ENTER button during Category Search Mode.

(Using the remote controller)

1. Press the TUNER button twice within two

seconds on the remote controller.

2. Press the > button until PAGE 4 is display.

3. Press the CAT+ (D4) or CAT− (D5) button.

4. After selecting the category, Press the SCAN+

(D1) or SCAN− (D2) button to select the

desired station of the category.

5. You can return to the normal mode by press the

OK button during Category Search Mode.

Note:

• Category search ends automatically about 5 seconds

after the last operation.

CHANNEL DIRECT CALL

You can select the desired channel by directly tapping

the numeric keypads on the remote controller.

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

TUNER

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

GUIDE

2 31

5 64

1. Press the TUNER button twice within two

seconds on the remote controller.

2. Press the GUIDE.

“XM - - -” will appear on the display.

3. Input the three digit number for your desired

Channel with the numeric keypad on the

remote controller.

4. The desired channel will automatically be

tuned.

Note:

•

If there is no input on the keypad for 5sec., the input

is cancelled to return to the original display

Notes:

•

“LOADING” is displayed while receiving the

channel or information.

•

“UPDATING” is displayed while updating encryption

code.

•

When the selected channel is not available, “XM - -

-” is dispIayed.

•

“OFF AIR” is displayed while air is suspended (e.g.

midnight).

PRESET MEMORY

You can store the desired channel in the Preset

Memory.

(You can preset 60 XM Radio stations in addition to

FM/AM stations.)

M-DAX

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO MULTI

A/B

T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

E DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP SURR DIRECT

AUTO DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1

PCM

AAC

3. 2. 4.

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

2 31

5 64

MEMO

(Using the unit)

1. Tune into the desired channel.

2. Press the MEMORY button on the front panel.

”- -” (preset number) starts blinking on the

dispIay.

--XM040

3. Select the preset number by pressing the 1

or 2 cursor buttons, While this is still blinking

(approx. 5 seconds)

01XM040

4. Press the MEMORY button again to enter.

The display stops blinking.

The station is now stored in the speciﬁ ed preset

memory location.

(Using the remote controller)

1. Tune into the desired channel.

2. Press the MEMO button on the remote

controller. “- -” (preset number) starts blinking

on the display.

3. Enter the desired preset number by pressing

the numeric buttons.

Note:

•

When entering a single digit number (2 for example),

either input “02” or just input “2” and wait for a few

seconds.

CHECKING THE XM PRESET CHANNEL

The preset channel can be checked on the on screen

display.

VOL

USE

PAGE

3.4.

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

TUNER

(Using the remote controller)

1. Press the TUNER button twice within two

seconds on the remote controller.

2. Press the > button until PAGE 2 is display.

3. Press the P-INFO (D5) button. to view a list of

tuner preset channeI on the on screen display.

4. If there are 10 or more preset channel, Press

the P-lNFO button. again.

XM PRESET LIST

NO. 1 XM010 XXXXXXXXXX

NO. 2 XM011 XXXXXXXXXX

NO. 3 XM015 XXXXXXXXXX

NO. 4 XM022 XXXXXXXXXX

NO. 5 XM125 XXXXXXXXXX

NO. 6 XM001 Preview

NO. 7 XM001 Preview

NO. 8 XM001 Preview

NO. 9 XM001 Preview

NO.10 XM001 Preview

Note:

•

The preset channel indication disappears in about 5

sec.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 76SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 76 07.8.24 1:16:13 PM07.8.24 1:16:13 PM

ENGLISH

PRESET SCAN

USE

PAGE

3.5.

DSS

AMP

AUX2

AUX1

TAPE

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

LIGHT

Learning Remote Controller

RC8001SR

TUNER

2 31

5 64

VOL

MUTE

EXIT

GUIDE

TEST

CH.SEL

LIP.SYNC

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

SLEEP

1. Press the TUNER button twice within two

seconds on the remote controller.

2. Press the > button until PAGE 2 is displayed.

3. press the P-SCAN (D4) button on the remote

controller. “PRESET SCAN” appears on the

display and then the preset station with the

lowest preset number is recalled ﬁ rst.

4. Preset stations are recalled in sequence (No.1

→ No.2 → etc.) for about 5-10 seconds each.

The time changes by the received condition. No

stored preset number will be skipped.

5. Pressing the CH+ button during prescanning

speeds up scanning.

Also, pressing the CH– button returns to the

previous preset station.

When the desired preset station is received,

cancel the preset scan operation by press the

P-SCAN (D4) button.

CLEARING STORED PRESET STATIONS

You can remove preset stations from the memory

using the following procedure.

DIGITAL

S-VIDEO

DOWN

M-DAX

ENTER

A/B

T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1

PCM

AAC

3.2.

2 31

5 64

MEMO

CLEAR

DSS

TUNER

CD-R

VCRDVD

TEST

CH.SEL

SURR

7.1CH

ATT

SPK-AB

DISP

OSD

THX

SLEEP

MEMO

CLEAR

MEMO

CLEAR

1. Recall the preset number to be cleared with

the method described in ”PRESET SEARCH

MODE”.

2. Press the MEMORY button on the front panel

or Press the MEMO button on the remote

controller.

3. The stored preset number blinks in the display

for 5 seconds. WhiIe blinking, Press the CLEAR

button on the front panel or the remote.

4. “xx CLEAR” appears on the dispIay to indicate

that the specified preset number has been

cleared.

Note:

• To clear all stored preset stations, press and hold the

CLEAR and the ENTER buttons for two seconds.

• There are 60 preset channels prepared at the factory

default. The 60 channels are all set to “CHANNEL

001”. Each channel can be stored in the preset

memory. You can search for only the preset

channels.

NEURAL SURROUND MODE

When the XM Satellite Radio broadcast received

supports XM HD Surround Sound, Surround playback

is possible in Neural Surround mode.

USE

PAGE

1. Press the > button until PAGE 2 is displayed.

2. Press the NEURAL (D4) button to tune in the

Neural surround mode.

Note:

For information on Neural Surround, see page 63.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 77SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 77 07.8.24 1:16:13 PM07.8.24 1:16:13 PM

ENGLISH

MULTI ROOM

SYSTEM

The Multiroom System mode allows the same source

or different sources to be heard in two rooms other

than where this unit is installed.

To use the multiroom system, connect the audio from

the MULTI OUT A and B AUDIO output terminals to

the MULTI ROOM A and B amps.

Note:

• The SR7002 does not have a MULTI ROOM B

setting.

Connect the VIDEO output (MULTI OUT) terminal to

the monitor in Room A.

(MULTI VIDEO OUT terminal is linked to the source

selector in Multi Room A.)

If a surround channel back speaker or speaker C

(see page 38) are not used in the room where this

unit is installed, the multi speaker system can be

used with the amp for the surround back channel.

Also, the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 2

terminal can be used for the monitor output of Room

(This feature cannot be used with the SR7002.)

This unit supports multiroom system functions such

as source selectors, OSD menu systems, sleep

timers and remote control.

MULTI ROOM PLAYBACK USING THE MULTI

ROOM OUT TERMINALS

DIGITAL

LVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

VOLUME

DOWN

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8002

M-DAX

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO MULTI

A/B

T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

POWER ON/OFF

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP SURR DIRECT

AUTO DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

2. 1.

1. Pressing the MULTI button on the unit one

time accesses the MULTI ROOM A settings.

Pressing it two times accesses the MULTI

ROOM B settings. Then, pressing it a third time

turns the multiroom feature off. (The SR7002

does not have a MULTI ROOM B setting.)

2. When the MULTI ROOM setting mode is

engaged, one of the following screens appears

on the display for 10 seconds.

– SR8002 –

* Display when MULTI ROOM A is selected

MA DVD -18dB

* Display when MULTI ROOM B is selected

MB DVD -18dB

– SR7002 –

SELECT SOURCE

3. Select an input source with the INPUT

SELECTOR knob.

4. Turn the VOLUME knob to set the volume of

the room used in the multi room system as you

like.

Note:

• The sleep timer, monaural output and other features

can also be set using the MAIN MENU.

(See page 55)

MULTI ROOM PLAYBACK USING THE MULTI

SPEAKER TERMINALS

This unit allows you to connect another set of

speakers and place them in a different room or

separated area for Iistening to music.

DIGITAL

LVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

VOLUME

DOWN

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8002

M-DAX

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO MULTI

A/B

T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

POWER ON/OFF

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP SURR DIRECT

AUTO DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

2. 1.

1. Pressing the MULTI SPEAKER button on the

unit one time accesses the MULTI SPEAKER

A settings. Pressing it two times accesses the

MULTI SPEAKER B settings. Then, pressing it

a third time turns the MULTI SPEAKER feature

off.

(The SR7002 does not have a MULTI SPEAKER

B setting.)

2. When the MULTI SPEAKER setting mode is

engaged, one of the following screens appears

on the display for 10 seconds.

– SR8002 –

* Display when MULTI SPEAKER A is selected

MSA DVD -18dB

* Display when MULTI SPEAKER B is selected

MSB DVD -18dB

– SR7002 –

M-ROOM SPKR

↓

SELECT SOURCE

3. Select an input source with the INPUT

SELECTOR knob.

4. Turn the VOLUME knob to set the volume of

the room used in the multiroom system as you

like.

Note:

• The sleep timer, monaural output and other features

can also be set using the MAIN MENU. (See page

55.)

Notes for Multi Room Speaker

• The Multiroom Speaker mode can be set for only

one of the rooms, A or B.

• The MULTI ROOM SPEAKER output terminals can

be used when Surround Back Speaker = “NONE”

in the SPEAKER SETUP menu. (See SPEAKER

SETUP, page 45)

• “The Surr. Back Speakers are in use” is displayed

when the MULTI SPEAKER button is pressed

when the Surround Back Speaker is not set to

“NONE” in the SPEAKER SETUP menu. (See

SPEAKER SETUP, page 45)

• The Multispeaker mode cannot be used at the

same time as the speaker C. When connecting for

multiroom use, set the SPEAKER C selector switch

on the rear panel to OFF.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 78SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 78 07.8.24 1:16:14 PM07.8.24 1:16:14 PM

ENGLISH

OPERATION OF THE MULTI ROOM OUTPUTS

WITH THE REMOTE CONTROL FROM MULTI A

Room A output can be operated from a room

where the unit (SR7002 or SR8002) is not installed.

This requires a separately sold IR receiver. (For

connections, see page 37.)

CHANGE THE MULTI ROOM CONTROL COMMANDS

(RC101) FOR MULTIROOM A

(When operating the unit by Multi Zone connected)

• Zone A: MULTI ROOM A Control (Default)

• Zone B: MULTI ROOM B Control

(The SR7002 does not use this zone.)

Change the control commands for each zone.

1. Press SET button and ZONE button until the

SEND indicator blinks twice.

Then backlight ﬂ ashes.

2. Press A zone button.

When the procedure is successful, the SEND

indicator will blink twice.

These buttons change a special code of each zone.

POWER ON/OFF

SOURCE

VOL +/–

MUTE

Tuner mode operation remote code (Refer to page

26)

Notes for the Multi Room System

• If the Tuner (FM or AM) is active in the main room,

you can not control any function of the tuner.In this

case, You must listen to the same station as the main

room.

OSD INFORMATION FOR THE MULTIROOM A SETUP

INFO

Press the INFO button to view the current setup as

shown below on a TV monitor connected to MULTI

VIDEO OUTPUT.

MULTI ROOM

VIDEO :DSS

AUDIO :DSS

SLEEP :90 min

MONO/ST:STEREO

OSD INFO:ENABLE

MULTI:ON MSPKR:OFF

VOL :VARI VOL :VARI

LEVEL:-20dB LEVEL:-90dB

--- MAIN ROOM STATUS ---

VIDEO:DVD AUDIO:DVD

OPERATION OF THE MULTI ROOM OUTPUTS

WITH THE REMOTE CONTROL FROM MULTI B

Room B output can be operated from a room

where the unit (SR7002 or SR8002) is not installed.

This requires a separately sold IR receiver. (For

connections, see page 37.)

Note:

The SR7002 does not use MULTIROOM B.

CHANGE THE MULTI ROOM CONTROL COMMANDS

(RC101) FOR MULTIROOM B

Change the control commands for each zone.

1. Press SET button and ZONE button until the

SEND indicator blinks twice.

Then backlight ﬂ ashes.

2. Press B zone button.

When the procedure is successful, the SEND

indicator will blink twice.

These buttons change a special code of each zone.

POWER ON/OFF

SOURCE

VOL +/–

MUTE

Tuner mode operation remote code (Refer to page

26)

Notes for the Multi Room System

• If the Tuner (FM or AM) is active in the main room,

you can not control any function of the tuner.In this

case, You must listen to the same station as the main

room.

OPERATION OF THE MULTI SPEAKER

OUTPUTS WITH THE REMOTE CONTROL

To switch to MULTI SPEAKER SYSTEM (A or B)

control, perform the following operations with the

RC101 set to MULTI ROOM A or MULTI ROOM B.

2. 1.

1. Press SET button and POWER ON button until

the SEND indicator blinks twice.

Then backlight ﬂ ashes.

2. Press the DVD button.

Note

Press the TV button at this time to return to the MULTI

ROOM settings.

3. Press ENTER button once to lock in the code.

When the procedure is successful, the SEND

indicator will blink twice.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 79SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 79 07.8.24 1:16:14 PM07.8.24 1:16:14 PM

ENGLISH

TROUBLESHOOTING

In case of trouble, check the following before calling for service:

1. Are the connections made properly ?

2. Are you operating the unit properly following the user’s guide ?

3. Are the power ampliﬁ ers and speaker working properly ?

If the unit does not operate properly, check items shown in the following table.

If your trouble cannot be recovered with the remedy actions listed in the following table, malfunction of the

internal circuitry is suspected; immediately unplug the power cable and contact your dealer, nearest Marantz

authorized dealer or the Marantz Service Center in your country.

SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY

This unit cannot be turned

up. The power plug is not connected. Connect the power plug to the outlet.

No sound and picture are

output even when power is

on.

Mute is on. Cancel mute using the remote controller.

The input cable is not connected

correctly.

See the connection diagram and connect the cables

correctly.

The master volume control is turned all

the way down.

Adjust the master volume.

The function selector position is wrong. Select correct position.

No speaker output. The headphones are connected to the

headphone jack.

Disconnect the headphones. (Speakers will not

output sound when headphones are connected.)

Incorrect Audio or Video for

selected source. Input cable connected incorrectly. Connect the cable correctly by referring to the

connection diagram.

Incorrect Audio from a

channel.

Speaker cable connected incorrectly. Connect the cable correctly by referring to the

connection diagram.

No Audio output from the

center channel speaker. The center speaker cable connection is

incomplete.

Connect the cable correctly.

STEREO has been selected for Surround

mode.

When STEREO is selected for Surround mode, no

sound will be output from the center speaker. Set

another Surround mode.

Center = NONE has been selected in

SETUP mode.

Make the correct setting.

No Audio output from the

surround speakers.

The surround speaker cable connection

is incomplete.

Connect the cable correctly.

STEREO has been selected for Surround

mode.

When STEREO has been selected for Surround

mode, no sound will be output from the surround

speaker. Set another Surround mode.

Surround = NONE has been selected in

SETUP mode.

Make the correct setting.

No Audio output from the

surround back speakers. The surround back speaker cable

connection is incomplete.

Connect the cable correctly.

Surround mode is not EX/ES mode. Set surround mode EX/ES.

Surround back = NONE has been

selected in SPEAKERS SIZE SETUP

Make the correct setting.

SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY

Can not select EX/ES mode. Surround center= NONE has been

selected in SPEAKERS SIZE SETUP

Make the correct setting.

Input signal is incompatible. Use 5.1channel source.

Can not select Pro Logic IIx

mode. Input signal is incompatible. Use 2 channel Dolby Digital input signal, PCM input

signal or analog input signal.

Can not select Neo:6 mode. Input signal is incompatible. Use 2 channel DTS input signal, PCM input signal or

analog input signal.

Can not select CSII mode. Input signal is incompatible. Use 2 channel Dolby Digital input signal, PCM input

signal or analog input signal.

No output to Subwoofer Out. Subwoofer = NONE has been selected

in SETUP mode.

Select Subwoofer = YES.

Noise is produced during

DTS-encoded CD or laser

disc play.

Analog has been selected for input. Be sure to perform digital connection, select digital

input, then play.

A speciﬁ c channel does not

produce output. Nothing recorded on source. Check the encoded channel on the source side.

FM or AM reception fails. Antenna connection is incomplete. Correctly connect the indoor FM and AM antennas

to FM and AM antenna outlets.

Noise is heard during AM

reception. Reception is affected by other electrical

ﬁ elds.

Try changing location where the AM indoor antenna

is set up.

Noise is heard during FM

reception. The radio waves from the broadcasting

station are weak.

Install an FM outdoor antenna.

Cannot get programmed

station when the PRESET

button is pressed.

Preset data has been erased. Disconnecting power plug for long periods of time

will erase preset data. If that happens, input the

preset data again.

Control with the remote

controller fails. Batteries are consumed. Replace all the batteries with new ones.

Remote controller's function-key setting

is wrong.

Select different position from which equipment will

be controlled.

The distance between this unit and the

remote commander is too far.

Move closer to this unit.

Something is blocking the unit and the

remote commander.

Remove offending object.

Auto Setup (SPEAKER

SETUP) is not working. Headphones are connected. Disconnect the headphones.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 80SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 80 07.8.24 1:16:15 PM07.8.24 1:16:15 PM

ENGLISH

HDMI

SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY

The display does not

appear over an HDMI

connection.

The connected monitor or projector

does not support HDCP.

The HDMI input of on the TV is

not on.

Set HDMI input so that it turns on, as

explained in the TV's instruction manual.

The HDMI output on the source

component (DVD, Set Top Box,

etc.) is not on.

Set HDMI output so that it turns on, as

explained in the source component's

instruction manual.

The HDMI mode is not correctly

set on the unit.

Set HDMI input on the FUNC INPUT

SETUP menu as explained on page 43.

The HDMI output video resolution

of the source component (DVD,

Set Top Box, etc.) does not match

the TV speciﬁ cations.

Set the resolution so that it matches, as

explained in the instruction manuals of both

components.

The device is connected with a

non-standard HDMI cable.

A 5 m or shorter cable is recommended to

ensure stable operation and prevent image

quality deterioration.

Power to the unit is off. (When

the unit is on standby, HDMI

connections cannot be turned

on.)

Turn on the power to the unit.

The connection between

HDMI components was not

authenticated.

Shut off and then turn the power back on to

the unit, TV and source component.

Time is needed for the

display of an HDMI

connection to appear.

The connection is being

authenticated between the HDMI

devices.

There is nothing wrong with the system.

Some HDMI devices require time for

authentication.

Audio is not played

back over an HDMI

connection.

The HDMI audio output of the

source component (DVD, Set Top

Box, etc.) is not on.

Set the HDMI audio output so that it turns

on, as explained in the source component's

instruction manual.

The signal format of the source

component (DVD, Set Top Box,

etc.) is not supported by the unit.

Set the HDMI audio output so that it can

connect to the unit, as explained in the

source component's instruction manual.

This unit is set to the HDMI audio

“THROUGH” mode.

In the “THROUGH” mode, sound is not

produced from the unit. Set it to “ENABLE”.

(see page 54)

DVD-Audio is not played

back over an HDMI

connection.

The DVD player does not support

CPPM, therefore it cannot output

HDMI audio.

• Use a DVD-Audio player that supports

CPPM.

• Turn on PCM downsampling on the DVD

player.

• Use an analog connection.

XM SATELLITE RADIO

If a problem should arise, ﬁ rst check the following.

1. Are the connections correct?

2. Have you operated the receiver according to the operating instructions?

3. Are the speakers and other components operating properIy?

If this unit is not operating properly, Check the items listed in the table beIow. Should the problem persist, there

may be a malfunction. Disconnect the power immediately and contact your store of purchase.

SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY

“ANTENNA” is displayed. XM terminal and the XM Mini-Tuner and

Home Dock is not properly connected. Check that the connection are correct.

“NO SIGNAL” is displayed. The signal cannot be received. Reposition your XM Mini-Tuner and Home

Dock.

Receiving only XM channels 0 and 1. The XM Tuner is not activated. Contact XM Radio.

PROTECTIVE FEATURE

In some cases, the STANDBY indicator may blink slowly, twice per second. In this case, turn off the unit, unplug

the power cord, and check the following points.

• Make sure the speaker cables are not reversed and connected to the wrong sides (+ and -) on the unit.

• Make sure the speaker cables connected to the unit are not shorted. (Check both the unit end and the speaker

end.)

• Make sure the volume does not exceed the level that the unit is capable of producing.

• When using the unit in a rack or other enclosed space, heat may build up inside the unit and cause a ﬁ re. When

installing the unit, be sure to leave sufﬁ cient space between the top, back and both sides of the unit and walls or

other AV components to prevent the internal temperature from rising.

After checking these points, plug in the power cord and use the remote controller to turn on the unit. Turn down

the volume before resuming playback. Conﬁ rm that there are no problems with the speaker connections and

playback performance.

If this symptom recurs, request service at your nearest service center.

In rare instances, the unit may enter standby mode and the STANDBY indicator may blink rapidly, 8 times per

second. In this case, unplug the power cord and request service at your nearest service center.

HD Radio RECEPTION

SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY

The signal is not digital, even when

receiving from an HD Radio station.

(SR8002 only)

Reception is affected by other electrical

ﬁ elds. (AM) Try changing location where the AM

indoor antenna is set up.

The radio waves from the broadcasting

station are weak. (FM) Install an FM outdoor antenna.

The signal sometimes switches from

digital to analog or the sound cuts out

when receiving from an HD Radio station.

(SR8002 only)

Reception is affected by other electrical

ﬁ elds. (AM) Set the TUNER MODE to Analog Auto

mode or Analog Mono mode.

Note:

In this case you cannot receive a

digital signal. (See page.70)

The radio waves from the broadcasting

station are weak. (FM)

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 81SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 81 07.8.24 1:16:15 PM07.8.24 1:16:15 PM

ENGLISH

DIMENSIONS

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

VOLUME

DOWN

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8002

M-DAX

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO MULTI

A/B

T-MO D E MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

POWER ON/OFF

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP SURR DIRECT

AUTO DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 EQ

PCM

AAC

7-1/4 ins.

(184 mm)

9/16 ins.

(14 mm)

6-3/4 ins.

(170 mm)

17-5/16 ins.

(440 mm)

13/16 ins.

(20 mm)

15-5/8 ins.

(396 mm)

7/8 ins.

(22 mm)

13-15/16 ins.

(354 mm)

FM TUNER SECTION

Frequency Range ................................ 87.5 – 107.9 MHz

Usable Sensitivity ............................IHF 1.8 µV/16.4 dBf

Signal to Noise Ratio ................... Mono/Stereo 75/70 dB

Distortion ......................................Mono/Stereo 0.2/0.3 %

HD Radio (SR8002 only) ...................................... 0.02 %

Stereo Separation .........................................1 kHz 45 dB

HD Radio (SR8002 only) ..............................1 kHz 85 dB

Alternate Channel Selectivity .................± 400 kHz 60 dB

Image Rejection ......................................98.1 MHz 70 dB

Tuner Output Level ........... 1 kHz, ± 75 kHz Dev 800 mV

AM TUNER SECTION

Frequency Range ................................... 530 – 1710 kHz

Signal to Noise Ratio .............................................. 50 dB

Usable Sensitivity ......................................... Loop 500µV

Distortion ...................................400Hz, 30 % Mod. 0.5 %

HD Radio (SR8002 only) ..............................1Hz, 0.02 %

Selectivity .................................................± 20 kHz 70 dB

AUDIO SECTION

SR7002

Power Output (20 Hz – 20 kHz/THD=0.08%)

Front L&R ..........................................8 ohms 110 W / Ch

Center ................................................8 ohms 110 W / Ch

Surround L&R ....................................8 ohms 110 W / Ch

Surround Back L&R ........................... 8 ohms 110 W / Ch

Front L&R ..........................................6 ohms 140 W / Ch

Center ................................................6 ohms 140 W / Ch

Surround L&R ....................................6 ohms 140 W / Ch

Surround Back L&R ...........................6 ohms 140 W / Ch

SR8002

Power Output (20 Hz – 20 kHz/THD=0.08%)

Front L&R ..........................................8 ohms 125 W / Ch

Center ................................................8 ohms 125 W / Ch

Surround L&R ....................................8 ohms 125 W / Ch

Surround Back L&R ...........................8 ohms 125 W / Ch

Front L&R ..........................................6 ohms 160 W / Ch

Center ................................................6 ohms 160 W / Ch

Surround L&R ....................................6 ohms 160 W / Ch

Surround Back L&R ...........................6 ohms 160 W / Ch

Input Sensitivity/Impedance ...............168 mV/ 47 Kohms

Signal to Noise Ratio(Analog Input / Pure Direct) ....105 dB

Frequency Response

(Analog Input / Pure Direct)

...........................................8 Hz – 100 kHz (± 3 dB)

(Digital Input / 96 kHz PCM)

............................................ 8 Hz – 45 kHz (± 3 dB)

VIDEO

Television Format ....................................................NTSC

Input Level/Impedance ...........................1 Vp-p/75 ohms

Output Level/Impedance ......................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms

Video Frequency Response .......5 Hz to 8 MHz (– 1 dB)

Video Frequency (Component)

....5 Hz to 80 MHz (– 1 dB)

S/N ..........................................................................60 dB

HDMI

Version .........................................................1.3a [INPUT]

.........................................................1.3a [OUTPUT]

GENERAL

Power Requirement ................................AC 120 V 60 Hz

Power Consumption .................................6.5A (SR7002)

..........................................................6.7A (SR8002)

Weight ..................................33.1 lbs (15.0 Kg) (SR7002)

.....................................33.1 lbs (15.0 Kg) (SR8002)

Speciﬁ cations subject to change without prior notice.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ACCESSORIES

Remote Control Unit RC8001SR ................................... 1

Remote Control Unit RC101 .......................................... 1

Microphone .................................................................... 1

AAA-size batteries ......................................................... 5

FM Antenna (SR7002) ................................................... 1

FM Feeder Antenna (SR8002) ....................................... 1

FM Antenna Converter (SR8002) .................................. 1

AM Loop Antenna .......................................................... 1

Front AUX Jack Cover ................................................... 1

AC cable ........................................................................ 1

DIGITAL

RLVIDEO

S-VIDEO

AUX 1 INPUT

AUDIO

VOLUME

DOWN

STANDBY

PHONES

INPUT SELECTOR

AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8002

M-DAX

ENTER

PURE DIRECT THX

7.1CH INPUT

MODE AUTO MULTI

A/B

T-MODE MEMORY CLEAR

DISPLAY

EXIT

SPEAKERS

BAND

MIC

PURE DIRECT

SURROUND

SPEAKER

MULTI

DSD

POWER ON/OFF

SL S SR

LFE

DIGITAL

SURROUND

V-OFFDISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST SPKR A B

NIGHT

PEAK ANALOG

DIGITAL

ATT

SLEEP SURR DIRECT

AUTO DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1

PCM

AAC

EXITMULTIAUTO SPEAKERS A/B

FRONT KEY (BUTTON) LOCK OF THE UNIT

To lock all front panel buttons (except the POWER

ON/OFF button) and the INPUT SELECTER and

VOLUME knobs, hold the AUTO and EXIT buttons on

the front panel simultaneously for at least 3 seconds.

At this time, “F-KEY LOCK!” is displayed.

To unlock the controls, press the same buttons again

simultaneously for at least 3 seconds. At this time,

“F-KEY UNLOCK” is displayed, and the buttons are

released.

GENERAL MALFUNCTION

If the equipment malfunctions, this may be because

an electrostatic discharge or AC line interference has

corrupted the information in the equipment memory

circuits. Therefore:

- disconnect the plug from the AC line supply

- after waiting at least three minutes, reconnect

the plug to the AC line supply

- re-attempt to operate the equipment

Memory backup

• In case a power outage occurs or the power

cord is accidentally unplugged, this unit is

equipped with a backup function to prevent

memory data such as the preset memory

from being erased.

HOW TO RESET THE UNIT

Should the operation or display seem to be abnormal,

reset the unit with the following procedure.

This unit is turned on, press and hold the MULTI

+ SPEAKERS A/B buttons simultaneously for 3

seconds or more.

Remember that the procedure will reset the settings

of the function selector, Surround mode, delay time,

TUNER PRESET etc., to their initial settings.

SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 82SR7002-8002_U_01_ENG 3_3.indd 82 07.8.24 1:16:15 PM07.8.24 1:16:15 PM

SETUP CODES

(RC8001SR)

AMPLIFIER

Source button name : AMP

Brand name Setup code

Amstrad 0105

Arcam 0296

Audiolab 0296

Carver 0296

GE 0105

Genexxa 0422

Grundig 0296

Harman/Kardon 0919

JVC 0358

Left Coast 0919

Linn 0296

Magnavox 0296

Marantz 0919, 0296

Micromega 0296

Myryad 0296

Optimus 0422

Panasonic 0335

Philips 0919, 0296

Pioneer 0040

Polk Audio 0919, 0296

Realistic 0422

Revox 0296

Sony 0247

Soundesign 0105

Technics 0335

Thorens 0296

Victor 0358

Wards 0105, 0040

Yamaha 0381

RECEIVER/TUNER

Source button name : AMP, TUNER

Brand name Setup code

ADC 0558

Aiwa 1432, 0185, 1116, 1415, 1668

Alco 1417

Anam 1636

Apex Digital 1284

Audiolab 1216

Audiotronic 1216

Audiovox 1417

Bose 1256

Cambridge 1397

Soundworks

Capetronic 0558

Carver 1216, 1116

Centrex 1284

Denon 1387

Ferguson 0558

Fine Arts 1216

Grundig 1216

RECEIVER/TUNER

Source button name : AMP, TUNER

Brand name Setup code

Harman/ Kardon 0137, 1331

Integra 0162, 1325

JBL 0137, 1333

JVC 0101, 0558, 1401, 1522

KLH 1417, 1439

Kenwood 1340, 1054

MCS 0066

Magnavox 1216, 1296, 0558, 1116

Marantz 1216, 0066, 1116, 1316

Micromega 1216

Musicmagic 1116

Myryad 1216

NAD 0347

Norcent 1416

Onkyo 0162, 0869, 1325

Optimus 1050, 0558

Panasonic 1545, 0066, 1315, 1790

Philips 1216, 1296, 1116, 1293, 1295, 1310, 1316

Pioneer 1050, 0041, 0558, 1411

Polk Audio 1316

Proscan 1281

Quasar 0066

RCA 1050, 1636, 1281, 0558, 1417

Saba 0558

Sansui 1116

Schneider 0558

Sony 1085, 0185, 1185, 1685, 1785

Stereophonics

1050

Sunﬁ re 1340

Teac 1417

Technics 1335, 1545, 0066, 1336

Telefunken 0558

Thomson 1281

Thorens 1216

Uher 0558

Venturer 1417

Victor 0101

Wards 0185, 0041

Yamaha 0203, 1203, 1358

CABLE

Source button name : AUX1

Brand name Setup code

ABC 0030, 0035

Americast 0926

Bell South 0926

Birmingham Cable 0303

Communications

British Telecom

0030

Cable & Wireless 1095

Daeryung 0904, 1904, 0504, 0035

Director 0503

Filmnet 0470

General 0503, 0837, 0303,

CABLE

Source button name : AUX1

Brand name Setup code

GoldStar 0171

Hamlin 0036, 0300

Instrument 0030

Jerrold 0503, 0837, 0303, 0030

LG 0171

MNet 0470

Memorex 0027

Motorola 0503, 0837, 0303, 1133

NTL 1095

Noos 0844

Ono 1095

PVP Stereo 0030

Visual Matrix

Pace 0264, 1087, 1095

Panasonic 0027, 0035, 0134

Paragon 0027

Philips 0332, 0344

Pioneer 0904, 1904, 0171, 0560

Pulsar 0027

Quasar 0027

Regal 0306, 0300

Runco 0027

Sagem 0844

Samsung 0027, 0171

Scientiﬁ c Atlanta 0904, 1904, 0504, 0035

Sony 1033

Starcom 0030

Supercable 0303

TS 0030

Tele+1 0470

Telewest 1095

Torx 0030

Toshiba 0027

Trans PX 0303

United Cable 0030

Zenith 0027, 0552, 0926

SATELLITE

Source button name : DSS

Brand name Setup code

@sat 1327

ABsat 0150

Alba 0482

AlphaStar 0799

Amstrad 0874

Aston 0169, 1156

Astro 0200

Atsat 1327

Avalon 0423

Blaupunkt 0200

British Sky 0874, 1202

Broadcasting

Canal Digital 0880

Canal Satellite

0880

SATELLITE

Source button name : DSS

Brand name Setup code

Canal+ 0880

Chaparral 0243

Citycom 1203

Connexions 0423

Crossdigital 1136

Cyrus 0227

D-box 0750, 1154

DMT 1102

DNT 0227, 0423

Daeryung 0423

Daewoo 1323

Digenius 0326

DirecTV 0419, 0593, 0666, 1169, 0274, 0776, 1776, 0751,

0846, 1883, 1103, 1136

Dish Network System 1032, 0802

DishPro 1032, 0802

Distratel 0111

Dream Multimedia 1264

Echostar 1032, 0802, 0194, 0423, 0637, 0880, 0898, 1113

Engel 1044

Expressvu 0802

FTE 0890

Finlux 0482

Fracarro 0898

Fuba 0423

GE 0593

GOI 0802

Galaxis 0890, 1138

General Instrument 0896

Gold Box 0880

Grundig 0200, 0874

HTS 0802

Hirschmann 0200, 0423

Hitachi 0846, 0482

Hughes

1169, 0776, 1776

Network Systems

Humax 0890, 1203

InVideo 0898

JVC 0802

Kathrein 0150, 0200, 0227, 0276, 0685, 1248

Kreiselmeyer 0200

Labgear 1323

Logix 1044

Lorenzen 0326

Magnavox 0751, 0749

Manhattan 0482, 1044, 1110

Marantz 0227

MediaSat 0880

Memorex 0751

Metronic 0111

Mitsubishi 0776

Motorola 0896

Myryad 0227

Next Level 0896

SR7002-8002_U_00_Setup.indd iSR7002-8002_U_00_Setup.indd i 07.8.24 1:16:34 PM07.8.24 1:16:34 PM

SATELLITE

Source button name : DSS

Brand name Setup code

Nokia 0482, 0750, 0778, 1154, 1250, 1750

OctalTV 1032

Orbitech 1127

Pace 0482, 0874, 1202, 1350

Panasonic 0274, 0728, 0874, 1347

Panda 0482

Paysat 0751

Philips 1169, 0776, 1776, 0751, 1103, 0749, 0160, 0227,

0482, 0880

Pioneer 0880

Promax 0482

Proscan 0419, 0593

RCA 0419, 0593, 0882, 0170

RFT 0227

RadioShack 0896

Radiola 0227

Radix 0423

SKY 0883, 0874, 1202

SM Electronic 1227

Sabre 0482

Sagem 0847, 1141, 1280

Samsung 1303, 1136, 1044, 1319

Sat Control 1327

Satstation 1110

Schwaiger 1138

Seemann 0423

Siemens 0200

Sony 0666, 1666, 0874

Star Choice 0896

Strong 1327

TPS 0847, 1280

Tantec 0482

TechniSat 1126, 1127

Telestar 1127

Thomson 0482, 0880, 1073, 1318

Topﬁ eld 1233

Toshiba 0776, 1776, 0817

UltimateTV 0419, 0666

Uniden 0751, 0749

Universum 0200

Ventana 0227

Wisi 0200, 0423, 0482

XSat 0150

Zehnder 1102

Zenith 0883, 1883

TAPE DECK

Source button name : TAPE

Brand name Setup code

Aiwa 0056

Carver 0056

Grundig 0056

Harman/Kardon 0056

Magnavox 0056

Marantz 0056

Myryad 0056

Optimus 0054

Philips 0056

Pioneer 0054

Polk Audio 0056

RCA 0054

Revox 0056

Sansui 0056

Sony 0270

Thorens 0056

Wards 0054

LASER DISK

Source button name : AUX2

Brand name Setup code

Carver 0091

Denon 0086

Marantz 0091

Mitsubishi 0086

NAD 0086

Nagsmi 0086

Optimus 0086

Philips 0091

Pioneer 0086

Salora 0091

Sony 0228

Telefunken 0086

CD/CD-R PLAYER

Source button name : CD, CDR, MD

Brand name Setup code

Aiwa 0184

Arcam 0184

Audio Research 0184

AudioTon 0184

Audiolab 0184

Audiomeca 0184

Cairn 0184

California Audio Labs 0056

Carver 0184, 0206

Cyrus 0184

DKK 0027

DMX Electronics

0184

Denon 0900

Dynamic Bass

0206

Emerson 0332

Fisher 0206

CD/CD-R PLAYER

Source button name : CD, CDR, MD

Brand name Setup code

Genexxa 0059, 0332

Goodmans 0332

Grundig 0184

Harman/ Kardon 0184, 0200

Hitachi 0059

JVC 0099

Kenwood 0708, 0653, 0055, 0064

Krell 0184

LXI 0332

Linn 0184

MCS 0056

Magnavox 0184, 0332

Marantz 0653, 0056, 0184

Matsui 0184

Memorex 0332

Meridian 0184

Micromega 0184

Miro 0027

Mission 0184

Myryad 0184

NAD 0027

NSM 0184

Naim 0184

Onkyo 0895

Optimus 0027, 0059, 0064, 0206, 0332

Panasonic 0056

Philips 0653, 0184

Pioneer 0059, 0332

Polk Audio 0184

Proton 0184

QED 0184

Quad 0184

Quasar 0056

RCA 0059, 0206, 0332

Realistic 0206

Revox 0184

Rotel 0184

SAE 0184

Sansui 0184, 0332

Sanyo 0206

Scott 0332

Sears 0332

Sharp 0888, 0064

Simaudio 0184

Sonic Frontiers

0184

Sony 0517, 0027

Symphonic 0332

AG McLaren

0184

Tandy 0059

Technics 0056

Thorens 0184

Thule 0184

Universum 0184

Victor 0099

Wards 0184

Source button name : TV

Brand name Setup code

MARANTZ 0001

TV1 (TV, VDP)

MARANTZ 0002

TV2 (Plasma)

AGB 0543

AOC 0478, 0120, 0207, 0087, 0057, 0205, 0036, 0119,

0135

ASA 0131

AWA 0036

Acura 0036

Addison 0119, 0135, 0680

Admiral 0120, 0490, 0190

Advent 0788

Aiko 0119

Akai 0839, 0729, 0057, 0036, 0235, 0388, 0543

Akura 0291

Alba 0036, 0064, 0398, 0695

America Action

0207

Ampro 0778

Amstrad 0198, 0036, 0064, 0398, 0439, 0460, 0543

Anam 0277, 0207, 0036

Anam National

0277, 0677

Anitech 0036

Apex Digital 0775, 0792, 0794

Audiosonic 0064, 0136

Audiovox 0478, 0207, 0119, 0650

Bang & Olufsen

0592

Basic Line 0036

Baur 0064, 0388, 0539

Baysonic 0207

Beaumark 0205

Beko 0397, 0513, 0741, 0742

Bell & Howell 0181

Beon 0064

Blaupunkt 0222

Blue Sky 0695, 1064

Bondstec 0274

Bradford 0207

Brandt 0136, 0362

Broksonic 0263, 0490

Bush 0036, 0064, 0398, 0401, 0695, 1064

CCE 0064

CGE 0274

CTC 0274

CXC 0207

Candle 0057

Carnivale 0057

Carver 0081, 0197

Cascade 0036

Cathay 0064

Celebrity 0027

Celera 0792

Centurion 0064

Changhong 0792

Ching Tai 0036, 0119

SR7002-8002_U_00_Setup.indd iiSR7002-8002_U_00_Setup.indd ii 07.8.24 1:16:35 PM07.8.24 1:16:35 PM

iii

Source button name : TV

Brand name Setup code

Chun Yun 0027, 0207, 0036, 0119

Chung Hsin 0207, 0080, 0135

Cimline 0036

Cineral 0478, 0119

Citizen 0087, 0057, 0119

Clarion 0207

Clarivox 0064

Clatronic 0274, 0397

Condor 0347, 0397

Conrac 0835

Contec 0207, 0036

Craig 0207

Crosley 0081

Crown 0207, 0036, 0064, 0397, 0445

Curtis Mathes 0074, 0081, 0181, 0478, 0120, 0087, 0729, 0057,

0172, 0193, 1174, 1374

Daewoo 0181, 0478, 0207, 0057, 0205, 1688, 0036, 0064,

0119, 0135, 0197, 0401, 0650, 0661

Dansai 0064

Dayton 0036

De Graaf 0235, 0575

Decca 0064, 0543

Denon 0172

Digatron 0064

Dixi 0036, 0064

Dumont 0044

Dwin 0747, 0801

ECE 0064

Elbe 0286

Electroband 0027

Elin 0064, 0575

Elite 0347

Elta 0036

Emerson 0181, 0263, 0490, 0207, 0205, 0388, 0650

Envision 0057, 0840

Epson 0860

Erres 0064

Ether 0057, 0036

Etron 0036

Europhon 0543

Ferguson 0064, 0100, 0136, 0265, 0314, 0362, 0587

Fidelity 0388

Finlandia 0235, 0373

Finlux 0064, 0131, 0132, 0373, 0543

Firstar 0263, 0036

Firstline 0036, 0274, 0695

Fisher 0181, 0131, 0235, 0397

Flint 0482

Formenti 0064, 0347

Fortress 0120

Frontech 0190, 0274, 0291

Fujitsu 0710, 0836

Funai 0207, 0198, 0291

Futuretech 0207

Source button name : TV

Brand name Setup code

GE 0074, 0078, 0478, 0207, 0057, 0205, 1481, 0119,

0587, 1174, 1374

GEC 0064, 0543

Gateway 1782, 1783

Geloso 0036

Genexxa 0190

Gibralter 0044, 0057

GoldStar 0181, 0057, 0205, 0064, 0136, 0404

Goodmans 0064, 0398, 0401, 0661

Gorenje 0397

Gradiente 0080, 0197

Graetz 0190, 0388

Granada 0064, 0235, 0366, 0543

Grandin 0637

Grundig 0064, 0222, 0514, 0583, 0614

Grunpy 0207

HCM 0036, 0439

Hallmark 0205

Hankook 0207, 0057, 0205

Hanseatic 0064, 0347, 0388, 0455, 0583

Hantarex 0543

Harman/Kardon

0081

Harvard 0207

Havermy 0120

Hello Kitty 0478

Hinari 0036, 0064

Hisawa 0482

Hitachi 0057, 0205, 1172, 0172, 1283, 0036, 0119,

0132,0136, 0190, 0252, 0383, 0508, 0575, 0605

Hua Tun 0036

Huanyu 0401

Hypson 0064, 0291

ICE 0291, 0398

ITS 0398

ITT 0190, 0388, 0575

Imperial 0274, 0397, 0445

Indiana 0064

Inﬁ nity 0081

Ingelen 0190

Inno Hit 0543

Innova 0064

Inteq 0044

Interfunk 0064, 0190, 0274, 0388, 0539

Intervision 0064, 0291, 0404

JBL 0081

JCB 0027

JVC 0490, 0080, 0398, 0680, 0710

Jean 0183, 0078, 0263, 0036, 0119

Jensen 0788

KEC 0207

KTV 0207, 0057

Kaisui 0036

Kapsch 0190

Karcher 0637

Source button name : TV

Brand name Setup code

Kathrein 0583

Kendo 0064

Kenwood 0057

Kneissel 0286, 0462

Kolin 0207, 0080, 0135

Korpel 0064

Koyoda 0036

L&S Electronic

0835

LG 0087, 0057, 0205, 0064, 0135, 0741

LXI 0074, 0081, 0181, 0183, 0205

Leyco 0064, 0291

Liesenk & Tter 0064

Loewe 0539

Luxor 0383, 0388

M Electronic 0036, 0064, 0131, 0132, 0136, 0190, 0314, 0373,

0401, 0507

MGA 0177, 0057, 0205

MTC 0087, 0057, 0539

Magnadyne 0274, 0543

Magnafon 0543

Magnavox 0081, 0057, 1481, 1281

Manesth 0291, 0347

Mark 0064

Matsui 0036, 0064, 0235, 0398, 0514, 0543

Matsushita 0277, 0677

Mediator 0064

Medion 0695, 0835, 1064

Megatron 0205, 0172

Memorex 0181, 0277, 0490, 0177, 0205, 0036, 1064

Metz 0474

Micromaxx 0835

Microstar 0835

Midland 0074, 0044, 0078

Minerva 0514

Minoka 0439

Mitsubishi 0181, 0277, 0120, 0263, 0207, 0177, 1277, 0057,

0205, 0135, 0539, 0863

Mivar 0318, 0319, 0543, 0636

Motorola 0120

Multitech 0207, 0036

Myryad 0583

NAD 0183, 0205, 0388, 0893

NEC 0181, 0183, 0078, 0057, 0205, 0036, 0197, 0482,

0524, 1731

NEI 0064

NTC 0119

Neckermann 0064, 0583

Netsat 0064

Newave 0120, 0205, 0036, 0119

Nikkai 0064, 0291

Nikko 0057, 0205, 0119

Nokia 0388, 0500, 0507, 0575, 0658

Norcent 0775, 0851

Nordmende 0136, 0314, 0587

Oceanic 0190, 0388

Source button name : TV

Brand name Setup code

Onwa 0207, 0460

Optimus 0181, 0277, 0193, 0677

Optonica 0120

Orion 0263, 0490, 0064, 0347, 0543

Osaki 0291, 0439

Otto Versand 0064, 0347, 0539, 0583

Palladium 0397, 0445

Panama 0291

Panasonic 0081, 0277, 0078, 0064, 0190, 0677, 1437

Pathe Cinema

0265, 0347

Pausa 0036

Penney 0074, 0183, 0078, 0087, 0057, 0205, 1374

Perdio 0347

Philco 0081, 0490, 0207, 0057, 0205, 0172, 1688, 0064,

0274

Philips 0081, 0027, 0078, 0057, 0205, 1481, 0064, 0119,

0135, 0401, 0583, 0717

Phonola 0064

Pilot 0057

Pioneer 0193, 0136, 0190, 0314, 0706, 0787, 0893

Portland 0119

Prandoni-Prince 0543

Prima 0788

Prism 0078

Profex 0036, 0388

Proscan 0074

Protech 0036, 0064, 0274, 0291, 0445, 0695

Proton 0057, 0205, 0036

Pulsar 0044

Quasar 0277, 0078, 0677

Quelle 0064, 0131, 0388, 0539

R-Line 0064

RCA 0074, 0027, 0057, 0205, 1474, 1481, 0117, 0119,

0706, 1074, 1174, 1274, 1374, 1574

RFT 0455

RadioShack 0074, 0181, 0207, 0057, 0205

Radiola 0064

Radiomarelli 0543

Realistic 0181, 0207, 0057, 0205

Rediffusion 0388

Reoc 0741

Revox 0064

Rex 0190, 0286, 0291

Roadstar 0036, 0291, 0445

Runco 0044, 0057, 0524, 0630

SBR 0064

SEG 0291, 0695

SEI 0543

SKY 0064

SSS 0207

Saba 0136, 0190, 0314, 0362

Saccs 0265

Sagem 0637

Saisho 0036, 0291, 0543

Salora 0190, 0383, 0388, 0575

SR7002-8002_U_00_Setup.indd iiiSR7002-8002_U_00_Setup.indd iii 07.8.24 1:16:35 PM07.8.24 1:16:35 PM

Source button name : TV

Brand name Setup code

Sambers 0543

Sampo 0181, 0120, 0057, 0205, 0198, 0036, 0119, 0677,

1782

Samsung 0181, 0087, 0839, 0729, 0057, 0205, 0036, 0064,

0117, 0119, 0291, 0397, 0583, 0614, 0645, 0793,

0841

Sansei 0478

Sansui 0490

Sanyo 0181, 0207, 0131, 0235, 0366, 0826

Schaub Lorenz

0388

Schneider 0064, 0274, 0398, 0695

Scotch 0205

Scott 0263, 0207, 0205

Sears 0074, 0081, 0181, 0183, 0205, 0198

Seleco 0190, 0286

Semivox 0207

Semp 0183

Sharp 0120, 0057, 0677

Shen Ying 0036, 0119

Sheng Chia 0120, 0263, 0036

Siarem 0543

Siemens 0064, 0222

Sinudyne 0543

Skantic 0383

Skygiant 0207

Skyworth 0064

Solavox 0190

Sonitron 0235

Sonoko 0036, 0064

Sonolor 0190, 0235

Sontec 0064

Sony 1127, 0027, 0677, 0861, 1532, 1678

Soundesign 0207, 0205

Soundwave 0064, 0445

Sowa 0183, 0078, 0087, 0205, 0119

Squareview 0198

Standard 0036

Starlite 0207

Stern 0190, 0286

Supreme 0027

Sylvania 0081, 0057, 0198

Symphonic 0207, 0198

Synco 0027, 0478, 0120, 0087, 0205, 0119

Sysline 0064

T + A 0474

TCM 0835

TMK 0205

TNCi 0044

TVS 0490

Tacico 0205, 0036, 0119

Tai Yi 0036

Tandy 0120, 0190

Tashiko 0119, 0677

Tatung 0081, 0181, 0183, 0078, 0087, 0036, 0064, 0543

Source button name : TV

Brand name Setup code

Teac 0036, 0064, 0291, 0439, 0445, 0482, 0695, 1064

Tec 0274

Technema 0347

Technics 0277, 0078, 0677

Techwood 0078

Teco 0078, 0120, 0205, 0036, 0119, 0291, 0680

Teknika 0081, 0207, 0177, 0087, 0119

Telefunken 0729, 0136, 0289, 0362, 0652

Telemeister 0347

Teletech 0036

Tensai 0347

Tera 0057

Thomson 1474, 0136, 0314, 0587, 0652

Thorn 0064, 0131, 0388, 0539

Toshiba 0181, 0183, 0087, 1283, 0535, 0645, 0677, 0859,

1383, 1683, 1731

Triumph 0543

Tuntex 0057, 0036, 0119

Uher 0347

Universum 0064, 0131, 0132, 0291, 0373, 0397, 0519

Vector Research 0057

Vestel 0064

Victor 0277, 0080, 0677, 0680

Videosat 0274

Vidikron 0081

Vidtech 0205

ViewSonic 1782

Vision 0347

Voxson 0190

Waltham 0383

Wards 0081, 0057, 0205, 0893

Watson 0064, 0347

Waycon 0183

White Westinghouse 0490, 0064, 0347,0650

Yamaha 0057, 0796, 0860

Yapshe 0277

Yoko 0064, 0291

Zenith 0044, 0490, 0205, 0119

VCR

Source button name : VCR

Brand name Setup code

ASA 0064, 0108

Admiral 0075

Adventura 0027

Aiko 0305

Aiwa 0064, 0027, 0334, 0375, 0379

Akai 0068, 0342

Akiba 0099

Alba 0099, 0305, 0342, 0379

America Action

0305

American High 0062

Amstrad 0027

VCR

Source button name : VCR

Brand name Setup code

Anam 0064, 0267, 0305, 0253, 0507

Anam National 0253, 1589

Anitech 0099

Asha 0267

Asuka 0064

Audiovox 0064, 0305

Baird 0027, 0131, 0068

Basic Line 0099, 0305

Beaumark 0267

Bell & Howell 0131

Blaupunkt 0253

Brandt 0347

Brandt Electronic 0068

Broksonic 0211, 0375, 1506

Bush 0099, 0305, 0379

CCE 0099, 0305

CGE 0027

Calix 0064

Canon 0062

Carver 0108

Cimline 0099

Cineral 0305

Citizen 0064, 0305, 1305

Colt 0099

Combitech 0379

Craig 0064, 0074, 0267, 0099

Crown 0099, 0305

Curtis Mathes 0087, 0062, 0068, 1062

Cybernex 0267

Cyrus 0108

Daewoo 0072, 0131, 0305, 0669, 1305

Dansai 0099

De Graaf 0069

Decca 0108, 0027

Denon 0069

Dual 0068

Dumont 0108, 0027, 0131

Dynatech 0027

ESC 0267, 0305

Elcatech 0099

Electrohome 0064

Electrophonic 0064

Emerex 0059

Emerson 0062, 0064, 0211, 0267, 0072, 0027, 0070, 0305,

1305, 1506

Ferguson 0068, 0347

Fidelity 0027

Finlandia 0108, 0131

Finlux 0108, 0027, 0069, 0131

Firstline 0064, 0072, 0070, 0099

Fisher 0074, 0131

Fuji 0062, 0060

Fujitsu 0072, 0027

Funai 0027

GE 0087, 0062, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087

VCR

Source button name : VCR

Brand name Setup code

GEC 0108

Garrard 0027

General 0072

Go Video 0459

GoldHand 0099

GoldStar 0064, 0252, 0507, 1264

Goodmans 0064, 0027, 0099, 0305

Gradiente 0027

Graetz 0267, 0131, 0068

Granada 0108, 0131

Grandin 0064, 0027, 0099

Grundig 0108, 0099, 0253, 0374

HCM 0099

HI-Q 0074

Hanseatic 0064

Harley Davidson 0027

Harman/Kardon 0108

Harwood 0099

Hinari 0267, 0099, 0379

Hitachi 0064, 0267, 0027, 0069, 0068

Hughes 0069

Network Systems

Hypson 0099

ITT 0267, 0131, 0068

ITV 0064, 0305

Imperial 0027

Interfunk 0108

JVC 0072, 0094, 0068

Jensen 0068

KEC 0064, 0305

KLH 0099

Kaisui 0099

Kenwood 0094, 0068

Kodak 0062, 0064

Kolin 0070, 0068

Korpel 0099

LG 0064, 0072, 0069, 0507

LXI 0064

Lenco 0305

Leyco 0099

Lloyd’s 0027

Loewe 0064, 0108, 1589

Logik 0267, 0099

Luxor 0075, 0131, 0070

M Electronic 0027

MEI 0062

MGA 0267, 0070

MGN Technology 0267

MTC 0267, 0027

Magnasonic 1305

Magnavox 0062, 0066, 0108, 0027, 1808

Magnin 0267

Manesth 0072, 0099

Marantz 0062, 0108

Marta 0064

SR7002-8002_U_00_Setup.indd ivSR7002-8002_U_00_Setup.indd iv 07.8.24 1:16:36 PM07.8.24 1:16:36 PM

VCR

Source button name : VCR

Brand name Setup code

Matsui 0375, 0379

Matsushita 0062

Medion 0375

Memorex 0062, 0064, 0075, 0066, 0074, 0267, 0027, 0131,

0334, 0375, 1264

Memphis 0099

Metz 0064, 0374, 1589

Minolta 0069

Mitsubishi 0108, 0094, 0070, 0068, 0834

Motorola 0062, 0075

Multitech 0027, 0099

Murphy 0027

Myryad 0108

NAD 0131

NEC 0062, 0064, 0075, 0131, 0094, 0068

National 0253

Neckermann 0108

Nesco 0099

Newave 0064

Nikko 0064

Noblex 0267

Nokia 0267, 0131, 0068

Nordmende 0068, 0347

Oceanic 0027, 0068

Okano 0342, 0375

Olympus 0062, 0253

Optimus 0064, 0075, 0131, 0459

Orion 0211, 0375, 0379, 1506

Osaki 0064, 0027, 0099

Otto Versand 0108

Palladium 0064, 0068, 0099

Panasonic 0062, 0252, 0253, 0643, 1062, 1589

Pathe Marconi 0068

Penney 0062, 0064, 0267, 0069, 1062, 1264

Pentax 0069

Perdio 0027

Philco 0062

Philips 0062, 0108, 0645, 1108, 1208

Phonola 0108

Pilot 0064

Pioneer 0108, 0069, 0094

Polk Audio 0108

Proﬁ tronic 0267

Proline 0027

Proscan 0087, 1087

Protec 0099

Pulsar 0066

Pye 0108

Quasar 0062, 1062

Quelle 0108

RCA 0087, 0062, 0267, 0069, 0834, 1062, 1087

RadioShack 0027

Radiola 0108

Radix 0064

Randex 0064

VCR

Source button name : VCR

Brand name Setup code

Realistic 0062, 0064, 0075, 0074, 0027, 0131

Reoc 0375

ReplayTV 0641, 0643

Rex 0068

Roadstar 0064, 0267, 0099, 0305

Runco 0066

SBR 0108

SEG 0267

SEI 0108

STS 0069

Saba 0068, 0347

Salora 0070

Sampo 0064, 0075

Samsung 0267, 0072, 0459

Sanky 0075, 0066

Sansui 0027, 0094, 0068, 1506

Sanyo 0074, 0267, 0131

Saville 0379

Schaub Lorenz

0027, 0131, 0068

Schneider 0108, 0027, 0099

Scott 0211, 0072, 0070

Sears 0062, 0064, 0074, 0027, 0069, 0131, 1264

Seleco 0068

Semp 0072

Sharp 0075, 0834

Shintom 0131, 0099

Shogun 0267

Siemens 0064, 0108, 0131

Silva 0064

Singer 0072, 0099

Sinudyne 0108

Sonic Blue 0641, 0643

Sontec 0064

Sony 0062, 0059, 0060, 0027, 0663, 1259

Sunkai 0375

Sunstar 0027

Suntronic 0027

Sylvania 0062, 0108, 0027, 0070, 1808

Symphonic 0027

TMK 0267

Tandy 0027, 0131

Tashiko 0064, 0027

Diamond 0795

Digitrex 0699

Emerson 0618

Tatung 0108, 0072, 0027, 0094, 0068

Teac 0027, 0068, 0305, 0334, 0669

Technics 0062, 0253

Teco 0062, 0064, 0075, 0068

Teknika 0062, 0064, 0027

Teleavia 0068

Telefunken 0068, 0347

Tenosal 0099

Tensai 0027

Thomas 0027

VCR

Source button name : VCR

Brand name Setup code

Thomson 0087, 0094, 0068, 0347

Thorn 0131, 0068

Tivo 0645, 0663

Toshiba 0108, 0072, 0094, 0070, 0068, 0872

Totevision 0064, 0267

Uher 0267

Unitech 0267

Universum 0064, 0108, 0267, 0027

Vector 0072

Victor 0094, 0068

Video Concepts 0072

Videomagic 0064

Videosonic 0267

Villain 0027

Wards 0087, 0062, 0075, 0074, 0108, 0267, 0027, 0069,

0099

White Westinghouse 0099

XR-1000 0062, 0027, 0099

Yamaha 0068

Yamishi 0099

Yokan 0099

Yoko 0267

Zenith 0066, 0060, 0027, 1506

DVD

Source button name : DVD

Brand name Setup code

MARANTZ DVD1 0001

MARANTZ DVD2 0002

Acoustic Solutions 0757

Alba 0744

Amstrad 0740

Apex Digital 0699, 0744, 0782, 0821, 0823, 0857, 1127

Blaupunkt 0744

Blue Parade 0598

Bush 0740

Centrex 0699

Clatronic 0815

CyberHome 0741

DVD2000 0548

Daewoo 0811, 0797

Dansai 0797

Decca 0797

Denon 0517

Enterprise 0618

Fisher 0697

GE 0549, 0744

Go Video 0742

GoldStar 0768

Gradiente 0678

Greenhill 0744

Grundig 0566

Hitachi 0600, 0691

Hiteker 0699

DVD

Source button name : DVD

Brand name Setup code

JVC 0585, 0650

KLH 0744

Kenwood 0517, 0561

Koss 0678

LG 0768

Limit 0795

Magnavox 0530, 0702

Memorex 0858

MiCO 0750

Microsoft 0549

Mintek 0744

Mitsubishi 0548

Mustek 0757

Nesa 0744

Onkyo 0530

Oritron 0678

Palsonic 0699

Panasonic 0517, 0659, 1389

Philips 0530, 0566, 0673, 0881

Pioneer 0552, 0598, 0658, 0659

Polk Audio 0566

Proscan 0549

Qwestar 0678

RCA 0549, 0598, 0744

Rotel 0650

SM Electronic 0757

Samsung 0600

Sanyo 0697

Sharp 0657

Sherwood 0797

Shinsonic 0560

Slim Art 0811

Sony 0560, 0891

Sylvania 0702

Tatung 0797

Teac 0598, 0744

Technics 0517

Theta Digital 0598

Thomson 0549

Toshiba 0530

Urban Concepts 0530

XBox 0549

Yamaha 0517, 0566, 0572

Zenith 0530, 0618, 0768

Zeus 0811

SR7002-8002_U_00_Setup.indd vSR7002-8002_U_00_Setup.indd v 07.8.24 1:16:36 PM07.8.24 1:16:36 PM

DIRECT BUTTON

FUNCTIONS (RC8001SR)

Source button name : AMP

PAGE Command Note

PAGE 1 1 AUTO SELECT AUTO SURROUND

2 SELECT DOLBY MODE

3 DTS SELECT DTS MODE

4 EX/ES SELECT EX/ES

5 DIRECT SELECT PURE DIRECT

PAGE 2 1 MCH-ST SELECT MULTI CHANNEL

STEREO

2 STEREO SELECT STEREO MODE

3 HDMI 1 SELECT HDMI OUTPUT 1

4 HDMI 2 SELECT HDMI OUTPUT 2

5 EQ SELECT EQ MODE

PAGE 3 1 NIGHT NIGHT MODE ON/OFF

2 BASS + BASS +

3 BASS - BASS -

4 TREB + TREBLE +

5TREB - TREBLE -

PAGE 4 1 MULTI MULTI ROOM ON/OFF

2 M-SPKR MULTI SPEAKER ON/OFF

3 A/D SELECT ANALOG/DIGITAL

4 V-OFF VIDEO OFF

5 M-DAX M-DAX ON/OFF

Source button name : TUNER

PAGE Command Note

PAGE 1 1 FM SELECT FM

2 AM SELECT AM

3 XM/DAB SELECT XM RADIO

4 NEURAL SELECT NEURAL AUDIO

5 BAND SELECT RADIO BAND

PAGE 2 1 SCAN + FREQUENCY SCAN UP

2 SCAN - FREQUENCY SCAN DOWN

3 T-MODE SELECT MONO/STEREO

4 P-SCAN SELECT PRESET SCAN

5 P-INFO SHOW PRESET INFORMATION

PAGE 3 1 DISP DISPLAY

European 2 PTY RDS PTY

model only 3 AF RDS ALTERNATE FREQEMCY

4 STM RDS STATION MODE

5 DWR RDS DSR WAVE LANGUAGE

PAGE 4 1 SCAN + FREQUENCY SCAN UP

2 SCAN - FREQUENCY SCAN DOWN

3 DISP XM/RDS DISPLAY

4 CAT + CATEGORY SEARCH UP

5 CAT - CATEGORY SEARCH DOWN

Source button name : DVD

PAGE Command Note

PAGE 1 1 MENU SELECTS MAIN MENU

2 AUDIO SELECT LANGUAGES

3 SUB-T SELECT SUB TITLE

4 10+ DIGIT ENTRY +10

5 TRAY TRAY OPEN/CLOSE

PAGE 2 1 SETUP SELECTS SETUP MENU

2 ANGLE SELECTS ANGLE

3 OSD

ACTIVATES ON SCREEN DISPLAY

4 FF FAST FORWARD

5 REW REWIND

PAGE 3 1 SLOW SLOW FORWARD

2 L-PLAY LAST PLAY

3 SHUFLE SHUFFLE PLAY

4 REPEAT REPEAT MODE

5 A/B REPEAT A TO B

PAGE 4 1 RETURN RETURN TO MENU

2 T/C TITLE AND CHAPTER

3 3-D SURROUND ON/OFF

4 TITLE SELECTS TITLE MENU

5 ZOOM ZOOM MODE ON/OFF

Source button name : CD

PAGE Command Note

PAGE 1 1 DISC + CD CHANGER NEXT DISC

2 DISC - CD CHANGER PREVIOUS DISC

3 SHUFLE SHUFFLE PLAY

4 REPEAT REPEAT

5 TRAY TRAY OPEN/CLOSE

PAGE 2 1 TEXT ACTIVATE TEXT FUNCTION

2 AMS AUTO MUSIC SCAN

3 SCROLL SCROLL/RECALL

4 FF FAST FORWARD

5 REW REWIND

PAGE 3 1 DISC 1 CD CHANGER DISC 1

2 DISC 2 CD CHANGER DISC 2

3 DISC 3 CD CHANGER DISC 3

4 DISC 4 CD CHANGER DISC 4

5 DISC 5 CD CHANGER DISC 5

PAGE 4 1 UNIT SELECT UNIT No.

2 TITL-S SELECT TITLE SEARCH

3 TRACK SELECT TRACK No.

4 CATGRY SELECT CATEGORY

5 P-MODE SELECT PLAY MODE

Source button name : VCR

PAGE Command Note

PAGE 1 1 TV/VCR SELECT TV/VCR

2 2XPLAY TWICE NORMAL PLAYBACK

SPEED

3 SLOW SLOW PLAYBACK SPEED

4 STILL STILL FRAME

5 EJECT EJECT

PAGE 2 1 OTR ONE TOUCH RECORDING

2 AUDIO SELECT AUDIO MODE

3 SKIP

SKIP TO NEXT PROG.MARKER

4 FF FAST FORWARD

5 REW REWIND

PAGE 3 1 VIS + VHS INDEX SERCH NEXT

2 VIS-

VHS INDEX SERCH PREVIOUS

Source button name : CDR

PAGE Command Note

PAGE 1 1 INPUT SELECT INPUT SOURCE

2 INCR INCREMENTS TRACK No.

3 SYNC-R ACTIVATE SYNCRO

RECORDING

4 PROG ACTIVATE PROGRAM MODE

5 TRAY TRAY OPEN/CLOSE

PAGE 2 1 SCROLL SCROLL/RECALL

2 FINAL FINALIZES(WRITES TOC)

3 BLANK RECORDS BLANK

4 FF FAST FORWARD

5 REW REWIND

PAGE 3 1 BLANK RECORDS BLANK

2 REPEAT ACTIVATE REPEAT MODE

Source button name : TAPE

PAGE Command Note

PAGE 1 1 TAPE-A SELECT TAPE DECK A

2 TAPE-B SELECT TAPE DECK B

3 DIR AUTO REVERSE DIRECTION

4 TIME TIME DISPLAY

5 TRAY TRAY OPEN/CLOSE

PAGE 2 1 AMS AUTO MUSIC SCAN

4 FF FAST FORWARD

5 REW REWIND

Source button name : MD

PAGE Command Note

PAGE 1 1 REPEAT SELECTS REPEAT MODE

2 SHUFLE SELECTS SHUFFLE PLAY

3 DISP SELECTS DISPLAY MODE

4 EDIT SELECT EDIT MODE

5 EJECT EJECT

PAGE 2 1 SP/LP SELECTS SP/LP MODE

2 DELETE SELECTS DELETE

3 ENTER SELECTS ENTER

4 FF FAST FORWARD

5 REW REWIND

PAGE 3 1 MARKER SELECTS AUTO MARKER

2 PROG SELECTS PROGRAM MODE

3 SYNC-R SYNCRO REC

4 CHAR SELECTS CHARACTER MODE

Source button name : AUX 2

PAGE Command Note

PAGE 1 1 SHUFFL SELECT AUX1

2 REPEAT SELECT AUX2

3 MODE SELECT AUX3

4 SORT SELECT NET

5 MUTE

PAGE 2 1 INPUT+ INPUT SELECTOR FORWARD

2 INPUT- INPUT SELECTOR REVERSE

Source button name : AUX 1

PAGE Command Note

PAGE 1 1 SHUFFL SELECT SHUFFLE PLAY

2 REPEAT SELECT REPEAT PLAY

3 MODE

CHANGE USER INTERFACE MODE

4 SORT SORT DATA BASE

5 MUTE MUTE ON/OFF (TOGGLE)

PAGE 2 1 ALBUM+ NEXT ALBUM

2 ALBUM- PREVIOUS ALBUM

3 LIST+ NEXT PLAY LIST

4 LIST- PREVIOUS PLAY LIST

PAGE 3 1 ARTIST SORT ORDER (ARTIST)

2 ALBUM SORT ORDER (ALBUM)

3 SONG SORT ORDER (SONG)

4 GENRE SORT ORDER (GENRE)

5 P-LIST SORT ORDER (PLAY LIST)

PAGE 4 1 1 INPUT+ INPUT SELECTOR FORWARD

2 INPUT- INPUT SELECTOR REVERSE

SR7002-8002_U_00_Setup.indd viSR7002-8002_U_00_Setup.indd vi 07.8.24 1:16:36 PM07.8.24 1:16:36 PM

vii

SETUP CODES

(RC101)

Acer .................................................................................. 1141

Admiral ......................................................... 1002, 1009, 1089

Aiko ................................................................................... 1059

Aiwa ......................................................................... 1117, 1118

Akai ................................................................................... 1001

Amtron .............................................................................. 1023

Anam .................................................................................1113

Anam National .............................................. 1023, 1069, 1092

AOC .................................................... 1003, 1024, 1049, 1127

Audiovox ........................................................................... 1023

Bell & Howell .......................................................... 1009, 1025

Benq ........................................................................1104, 1142

Broksonic .............................................1003, 1097, 1098, 1113

Celebrity ........................................................................... 1001

Citizen ........................................................... 1003, 1013, 1023

1026, 1059, 1063

Colortyme ............................................................... 1003, 1043

Contec ...............................................................................1113

Contec/Cony ................................................. 1023, 1045, 1047

Craig ....................................................1020, 1022, 1023, 1113

Crown ..................................................................... 1023, 1067

Curtis Mathes ............................................... 1003, 1013, 1025

1026, 1062, 1103, 1110

Daewoo .............................................. 1003, 1013, 1024, 1035

1036, 1059, 1084, 1101

Daytron ......................................................... 1003, 1013, 1016

Dimensia ..................................................................1103, 1110

Dumont ......................................................... 1003, 1010, 1153

Electroband ...................................................................... 1001

Electrohome ....................................... 1001, 1003, 1069, 1133

Emerson ....................................................... 1003, 1013, 1015

1020, 1021, 1022, 1023

1025, 1038, 1044, 1045

1048, 1055, 1061, 1094

1096, 1099, 1101, 1113

Envision ............................................................................ 1003

Fisher .................................................. 1025, 1051, 1091, 1160

Fujitsu .................................................. 1038, 1124, 1125, 1155

Funai ..............................................................1023, 1038, 1113

Gateway ........................................................................... 1150

GE ..................................................... 1003, 1018, 1022, 1046

1054, 1069, 1085, 1103

1110, 1113, 1133, 1136, 1153

Goldstar ........................................................ 1003, 1013, 1024

1030, 1045, 1080

1100, 1112, 1154

Hallmark ........................................................................... 1003

Hisense ..............................................................................1116

Hitachi ................................................. 1003, 1012, 1031, 1032

1037, 1041, 1045, 1047

1065, 1068, 1082, 1088

1094, 1139, 1140, 1145, 1159

Inﬁ nity ............................................................................... 1067

Janeil ................................................................................ 1134

JBL ................................................................................... 1067

JC Penney .................................................... 1003, 1013, 1018

1019, 1024, 1026

1046, 1047, 1054

1063, 1083, 1085

1100, 1103, 1110

1112, 1133, 1154

Jensen .............................................................................. 1003

JVC ............................................................... 1028, 1029, 1045

1047, 1050, 1060, 1065

Kawasho ................................................................. 1001, 1003

Kenwood ........................................................................... 1003

Kloss Novabeam ................................ 1023, 1056, 1057, 1134

KTV ............................................................... 1013, 1023, 1033

1034, 1073, 1099, 1113

LG ........................................................................... 1024, 1030

M.Wards ....................................................... 1002, 1009, 1038

Magnavox ..................................................... 1003, 1052, 1053

1056, 1057, 1063

1067, 1081, 1106

Marantz ............................................... 1003, 1031, 1067, 1122

Mitsubishi ...................................................... 1003, 1024, 1051

1115, 1122, 1133

Motorola .................................................................. 1014, 1069

NEC .......................................... 1003, 1012, 1024, 1043, 1069

NET-TV .................................................................... 1137, 1150

Orion ....................................................................... 1020, 1096

Panasonic .................................. 1017, 1067, 1069, 1095, 1111

Philips ................................................. 1003, 1011, 1045, 1052

1054, 1056, 1057, 1058

1063, 1067, 1069, 1106

Pioneer ......................................................... 1003, 1018, 1037

1070, 1071, 1094

1145, 1147, 1149

Plasmsync ........................................................................ 1135

Portland .............................................. 1003, 1013, 1024, 1059

Price Club ......................................................................... 1026

Prism ................................................................................ 1018

Proscan .............................................. 1004, 1005, 1006, 1007

1008, 1085, 1103, 1110

Proton ..................................................................... 1003, 1045

Quasar ....................................... 1010, 1069, 1073, 1111, 1153

Radio Shack ................................................. 1003, 1013, 1015

1023, 1024, 1025, 1045

1100, 1103, 1110, 1113

RCA .............................................................. 1003, 1004, 1005

1006, 1007, 1008

1014, 1024, 1049, 1069

1075, 1079, 1085, 1087

1088, 1093, 1094, 1101

1103, 1110, 1113, 1153

Realistic .............................................. 1013, 1015, 1023, 1025

1045, 1100, 1103, 1110

Runco ..................................................................... 1010, 1153

Sampo .............................................................................. 1150

Samsung ............................................ 1003, 1013, 1024, 1026

1040, 1045, 1062, 1078

1083, 1090, 1100, 11051114

1120, 1121, 1146, 1148, 1157

Sansui ................................................................................1119

Sanyo ................................................. 1003, 1025, 1051, 1072

1077, 1091, 1156, 1157, 1158

Sharp ............................................................ 1003, 1013, 1014

1015, 1045, 1055, 1064

1066, 1076, 1089, 1123

Signature .......................................................................... 1009

Sony ..............................................................1001, 1102, 1108

Soundesign ................................1003, 1023, 1038, 1063, 1113

Starlite .............................................................................. 1023

Supre-Macy ...................................................................... 1134

Sylvania ........................................................ 1003, 1039, 1042

1052, 1053, 1056, 1057

1063, 1067, 1089, 1151

Symphonic .................................................... 1023, 1039, 1044

Tandy ................................................................................ 1014

Tatung ............................................................................... 1069

Technics ............................................................................ 1018

Techwood ............................................................... 1003, 1018

Teknika ............................................... 1003, 1009, 1013, 1023

1024, 1026, 1038, 1045

1047, 1059, 1063, 1111, 1113

Telecaption ....................................................................... 1074

Toshiba ......................................................... 1003, 1019, 1025

1026, 1042, 1074, 1098

1107, 1111, 1135, 1136

Totevision .......................................................................... 1013

Universal ................................................................. 1046, 1054

Video Concepts .................................................................1113

Viewsonic ..................................................... 1006, 1022, 1109

1128, 1129, 1130, 1131

1138, 1143, 1145, 1150

Wards ........................................................... 1003, 1009, 1015

1024, 1038, 1044, 1046

1052, 1054, 1056, 1057

1067, 1086, 1103, 1110

White Westinghouse ............................................... 1001, 1101

Yamaha .................................................................. 1003, 1024

Zenith ............................................................ 1003, 1009, 1010

1132, 1144, 1153

AIWA ............................................................. 3001, 3002, 3003

AKAI ............................................................. 3004, 3005, 3006

AUDIO ............................................................................. 3007

AUDIO LABS .................................................................... 3008

CALIFORNIA .................................................................... 3008

CARVER ....................................................... 3010, 3011, 3009

CASIO .................................................................... 3012, 3020

CURTIS .................................................................. 3020, 3012

DENON ............................................................................. 3013

EMERSON ....................................................................... 3014

FISHER .................................... 3011, 3015, 3016, 3017, 3018

GE .................................................................................... 3019

GENEXXA .................................................... 3014, 3021, 3020

HARMON ...................................................... 3022, 3023, 3051

HITACHI ........................................................................... 3020

INKEL ............................................................................... 3024

JC PENNEY ................................................. 3012, 3020, 3025

JVC ......................................................................... 3026, 3027

KARDON ...................................................... 3022, 3051, 3023

KENWOOD ......................................... 3028, 3029, 3030, 3031

3032, 3033

KRELL .............................................................................. 3010

LUXMAN ............................................. 3035, 3036, 3037, 3038

LX I ............................................................... 3012, 3020, 3014

MAGNAVOX ................................................. 3010, 3039, 3040

MARANTZ .......................................... 3010, 3041, 3042, 3043

MATHES ................................................................. 3012, 3020

MCS ........................................................................ 3012, 3020

MGA .................................................................................. 3023

MISSION .......................................................................... 3010

MITSUBISHI ........................................................... 3023, 3044

NAD ........................................................................ 3034, 3045

NAKAMICHI .................................................. 3046, 3047, 3048

NEC MCS ......................................................................... 3025

NIKKO .................................................................... 3007, 3016

ONKYO ............................................... 3049, 3050, 3051, 3052

3055, 3098

OPTIMUS ................................. 3011, 3014, 3020, 3028, 3053

3054, 3056, 3057, 3058, 3059

PANASONIC ................................................. 3008, 3060, 3061

SR7002-8002_U_00_Setup.indd viiSR7002-8002_U_00_Setup.indd vii 07.8.24 1:16:37 PM07.8.24 1:16:37 PM

viii

PHILIPS .............................................. 3009, 3010, 3010, 3040

PIONEER ................................. 3020, 3021, 3062, 3063, 3064

QUASAR .......................................................................... 3008

RCA .......................................... 3011, 3014, 3065, 3066, 3067

3068, 3069

REALISTIC ......................................... 3011, 3014, 3020, 3042

3054, 3057

ROTEL .............................................................................. 3010

RS ORIGINAL .................................................................. 3070

SAE ........................................................................ 3010, 3083

SAMSUNG ....................................................................... 3071

SANSUI .............................................. 3014, 3068, 3072, 3073

SANYO ..................................... 3011, 3018, 3074, 3075, 3076

SCOTT ............................................................................. 3014

SEARS ..................................... 3012, 3014, 3020, 3028, 3042

SHARP ......................................................... 3028, 3042, 3077

SHERWOOD ............................ 3042, 3056, 3070, 3078, 3024

SHURE ............................................................................. 3025

SONY ............................. 3039, 3079, 3080, 3081, 3082, 3097

SYLVANIA ......................................................................... 3010

SYMPHONIC .................................................................... 3083

TEAC ........................................ 3016, 3042, 3057, 3083, 3084

3085, 3086

TECHNICA ............................... 3007, 3008, 3061, 3087, 3088

THETA DIGITAL ................................................................ 3040

TOSHIBA .......................................................................... 3045

VICTOR ............................................................................ 3026

YAMAHA ................................... 3007, 3089, 3090, 3091, 3092

ZENITH ..................................... 3016, 3093, 3094, 3095, 3096

DVD

Aiwa ........................................................................ 2036, 2037

Apex ............................... 2012, 2017, 2018, 2019, 2021, 2034

BOSE ...................................................................... 2038, 2039

Denon ..................................................................... 2047, 2048

Funai ................................................................................. 2049

GE ...................................................... 2009, 2020, 2029, 2033

Harman Kardon ................................................................ 2061

Hitachi ........................................................... 2008, 2012, 2031

JVC ............................................................... 2006, 2010, 2040

2041, 2042, 2043

Kenwood ................................................................. 2053, 2054

Koss .................................................................................. 2058

Magnavox ........................................... 2007, 2011, 2023, 2025

Marantz ............................................................................. 2025

Mitsubishi ................................................................ 2011, 2015

Onkyo ............................................................................... 2062

Oritron ..................................................................... 2009, 2030

Panasonic ........................................... 2003, 2015, 2016, 2055

Philips ........................................................... 2007, 2011, 2058

Pioneer ......................................................... 2002, 2014, 2056

Proscan ........................................................ 2009, 2020, 2032

RCA .......................................... 2005, 2009, 2020, 2035, 2057

Sampo .............................................................................. 2041

Samsung .................................. 2008, 2012, 2022, 2024, 2027

Sanyo ..................................................................... 2050, 2052

Sharp ...................................................................... 2044, 2045

Sherwood ......................................................................... 2051

Sony ............................................................. 2001, 2013, 2059

Toshiba ............................................... 2004, 2008, 2026, 2028

Yamaha .................................................................. 2046, 2060

Zenith ................................................................................ 2010

DSS

Alphastar .......................................................................... 4027

BSB .................................................................................. 4021

Chaparral .......................................................................... 4039

DIRECTV ................................................................ 4001, 4016

DISH Network ................................................................... 4030

Drake ................................................................................ 4026

Echostar ................................... 4007, 4017, 4018, 4019, 4020

Express Vu ....................................................................... 4017

Fujitsu ............................................................................... 4025

GE ................................................................ 4002, 4008, 4009

General Instruments ............................................... 4036, 4037

Hitachi ..................................................................... 4001, 4015

Hughes ................................................................... 4001, 4016

Janeil ................................................................................ 4025

JVC ................................................................................... 4017

Mitsubishi .......................................................................... 4001

Panasonic ............................................................... 4004, 4010

Philips ..................................................................... 4031, 4035

Proscan .............................................. 4002, 4008, 4009, 4011

Radio Shack ........................................................... 4036, 4037

RCA .................................................... 4002, 4008, 4009, 4029

Realistic ............................................................................ 4040

Rural Cable ....................................................................... 4036

Samsung ................................................................ 4022, 4027

Sony ............................................................. 4003, 4012, 4014

Star Choice ....................................................................... 4032

Star Trak ........................................................................... 4024

STS ................................................................................... 4038

SuperDish ......................................................................... 4028

Toshiba ................................................................... 4001, 4034

Uniden .......................................................... 4005, 4006, 4013

Video Pall ......................................................................... 4025

Zenith ...................................................................... 4025, 4033

SR7002-8002_U_00_Setup.indd viiiSR7002-8002_U_00_Setup.indd viii 07.8.24 1:16:37 PM07.8.24 1:16:37 PM

www.marantz.com

You can find your nearest authorized distributor or dealer on our website.

is a registered trademark.

Printed in China 08/2007 00M35CW851250 mzh-d

SR7002-8002_U_00_Setup.indd ixSR7002-8002_U_00_Setup.indd ix 07.8.24 1:16:37 PM07.8.24 1:16:37 PM

Marantz Sr7002 Users Manual 8002_U_00_cover

SR8002 to the manual bb7146e0-f248-ca14-b12c-9e0bce22e45b

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation